A Special Place
By Sequoyah Pendor
Warning!
This story contains sexually explicit, erotic events involving alternative
sexualities. Do not read the contents if they will offend you. If accessing
this site causes you to break local laws (village, town, city, county, province,
state, or country, etc.), please leave now or accept the consequences, should
there be
any.
By reading or downloading this file you implicitly declare that you accept
total responsibility for your actions in regard to material intended for
mature, responsible members of society capable of making decisions about
the content of documents they wish to read. You are accessing this story
of your own free volition. You have been warned!
Disclaimer
This is a work of fiction; any coincidence is just that, a coincidence.
Copyright Notice
This story is copyright by the author and the author retains all rights.
You may distribute, copy, or print one copy of this story however you like,
PROVIDED this copyright notice remains intact and you do not change the story
in any way. Also you may not post this story to any website or charge any
fee to anyone to distribute or access this story.
(Parts Twenty-one - Thirty)
Part Twenty-one
Eugene
I was sleeping in the guest room at
David Andrews' when I was suddenly awakened by Dad. He had his belt in his
hand and started beating me again. I had thought I was safe. David had promised
me Dad couldn't beat me any more and now he was. My back was killing me.
I could hardly keep from fainting from the pain. I started screaming and
when I did, Dad beat me harder. I screamed louder and louder. Why didn't
someone come to help? Where was David? Where was Michael? Why had they let
Dad get to me? I screamed and screamed and screamed. Suddenly I wasn't in
the dark any longer. When the lights came on, I realized I had been dreaming,
but my back did hurt. I was in terrible pain. I should have taken a pain
pill before I went to bed. But I had. I really was confused when Michael
sat on the edge of the bed and pulled my head to his shoulder. I was crying
like a baby.
"It's ok, Eugene. It's ok," Michael
said as he stroked my hair and held me close without touching my back. "You
must have been having a nightmare."
"I was. I was dreaming Dad had come
here and was beating me again. But my back really does hurt. It hurts worse
now than it did this afternoon."
"It's ok. Dad will be here in a minute,
I'm sure. Just relax all you can." Michael was still stroking my hair and
holding me when David came in the room. "Dad, Eugene was having a nightmare
and his back hurts terribly."
"Margaret left a shot of pain killer
just in case although she didn't think Eugene would need it. I'll get it."
When David came back with the shot
he told me it was more than I had in the afternoon and I would definitely
be feeling no pain shortly and would sleep. He gave me the shot and then
checked my back. "I don't think I need do anything more, but it's a lot worse
than Margaret and I thought."
"Eugene, would you like for me to sleep
with you?" Michael asked.
"You would do that even though I am...."
"What's that got to do with anything?"
Michael asked. "If you want me to sleep here, of course I will."
"Well, if you don't mind."
"Do you want me to put on boxers or
something?" He asked. For the first time I noticed the Andrews men were as
naked as the day they were born. "Only if it would make you more comfortable."
"Definitely not," Michael said as his
voice got further and further away. Michael lay beside me and I spooned into
his back, feeling warm and safe and wonderful as I started floating. I was
floating, floating, floating above a beautiful river. I was floating above
the falls then I just drifted...."
When I woke up, I was completely disoriented.
I was groggy and didn't know where I was. For some reason, my back ached.
When I got my eyes opened, I realized there was a strange man sleeping with
me. Suddenly, I remembered where I was and why my back hurt. I tried not
to awaken Michael, but as soon as I moved, he was wide awake.
"I hope you slept well after that nightmare,"
he said.
"I did. Now if I don't get to the bathroom,
I'm going to...."
"I'm right behind you!
When we had finished our business,
Michael said, "I'm going for my morning run. The Gang of Four runs every
morning. I'll tell Dad you're awake since he'll want to check your back.
I guess you'll just have to take a spit bath--you know, water in the basin
and a wash cloth-- since I'm sure he won't want you getting your back wet.
See you at breakfast."
A few minutes after Michael had left
the room, David came in. "How are you feeling this morning?" he asked.
"I have felt better. My back's still
painful, but not like it was last night."
"Let me take a look at it." David had
his bag with him and gently removed the bandages from my back. "I'd hoped
I could leave the bandages off so your wounds could get some air. That's
best, but I'm afraid some of the places are still oozing and your shirt might
stick to them. Also, it would probably rub the places which are raw and that
would be very uncomfortable. When you get back from whatever Millie has up
her sleeve, you can take your shirt off and I'll check the bandages this
evening. You'll have to take a tub bath I'm afraid and be very careful not
to get your back wet. When you finish, I'll redress your wounds. Just give
me a yell when you're ready."
I was really glad I could get a real
bath even though it was in a tub. When I finished, I found my razor, shaved,
brushed my teeth and put on a pair of boxers, then called David. He came
up and redressed my back and I finished dressing and went downstairs. Michael
came in the front door soon after I got down. "Michael, I want you to know
that I really appreciate what you did last night. I'm sure it was not easy
for you...."
"Why do you say that? You were a friend
in trouble. I didn't do much, but I did want to do what I could. That's what
friends are for. Look, I know you're gay and that makes no never mind. And
even if I were gay, you certainly wouldn't hit on me. You have a boyfriend.
If you were straight, I would expect Mary Kathryn to keep her hands off you
if you were in bed with her. Same thing, right?"
"I still want you to know that I appreciate
what you did very much. Thanks."
"Anything for a friend."
David came down and we had breakfast.
"I'm afraid Michael and I aren't the best cooks in the world. In fact, if
it hadn't been for milk, cold cereal and fruit, we wouldn't have had breakfast
for the past two or so years."
"Better than I'm used to," I said.
After breakfast, David left for the
hospital and Michael was off to school with Matt and Luke after they came
in to see how I was doing. I waited around, doing nothing, trying not to
think until Millie came.
She had said she would pick me up around
8:30 and she arrived promptly at 8:30. "Have you had breakfast?" she asked
as soon as she was inside. I told her I had eaten with David and Michael.
"Well, we need to talk and decide what we're going to do. Last night you
said your father took back his name. What did you mean?"
I told her the whole story again as
I had heard it from David and the others who had gone to my house. "How do
you feel about that? I mean really deep down inside."
"I guess I may need to think some more
about it--no, I don't--if he thinks I am a disgrace to the Joyce name I must
be so far as he is concerned. I know that, to my mind, he is a disgrace to
the human race. I have put up with his abuse as long as I can remember. I
tried to do what he wanted me to do until one day I realized I could never
be what he wanted. He once said I was a mistake and never should have happened.
I guess yesterday he just made clear by his actions what he always thought
and said; I was an unwanted mistake and kept being a mistake. He was ashamed
of me, so why should I be proud to bear his name? He doesn't want that and
I know, deep down inside, I agree with him--not that I am a mistake, but
that I don't want to bear the same name he does."
"You're real sure of that?"
"Yea, I'm real sure."
"Fortunately you're eighteen and don't
have to have your parents' permission for anything unless you're living with
them in which case I'd expect you to... I was going to say 'do as they said,'
but there are limits and your mom and dad both went way past them. And, in
any case, it doesn't matter now. They tossed you out so you're a free man.
I want to say some things and then we'll talk.
"Last night I started thinking about
grandkids again. I swear, I never thought that would bother me, and I'd die
before I let Jason know it, but I really miss having grandkids. I want you
to know something about this Willingham family and especially about Jason.
"You know, of course, I have money.
I have piles of money, more than Frank left me and he left me a bundle. Hell,
I've got money I have forgotten about. Frank and I both earned our money
by hard work. He came from an old Concord family everyone thought was wealthy,
but they weren't. They owned a lot of land, but when it came to money, they
couldn't buy a pot to pee in. My family had nothing. Mom and Dad were hard
workers and were determined their kids would have a better life than they.
Both families scraped and skimped to find money to see that we got a good
education, but that was it. After that we were on our own. We really worked
hard. Frank found ways to make the Willingham's land pay off. Our accounting
firm was making good money so we were, over the years, made wealthy. Our
one sorrow was that we couldn't seem to have children."
"When we discovered I was pregnant,
we had just about given up hope of ever having a child. When Jason was born
everyone kept telling us he would be spoiled rotten--an only son born late
in life to a couple who had just about given up hope. What could you expect?
Frank and I sat down the day Jason was baptized and talked a long time about
his future. We were determined he would not end up like the spoiled, wealthy
kids we had known at Oberlin. We entered into a pact with each other saying
we would never allow Jason to become a rotten, wealthy snob if we could help
it." Millie laughed, "I told Frank, 'He might be a rotten kid, but unless
he gets money somewhere else, he'll never be a wealthy rotten kid!' And we
agreed on that. You don't want to hear all this, do you?"
"Sure I do. I'm certain it has a point
or you wouldn't be telling me."
"You don't think it's just a senile
old lady rattling on?"
"Not yet anyway."
Millie laughed her full belly laugh
and said, "Eugene, I can see we're going to get along fine. Well, anyway,
Jason was and is a good kid. He's honest, cares about people, is very loving
and just a great human being. And I'm not saying that because he's mine.
During high school, he got into a few minor scrapes usually, I am proud to
say, because he ended up fighting to protect someone. He did well in school
and when it came time for him to go away to college, we told him we would
provide for his education at any place he wanted to go. We would pay all
his expenses within reason, but we were not paying him to party. He did well
in college his first year and asked to move off campus. He didn't like the
noise and horseplay in the dorm. Seemed reasonable and he got an apartment....
There is a point to all this, Eugene, trust me."
"I will, for a while longer."
"Why I ought to slap your face for
talking to an old lady that way," Millie said and drew back her hand. I covered
my face with my hands and started bawling like a baby. "Damn, how could I
be such a fool," Millie said as she jumped out of her chair, ran to me and
put her arms around me, avoiding my back. "Eugene, please forgive me. I have
never struck a child in my life and never would. I intended to joke with
you as I often did with Jason, but it was a damn poor joke. Can you forgive
me?" she asked as she pulled me into her ample bosom and rocked me, stroking
my hair. When I looked up, Millie had tears in her eyes.
"I'm sorry. I should have known you
wouldn't hurt me, but I have been hit so many times, I just react."
"Eugene, if I can make it possible,
you'll never be hit again. I am so very, very sorry."
"It's ok now. Finish your story."
"Are you sure you're ok?"
"I'm sure."
"Well, Jason had dated some in high
school, but never anything as serious as even having a steady girlfriend.
I guess we should have known something was different about him, but we never
thought anything about it. Anyway, the year after his father died, he came
home Christmas and brought one of the most beautiful men I had ever seen
with him. When they walked in, Jason said, 'Mom, I'd like you to meet Anthony,
the light of my life and my soulmate.' I suppose I was expected to be shocked
or something, but I wasn't and before the holidays were over not only was
I convinced Jason was a lucky devil, but also that Anthony was as good as
they come. It seems that Jason, even in high school, knew he was different
and by the end of his first year in college he admitted to himself he was
gay, but told no one. One night at Canterbury--that's a college group
for Episcopal students--Anthony showed up and and Jason fell head over heels
for him--love at first sight Jason called it. I called it lust at first sight.
Jason laughed when I said that and said I was probably right, but only at
first sight. 'Mom, I fell for Anthony like a ton of bricks the first time
I laid eyes on him and it kept getting worse--better--whatever.' But, according
to Jason, Anthony was so obviously straight that he never dared say anything
to him, but managed to be around him a lot."
"Anyway, one night there was a discussion
group about sexuality at Canterbury and someone said something about gays
bed hopping and that set Anthony off big time. He told the group they were
a bunch of hypocrites because they accused gays of doing what most of them
were doing. 'I'm gay and I haven't had sex with anyone since high school
and I suspect few of you can say that. I don't have sex to get my nuts off'--I
suspect the Episcopal chaplain wished he hadn't allowed that can of worms
to be opened--'And I won't have sex again until I love someone and he loves
me.' I guess after that bomb shell landed the meeting broke up quickly. Jason
asked Anthony if he'd like to grab a beer. They sat in a pub until it closed,
then Jason invited Anthony to his apartment and they talked until daylight.
They started doing a lot of things together and were having great fun, but
Jason was still reluctant to say anything for fear of driving Anthony away.
He has my blood in him and he doesn't take rejection very well."
"Finally, Jason decided he could be
cautious the rest of his life and lose Anthony or he could risk everything
and maybe win Anthony. Jason planned a trip over Thanksgiving break and asked
Anthony to go with him. The next thing I know, he shows up Christmas and
announces they are lovers. The first time I saw Anthony he was as neat as
a pin, but everything he had on was obviously well worn. Anthony's
family had nothing but a determination their kids would have a better life
than they. They helped all they could, but Anthony worked like a dog in high
school to earn money for college and to earn scholarships. He had it hard,
but he appreciated every bit of help he got. Now why did I tell you all that?
To tell the truth, I'm not really sure except to say that Jason is a wonderful
son who has a partner whom I love as much as Jason. In one sense, Jason lived
an easy life compared to Anthony, yet both worked hard to make something
of themselves. Both had the best their parents could give which for both
was an excellent education."
"When they graduated, I gave them money
to put their education to use. Both are well off now so I feel free to spend
money as I damn well please. The point of all this? I'd like to know if you
are sure you are willing to give up being a Joyce?"
Matt had commented about Millie's tendency
to change horses in midstream and I was unprepared for her question. I couldn't
see where she was headed. "I guess if the Joyces don't want me, I'm man enough
to give them what they want. No, I would just as soon never be called a Joyce
again."
"Do you think you could handle being
a Willingham, knowing what would be expected of you as well as what you can
expect?"
I know my mouth fell open and I couldn't
say anything for a while.
"Well, is that open mouth a yes or
a no."
"I don't know. What do you mean?"
"I told you I really got into that
grandmother thing yesterday and I liked it. Would you be willing for me to
adopt you? Technically you'd be a son, but to me you'd be a grandson."
"I'd be honored, Millie, to be your
grandson."
"Now I hope you don't think that means
you'll have money to throw around. Jason worked hard for his education and
I'll expect you to do the same, but I also expect you to have the time to
put into getting a good education, having some fun and working on your music."
"Millie, I didn't expect anything from
my parents and that's about what I got. All I'll expect from you is to be
treated like a grandson, if that's what you want and I sure know better than
to expect to be treated as a spoiled grandson."
"Couldn't have said it better myself.
Well, let's get going. We've got a lot of paperwork to get done. How are
you feeling, by the way?"
"I feel fine... actually that's a lie.
I hurt like hell, but I didn't want to take a pain pill unless I absolutely
had to."
"Hold off if you can otherwise someone
might say you were on drugs when you signed the hundred pages with your John
Hancock. Well, let's hit the road."
When we reached her lawyer's office
it was obvious Millie had some lawyers earning their money since yesterday.
There were stacks and stacks of paper.
"Mr. Joyce," a young lawyer--who obviously
knew Millie because his well-tailored three-piece suit displayed his bubble
butt to perfection--said, as he handed me a document, "here is a copy of
the restraining order against your father. Frankly, it will not keep him
away from you if he wants to harass you. However, should he do so, he'll
spend time as a guest of the county."
"Mrs. Willingham, here are the documents
necessary to adopt Mr. Joyce. They, of course, provide for a name change
from Joyce to Willingham. Are you sure you want to do this?
"Mr. Fox, have I ever asked you to
do something and then proved to be undecided?"
"Well, no, but this is a pretty important
step."
"Don't think I have ever been more
sure of anything since I said, 'I will,' on my wedding day."
"Mr. Joyce, since you are eighteen,
this is an adult decision you are making. The state doesn't require your
parent's permission, but I want you to be very sure you know what you are
doing. You are saying 'No' to your birth family--so far as the state is involved,
they will no longer be your parents. Legally, you will be as much a son of
Mrs. Willingham as her son Jason. I want you to be very sure that is what
you want."
"Mr. Fox, there is only one thing in
this world I'm more sure of." Millie looked at me and smiled.
"Well, I'll get witnesses in here so
you and Mrs. Willingham can sign all these papers. As soon as that is done,
we have an appointment with a judge to make everything final unless either
of you want to write in a waiting period during which you can change your
mind."
"I think we know what we're doing,"
I said, and smiled at Millie.
When we had finished signing everything,
Mr. Fox asked that I wait in another room. "Mrs. Willingham is making some
changes in her will," he explained.
I had no idea that the justice system
moved with a speed that would make a glacier look like a speed demon. It
was after noon before Millie and I got to lunch and I was starved. In the
excitement of the morning, I had forgotten about my back, but as soon as
I sat down, it made its presence known. "From the look on your face you're
having second thoughts or are hurting like hell," Millie said.
"If I had any second thoughts, which
I do not, my back right now would vote me down!"
"Go ahead and take a pain pill now.
The only thing we have left to do is go to school and get records changed,
Mr. Eugene Willingham."
"Yes ma'am, Ma."
"Ok, there are limits Mr. Willingham,"
Millie said and laughed one of her great laughs.
I hurt like hell, but I don't know
when I had been happier--except when Larry told me he loved me. I smiled
and said, "Millie, no one has ever made me as happy as you have...." Millie
raised an eyebrow. "I mean except Larry."
"If you hadn't said that I think I'd
give you back to the Joyces. Well, take your pill. Our food's here." After
we had almost finished eating, Millie looked at me with a very serious look
on her face. "I've got one more question, Eugene. What about your sister?"
"Millie, we have never been close.
About the only thing we ever did together was try to protect each other from
Mom and Dad--I mean...."
"I know what you mean. Don't worry
about it."
"Anyway, we chose different ways of
escaping. I buried myself in my music then after I got to know Larry, I spent
as much time as possible with him. Really, I hardly know Janice. I do know
she hates school and has skipped so much she's in real trouble there. She
hangs out with a really rough crowd at school and, when she slips out at
night, I suspect she and Wallace hang out with some rough kids. About the
only time I have ever heard her say she was happy was when she spent summers
with Dad's sister in Arizona. I guess that being far away was a part of it.
Plus, there are three cousins--all girls--one older, one younger and one
about Janice's age. When she was there was the only time she got to
do real girl things--lipstick, colored her hair, you know, girl things. I
suspect if she had a choice she would go there to live."
"Well, why don't we check that out
as an option. You're sure she won't mind being separated from you?"
"Quite sure. She just wants out of
the hell hole we've lived in and, as I said, we were never close."
"I think we need to drop by protective
services on our way to school. Want dessert?
"Millie, I don't think I could be force
fed another thing!"
"Then let's roll."
When we got to protective services,
the social worker who came out to the house yesterday was busy so Millie
told the receptionist we would wait. We only had to wait for about ten minutes.
When we got into the office, Millie told her why we came by. "Eugene has
been taken care of. I adopted him because I knew him and the good stuff he
has inside. He tells me he and his sister were never close and he thought
she would like to live with an aunt in Arizona if that were possible. Where
does she stand now?"
"She stayed with Dr. Bailey last night
and I have been working on placement when I had time today. We have to have
her placed within five days after the court hearing and that was this morning.
Neither of her parents showed up and that constitutes abandonment. But she
can't stay with Dr. Bailey beyond the five days without Dr. Bailey being
certified a foster parent. That probably could be done, but it takes time
and I understand Dr. Bailey is going to be kinda busy for awhile."
"That's right. She's being married
Sunday. I had forgotten that. Would it be as complicated to get her to her
aunt's?"
"Not at all, since she's a relative.
Janice is sixteen so some of the rules are more relaxed for kids her age."
"I don't know my aunt's phone number
or address, but she works for Office Depot in Phoenix."
"That should be enough. If you have
time, I'll call her right now."
"It's almost 2:00 and we need to get
to the school before it's out, but we have time. Let me call Ms. Jones and
make sure she will be there when we get to school." The social worker--her
desk plate said she was Ms. Anderson--pushed the phone across her desk. Millie
dialed without having to look up the number. I suspected she kept a pretty
close tab on school these days. "Ms. Jones, please," she said into the phone.
In a minute she continued, "Constance, Millie. I'll be at school as soon
as I can get some things cleared up here in town. Could you make sure Ms.
Norman is also there? We have some important business to attend to.... No,
I don't think it's more trouble," Millie smiled as she looked at me. I smiled
back, probably kinda goofy because I was feeling no pain--literally and figuratively!
When Millie finished, she pushed the
phone back across the desk and Ms. Anderson dialed for directory assistance,
wrote down a number and said, "Thank you." She then dialed another number.
She looked up as she said, "We're at the 'if you wish, press' stage. Eugene,
I forgot to ask, what is your aunt's name?"
"Sandra Martinez."
"'Yes, could I speak to Ms. Sandra
Martinez, please. Well, yes, if Ms. Martinez is the manager.' They are paging
her. 'Yes, Mrs. Martinez. This is Carletta Anderson. I am a social worker
with protective services in Concor.... No, Ms. Martinez, no one has been
seriously hurt--well, that's not quite true.... Yes, you're right. No, Eugene
was severely beaten, but he is eighteen and I couldn't get involved in ....
No, no. I'll let him tell you about his situation. He is here in the office
with me right now. I'm calling about Janice.... No, she has not been physically
hurt, at least not this time'." The call went on for awhile as Ms. Anderson
explained the situation Janice was in. When she asked Aunt Sandra if she
was willing to take Janice, it was obvious from her face the answer was "Yes."
She then explained since Janice would be moving out of state, the state would
be unable to pay her for foster care. "We will try to get child support money
from Mr. Joyce, but I wouldn't plan on it. Can you handle the financial burden
of an extra child?... You have just been made manager? Congratulations. I'm
sure the extra money could be used otherwise, but I am thankful that you
accepted without hesitation. Janice needs a lot of loving and care and Eugene
suggested the only place she was ever happy was with you.... She is staying
with a woman doctor here now, but I think we can get the paper work done
and have her on her way today, maybe tomorrow at the latest.... Yes, please
do give me your home number as well and I will call you as soon as things
are in order.... Of course we will allow Janice to decide whether or not
she wants to come, but she will have to realize that the alternative is an
unknown foster home.... I'm sure she will appreciate your eagerness to have
her as soon as possible and I'll call you when I know something definite.
Here's Eugene."
I explained to Aunt Sandra what had
happened and why Janice was taken out of the house. She was delighted that
I had been taken under Millie's wing. When she asked if that was going to
put a real burden on an elderly lady, I responded, "Aunt Sandra, I think
she would have your head for calling her an elderly lady. She calls herself
an old woman at times, but I don't think she'd cotton to having the title
used by someone else." I laughed and winked at Millie. She got a good laugh
out of that. "No, I think she can manage to find the money for my needs so
I appreciate your offer to help out and I know she does, but it is not at
all necessary.... Well, I'm feeling no pain right now. I took a pain pill
a short time ago and I'm kinda floating, but I understand he did a crackerjack
job on my back. Dr. Bailey, with whom Janice is staying, and David Andrews
are taking care of it. He is an EMS nurse and I spentthe night at his place....
I know and I appreciate your concern, but I'm more than ok now that I am
out of that hell hole of your brother and sister-in-law, and knowing that
Janice will be loved and cared for completes things for me. Sure, I'll keep
in touch. Bye."
"It sounds as though Janice will be
in a good home so you don't have to worry about her," Ms. Anderson said.
"She will be and I won't."
We got to school near the beginning
of the last period when I would have been introducing the ensemble to the
music we had worked on Saturday. When we reached the office, Millie briefed
Ms. Jones on what had happened. "Now we need to get some records changed.
As of today, this is Eugene Willingham standing before you," she said, placing
her hand on my shoulder. "Welcome to Independence High School, Mr. Willingham.
I'm sure you'll fit right in," Ms. Jones laughed. "Let's go to Ms. Norman's
office and get the paperwork done.
After the paperwork was finished, Ms.
Norman stuck out her hand and said, "Welcome to Independence High School,
Mr. Willingham. I'm sure you'll feel right at home here," and gave me a big
smile.
When we got back to Ms. Jones office,
she had her secretary call Larry, Mary Kathryn ad Michael down. Luke and
Matt had already left to keep their appointment with Dr. Bailey. When the
kids came in, Larry ran straight to me, put his arms around my neck, avoiding
my back, and gave me a passionate kiss which I was happy to return. The others
just said, "Hi, Millie," and looked puzzled.
"Gentlemen, and you are gentlemen are
you not, I believe there are rules about that kind of behavior in school.
I'll overlook it this time, but next time I'll have to report it to your
parents," Ms. Jones laughed. "I called you down because I believe you were
involved in the episode at the Joyce house yesterday and I wanted you to
know the results of your care and concern. Eugene, perhaps you would like
to let your friends know what is to happen with Janice."
I told them what had happened and assured
them that I doubted we would miss each other. "Since all of you are so close,
I suspect the closest thing I can think of which might be like one of you
moving half way across the country would be if it were Larry. But Janice
and I hardly know each other. We were too busy avoiding beatings and harangues.
I'm glad she will have a good home and I know she loves Aunt Sandra and her
family and they love her. That's all that is important. It's not like I am
even losing a good friend."
"Mrs. Willingham, would you like to
finish the story?"
"It's very simple, all of you I claim
as grandchildren. Eugene is special. It pays to have high paid lawyers who
know the right people. Never let anyone tell you justice is blind. She can
see power and money. So, as of today this young man is Eugene Willingham.
I've adopted him. There is a restraining order against his father so that
takes care of that. Guys, do you think you can do another move today? If
you can't, Eugene can stay at David's until you can."
I blushed because I was frightened
and had something I needed to say, but felt embarrassed to say it. But as
she said, Millie never missed a trick. "Ok, Son, what's the problem?"
"Millie, last night I had a nightmare
and when Michael finally got me awake, I was in such pain, David had to give
me another shot. I think the pain pills will be all I need since I have been
doing ok most of the day, but if it's all right with you, I'd like to spend
one more night at David's to be sure I don't need him."
"Of course it's all right! I wouldn't
think of insisting you move until you are sure you can make it through the
night without David's help. Well, Ms. Jones, I guess I'm ready to go. If
it's ok with you, I'll just take this bunch of grandkids off your hands."
"I certainly hate to see them go, but
I suspect I will see them all tomorrow."
We all piled in Millie's car and drove
to David's. Larry came with me and then went back into town with Millie.
When they had left, Michael and I talked for awhile. I thanked him again
for holding me last night and we talked about friendship and caring for other
people, about why he and his dad had stayed at the Temple of Praise--neither
really knew why they had stayed. David and his family had started going when
David got out of service because some of David's family had been members
there before it became so radical. When Elizabeth was so sick, David just
didn't have the energy to change until the constant harangue against gays
finally got to him. Then we talked about all that happened today. I still
couldn't believe someone had cared enough to actually make me her son. By
the time we had talked for a long time, my back was making its presence felt
so I took a pain pill. Michael said he was going to set up a gym, I thought,
as I fell asleep. Michael must have picked me up and taken me to bed because
when I waked up I was in the guest room bed.
Matt
Luke and I left school and went straight
to our appointment with Dr. Bailey. We were both kinda nervous, but didn't
admit it to each other. We didn't have to. Not only was our personal mental
communication system in excellent order, but we knew each other well enough
to read our body language. When we reached her office, we had to wait a bit
before she could see us.
"Guys, some of our time together may
be a bit embarrassing for you and some may, frankly, seem a bit gross, but
there are some things I want you to know because they are very important
and you are very important to me. I'd say the same thing if I were talking
to Mary Kathryn and Michael. Of course, what I'd have to say to them would
be different in some specifics, but not overall. And regardless of what else
you may hear, remember or forget, do not forget this: in sex, as everything
else, you are partners. You are lovers and if you remember that and
all that loving each other means, you'll be ok. You'll be more than ok. It's
kinda like lover is always really plural. If you always remember your
beloved, sex, as every aspect of your life, will be enriched. Think of your
partner, not just yourself. That's the reason sex without love never works
in the long run. God, I hope I don't sound too preachy, but I know you two
love each other and sex will be a glorious experience if it is always an
expression of love for the other. But you do have to take care concerning
certain things... some of which MAY not be of concern to a heterosexual couple.
We talked for an hour and promised
we'd read a book she gave us and write down any questions which arose.
We had no more we could think of then. "One final thing. Since you are virgins,
you don't have to worry about STDs now or ever unless one of you decides
to play around. Should one of you play around, when you go back to your partner,
it will be the same as his having sex with every person that guy--or girl--has
had sex with. I hope that will never be a problem for you and, if it is,
I suspect worrying about STDs will be the lesser of the two very serious
problems you have to deal with. Most STDs can be treated, some cured; I'm
not as sure about smashed trust, betrayal and broken promises.
"I don't even want to think that will
ever be a problem," Luke said.
"Neither do I. Nonetheless, should
it be, your relationship will be put to the most severe test it could possibly
face. Much will be demanded of both of you to handle the destroyed trust
and broken promises. I sincerely hope you never face that but, should it
happen, I hope and pray your love can handle it." Her last words to us were,
"Matt, Luke, sex is a beautiful, wonderful and powerful part of being human.
It can be nothing more than a way to get your rocks off--I guess that expression
is still used--in which your partner is nothing more than a convenient warm,
moist hole. Or it can be the deepest and most powerful way you have of expressing
your love. So long as you are thinking of the other, you'll do ok. Men have
found that to be true since time began. Be tender, be easy, be loving, be
caring and you will discover a whole new world. It won't be love, you have
that already, but it will be a way of expressing your love which will spin
the very stars."
We were ready to go when I remembered
Eugene and Larry. "Margaret, we told Eugene and Larry we were coming to talk
with you and asked if they wanted to. They said they would. They have some
problems which I'll let them talk over with you, but could they see you?"
"I'll keep time after school tomorrow
for them." Margaret then got up and, I guess, ceased being Dr. Bailey since
she embraced each of us and said, "I hope and pray you two have a long, joyful
and loving life together." Then she said, "Oh, I almost forgot. The social
worker from protective services just called. Janice is going to live with
her aunt in Arizona. She used to go there in the summers and loved it. She's
leaving tonight from Jackson. Ms. Anderson from protective services is taking
her to the plane. Eugene also has some news, but I'll let him tell you about
that. See you after work."
It was still an hour and a half before
Gabrielle would be off work so I called her and asked her to pick me up at
St. Mary's so Luke could go on to work in his studio. When we reached St.
Mary's, Luke came in with me and greeted Gertie. Fr. Tom was out making parish
calls. Luke walked into the church with me, took me into his wonderful, powerful
arms, pulled me to himself and placed his lips to mine. My lips had healed
enough for him to give me a real kiss if he kept it gentle. Which he did,
his tongue invading my mouth, carrying the taste of Luke to me. When he broke
the kiss, I placed my head in the curve of his neck and whispered, "Luke
Yonghon Tongmu Hans Larsen, I love you more than I can ever tell you."
"And, Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf,
I can't begin to tell you how much I love you, but I want to spend my life
trying." Luke kissed me again and this time sucked my tongue into his mouth.
"Babe, we are doing what we want to do, not what we need to do. I'll see
you tonight unless one or the other of us gets too involved in our work."
He gave me a final quick kiss and rushed out.
I had copies of all the music I planned
to play for my recital and the concert, and decided I would just start with
the first and play through to see where I really needed to work. I had been
at it for two hours without a break when I realized that nature was calling.
When I finished, I gathered up my stuff and went to the office to wait for
Gabrielle. Gertie looked up as I walked in and said, "I'd have thought Millie
was long past having a child, but I understand she has a new son." Her laugh
rivaled Millie's. "You do know she has adopted Eugene, don't you."
"No, I didn't. Margaret told me and
Luke that Eugene had some news for us, but didn't tell us what."
"Sorry if I ruined his surprise. I
thought you knew."
"That's ok. I'll tell you one thing,
Millie just got herself a great son. Eugene is a really grand person who
certainly deserves some good time after what he has endured. I guess you
know...."
"That he's gay? Sure I do."
"Well, that too, but what I was going
to say was that he directed the ensemble here the other night and will be
directing it again."
"Matt, I don't know why you didn't
give me a good ass kicking for that remark. There was no cause for me to
think that was the most important part of who he was. I owe you and him an
apology."
"Accepted. Have you talked to Chelsea
and Gladys recently?"
"As a matter of fact I have. They have
found a location for their hospice--it's a grand old house which will have
to have a lot of work done to transform it, but it sits near the river and
has great lawns and has had splendid gardens which can be resurrected. It
will be a beautiful, calm place. Come to find out it belonged to Millie and
she sold it to Gladys for a dollar so the money Gladys might have spent for
property will go on the renovations. Dr. Walker has gotten interested and
is working on getting equipment donated. Things are moving. You'll see them
Sunday at the wedding. I think half the county is showing up. Once the word
got out, people who have known David and Margaret just kinda invited themselves.
Should be a real event.... Hi, Gabrielle. Come to take this wild Indian off
my hands?"
"I guess I need to. Seems some folks
out in the country are kinda attached to him."
"Matt, see you next time," Gertie said
as the phone rang.
As we left, I made a mental note to
tell Luke what Gladys and Chelsea were up to and was lost in my thoughts
about how Luke and I were finally brought together and the loving people
who surrounded us. That reminded me of the very different situation Eugene
had been in and his family didn't even know it all. I was startled when Gabrielle
said, "Where are your thoughts, Matt? You seem to be lost in your own world."
"I really was. I was thinking about
Chelsea and Gladys and what they are doing to provide a loving place for
people who are dying and how they loved and cared for me and Luke, about
the suffering Eugene has been through and how lucky Luke and I are to be
surrounded by so many loving people. How do you ever repay that kind of love?"
"I guess in one way you don't because
it is both priceless and given without thought of cost. But in another you
can and that's the way Gladys and Chelsea are doing it. You repay love by
being loving and giving love to others. Too bad many people, perhaps most,
never learn that giving is what life's about, not receiving."
"Makes me kinda wonder about Eugene.
I can understand why the Gang of Four can love because we have all been loved
all our lives, but Eugene hasn't."
"If you can figure that one out, and
why kids from really good, loving homes can turn out rotten sometimes, I
guess you'd make Bill Gates look like a pauper," Gabrielle observed.
"Yea." was all I could say, but what
more needed to be said? "Margaret told me Janice was going to live with an
aunt in Arizona and that Eugene had some great news for us. I wonder what
that might be?" I wasn't about to admit that Gertie had spilled the beans.
"Well, you'll soon know. We're at David's."
I had been so lost in thought that we had gotten home before I realized it.
"Do you want to stop here or go on home?"
"I'll stop here and see how Eugene's
doing. See you later."
When I got inside, I yelled, "Anyone
home?" and bounded upstairs. I saw Eugene was asleep in the guest room. I
turned to go since I didn't want to wake him but, just as I started out the
door, he said, "Matt, glad you're here. I have some real news for you and
Luke, but I didn't want to bother him if he's really involved in his work."
"I'll check. He's been at work for
two hours and needs a break anyway. How's the back?
"It's a real bitch, I'll have to admit.
I took a pain pill when I got home and fell asleep, but it's better."
"Where's Michael?"
"He said something about getting the
gym ready. Said you all were going to do it Saturday, but... and that's when
I drifted off. I don't know what he was talking about." I explained that
all three of us had worked out at school, but were having a time problem
so we decided to combine our stuff and set up our own workout room in a shed
at my place. "I need to get in on that as soon as this back gets better.
Think Larry would like to as well."
"Sounds like a winner to me. I'll see
what Luke's up to."
When I reached the studio, I knocked
on the door and Luke came out, carefully closing the door behind him. "Can
you take a break? Eugene has some news for us."
"I'll be in in five minutes. I need
to take care of a few things before I can leave for any time at all," he
said as he leaned forward and kissed me.
When Luke came in, Eugene told us all
about the events of the day. "Hot damn," Luke exclaimed, "the son of a rich
mama!"
"Well, she made it pretty clear that
she wasn't about to have a spoiled brat on her hands, but she did say that
she'd do the same for me as she did for Jason: see that I had an excellent
education. That is sure more than I could have expected otherwise."
"Well, I suspect that if you weren't
who and what you are, you could end up a spoiled brat anyway. No problem
with your dad?"
"Haven't heard a word and would like
for it to stay that way."
"Matt, I think this turn of events
calls for a celebration. How 'bout I call Gabrielle and see what she can
whip up?"
"You think I'd ever turn down a Gabrielle
meal?" Just as Luke reached for the phone, it rang.
"Hello.... Hi, Mom, just getting ready
to call you.... 7:30? Sounds great.... Oh, I was just going to suggest the
same thing. Yea, I'll make sure I am at a stopping place in time. Bye."
"Mom was calling to say we were having
a celebration at our place at 7:30. Seems like we are either celebrating
or in some hell hole these days. When will everything just be even?"
"I suspect when we are feeding the
worms six feet under," Eugene laughed. "This way we know we are alive and
there are things to celebrate. Afraid my life was on a pretty even basis
and I sure didn't like where the base was."
"Eugene, slip off to slumber land again.
I've got to get back to the studio if I want to be at a stopping place in
time to celebrate your adoption. What are you up to, Matt?"
"I'm about played out and I don't think
I need to worry about working on the score until we can see how it works
in practice so I think I'll go and see what Michael's up to."
"Later," Luke said and kissed me, almost
full force, but holding back a little. "Later Eugene."
"Matt, I think I'd probably feel better
with a little exercise. Mind if I tag along?"
"Not at all. Do you want to walk or
take the Jeep?"
"Let's leave the Jeep for Luke and
walk. I really love being out here and the day is sooo nice."
"Eugene, it's completely overcast and
looks as if it might pour any minute! This is a nice day?"
"You better believe it! I can remember
only one nicer."
"But you're bound to be in pain even
with the pill."
"I was then too, if you remember,"
he smiled and for the first time I realized what a beautiful smile Eugene
had and I knew its glow came from deep within. "I wish Larry were joining
us tonight. It would make my celebration complete."
"I won't be surprised if he isn't,
among others."
When we reached the shed, Michael had
the place all swept out and was beginning to set up equipment. "How's it
going, Michael?"
"Great, now that you are here with
your lazy butt. Eugene, feel better after the pill?"
"Yea, I slept until Matt arrived. Thanks
for taking me upstairs." Michael dismissed that with a wave of his hand.
"I feel pretty good. Want to make it without a shot tonight and see if I
can stop the pills tomorrow. I don't like the way they make me feel: all
groggy and crazy."
Eugene helped get things put together
after Michael warned him not to overdo it. "You start sweating and you are
going to regret getting carried away." We worked for maybe an hour and had
everything set up. "Man, I think getting all this stuff together was a pretty
good workout, but I guess we need to try it out."
"I can spot one of you," Eugene offered.
"Sounds good. Spot Michael and then
you can spot me." We did a short--maybe thirty minute workout and then took
a shower. The cold water probably wasn't the wisest thing we ever did, but
it sure felt good.
"Man, I sure miss having a shower.
It's kinda hard to give yourself a bath," Eugene said.
"Let's go home and I'll help you,"
Michael offered. "Won't be like a shower, but it'll be better than trying
to do it yourself. Won't be as good as if Larry were doing it, but if you
don't mind a poor substitute," Michael laughed.
"See you two later," I said as Michael
and Eugene headed toward David's and I headed to the house. Mom and Dad were
home and Dad asked, "What's this about a celebration at Gabrielle's tonight?
Saw Millie at school today and know she left with the crew before school
was out. Do you know what's up?"
"Sure do and I guess it's no secret."
I told Mom and Dad all about Janice going to Arizona and Millie adopting
Eugene."
"I guess Eugene feels like he went
from hell to heaven without passing 'Go' and collecting $200," Dad laughed.
"I'm not sure what he feels. Of course,
I think he has been kept a bit calm by the pain pills and I guess it really
hasn't sunk in yet, but he's surely a much happier camper today than yesterday."
Michael
After Eugene and I left Matt, we took
a leisurely walk home. I was afraid he would work up a sweat because the
day was quite warm and I knew if he did, his back would sting like mad. When
we got back to the house, I said, "How about that bath?"
"You sure you want to do that?"
"Eugene, I may do a lot of things,
but saying something I don't mean is not one of them. I know how I would
feel if I didn't have a decent bath and it makes sense to me that I help
you get one--at least the best one you can. To tell you the truth, I don't
quite understand my feeling toward you. I don't mean the kind of feeling
Larry has for you or Luke has for Matt, but I feel a kind of closeness, like
you're a brother I never had maybe. It's even different from the way I feel
toward Luke and Matt who are as much brothers as they could be. I really
have been thinking about this since last night. There's a kind of protectiveness
about it and a kind of bond that, I'll admit, I don't understand."
"That's strange because I can't understand
it either, but I think I know exactly what you mean. It's a feeling that
I have as well. And, frankly, I'm surprised by it in myself and maybe more
surprised to see it in you. It doesn't seem to fit who I thought you were.
I'm not sure who I thought you were, but I guess I thought you had all the
friends you needed and, hell, I don't know what I'm trying to say, except
you're a great friend and on pretty short notice."
"Well, I guess we don't have to understand
it or work it out. Let's get you in the tub--ugh."
Eugene got undressed while I ran water
for his bath and when he was ready, I stripped to my briefs and helped him
get a bath. I could wash his back where it was not bandaged and only once
or twice did he flinch when I hit a tender spot. I almost got sick at my
stomach as I looked at the welts and I couldn't see the worst, which was
covered by the bandages.
As I was washing his shoulders, he
turned and looked at me and said, "Michael, I think I may know why we feel
a kinship. We have both lost parents. You lost a mother who, I am positive,
loved you very much and I lost both parents who hated me--maybe hate is too
strong--no, it's not--and if they didn't, they would if they knew the whole
truth. But we have both suffered in ways that the others in the Select
Few haven't. Don't recommend suffering for anyone, but I think we both have
gained something from it."
"You know, I think you may be right--and
you now have a loving parent--and believe me I've been around Millie enough
to know that she's a loving old gal beneath that crusty outside--and I'm
getting another one Sunday. Does that make us newborns? Maybe that could
count as being born again!"
I think some of the pent-up emotions
Eugene had burst loose, because he started laughing and couldn't stop. He
had tears running down his face he was laughing so hard. Every time he began
to get control, I would start to help him out of the tub, and he'd start
laughing again and slip back in. "Hey, you're not being much help, Bro."
That sent Eugene off again. I heard Dad come in downstairs and yelled down,
"Dad, I need some help up here." I finally climbed in the tub behind Eugene,
put my arms under his and started to lift him. I had almost got his ass off
the bottom of the tub when he started laughing again. This time it set me
off and I slipped, falling in the tub behind him. When Dad came bounding
up the stairs we were both laughing our fool heads off.
"What in the world is going on here,"
Dad said as he rushed into the bathroom. Neither Eugene nor I could stop
laughing long enough to say anything. "Michael, if you can get your butt
out of the tub, I'll see what I can do with Eugene." I finally managed to
get out and Dad lifted Eugene out easily. Dad's strong as an ox and knows
how to handle people. "Now, could I please find out what this is all about?"
Eugene and I had finally gotten control
of ourselves and Eugene told Dad what had happened. "I'm sorry, Mr. Andrews...."
"David."
"I'm sorry, David. Michael was helping
me get a bath and I got a bad case of the giggles and it just got worse and
worse until Michael caught the disease and we were both helpless in the tub.
I'm sorry."
"For what? For having a good laugh?
That's never reason for an apology unless it's at someone else's expense.
I think you deserve a good laugh! Michael, if you'll bring my bag, I'll take
a look at Eugene's back. It needs dressing anyway, since SOMEONE managed
to get it wet. Tell Margaret to come up too. I want her to take a look."
I went downstairs and got the bag and
asked Margaret to come up. Both she and Dad said Eugene’s back was much worse
than they had thought when they first saw it, but decided to leave the bandages
off. "If it starts oozing again or if your shirt irritates it, we can put
them back on," Margaret said. "Why don't you put on a plain white T-shirt
that's not too loose so it won't flop around and rub your back."
"I don't want to go to the Larsens'
looking like I don't know how to dress for a party," Eugene said.
"Well, I seriously doubt that would
be a problem, but if you'll put on a T-shirt under what you want outside,
that should be ok. I just don't want something to rub your wounds--and they
are wounds--or to stick to them. I'll keep check on that tonight," Dad said.
"Before I forget it," Margaret said,
"I made an appointment for you and Larry to come in to see me after school
tomorrow. We'll have to figure a way for you to get there since Matt
and Luke leave school before last period and Matt said he thought you would
need to be there to get started with the ensemble."
"He's right. We'll just have to come
up with something."
"Bro, bet yo' mama would get you and
bring you to town."
"His mother! Have you lost it Mikey?"
Dad exclaimed.
"Now, Dad, you know I hate being called
Mikey or Mike. Why are you torturing me?"
"Well, you seemed to have lost your
senses suggesting his mom could bring him to Margaret's. I wasn't sure you
were Michael," Dad responded.
"Oh, I guess you haven't met Mr. Eugene
Willingham. Mr. Willingham, Mr. David Andrews."
"What's going on here?" Dad asked.
Eugene had started laughing again,
but was able to get control of himself. "David, as of today, I am officially
Eugene Willingham. Millie has adopted me," Eugene said, and a huge smile
spread across his face.
"You deserve having a decent parent.
I know Millie may be tough at times, but she has a real heart of gold. So
that's why we're going to Jens' and Gabrielle's," Dad said. "I asked Margaret
and she pretended she didn't know."
"I thought Eugene should have the pleasure,"
Margaret said and gave Dad a kiss.
"Man, we are on a fast count down to
the end of slow and easy, I can see. The very idea kissing in front of us
innocent children."
Dad laughed and said, "Best I recall
a certain young Michael Andrews came home not long ago groaning, muttering
something about stone...."
"Dad!"
"Doesn't sound like there's a lot of
innocent children around," Margaret said. And that sent me and Eugene off
again and soon Dad was laughing as well.
"If you three BOYS can get control
of yourselves and get dressed, we'll be leaving for the Larsens' shortly,"
Margaret said in what sounded like a mama voice.
As Eugene and I were getting dressed,
I heard the Jeep pull out of the driveway and knew Luke was headed home to
get cleaned up and dressed. Or more likely he was headed to Matt's.
Part Twenty-two
Luke
I was so absorbed in what I was doing
I let the time slip by and before I knew it, it was 7:00. I quickly got my
projects where I could leave them, dashed out to Matt's Jeep and headed toward
home. I slowed down when I got to Matt's, thinking I would go in, but then
remembered I had told him at St. Mary's we were doing what we wanted to do,
not what we needed to do. I knew I really needed to get home and shower since
I was covered with clay and if I stopped, I would not be ready by 7:30 because
I knew Matt and I would end up in the shower together and time would stand
still.
When I arrived, Mom and Yong Jin were
in the kitchen, Mary Kathryn was setting the table--Mom had added another
small table to the dining room--and Dad was putting out wine glasses and
wine in the den. "Thought I was going to have to send someone to get you,"
Mom said.
"You almost did. I just happened to
look at my watch and was surprised at how late it was. I'm going to grab
a quick shower to get the clay off and I'll be right down." As I showered
I dreamed of Matt. We had spent more time together today than I was afraid
we would get, but I also knew that the pace of both our work was going to
pick up and we were not going to have the time we wanted together. As his
face floated before my eyes, I found myself smiling, overjoyed that he loved
me. It had been only a few short weeks since I had decided I couldn't live
without him and couldn't live without endangering my beautiful Korean Indian.
What a difference these few weeks had made! Ordinarily I didn't sing in the
shower. I'm an artist, not a musician! But without thinking I realized I
was singing at the top of my lungs, "More than the greatest love the world
has known...." I guess the rest of the family had showered and Mom was using
hot water in the kitchen so the water started turning cold. Before I could
get out, the "potty flushing downstairs" syndrome struck and I went from
a very cool shower to a very warm one in a flash. Sometimes you need a reminder
I guess, so I jumped out of the shower, dried myself--I liked it a lot better
when Matt dried me--and went to my room.
Tonight was another very special celebration
and I dressed accordingly. Matt really was turning me into something of a
sharp dresser these days. I carefully chose shirt and pants to accent my
coloring and made sure I was "showing some ass." For Millie, yes, but also
for the one who would be showing some ass for me!
When I went down, Mille and Larry had
arrived with Paula and Linda. I guess all of the Select Few were going to
be here. Great! "Paula, Linda, sure glad you could make it. Linda, I guess
you missed out on the excitement by going on a field trip today."
"Well, I may have missed out on some
excitement, but the field trip had its own. Orie was along and tried to get
fresh with Debbie Hamilton. She finally had enough and was forced to hit
him upside the head with a soda can. Fortunately, she hadn't opened it so
she got in a good lick. Ms. Whitfield was all upset--she's a part of the
Concord social climbers' set--and started screaming at Debbie. SHE was SCREAMING
at Debbie. Debbie had it so she told Ms. Whitfield, 'If you want Orie pinching
a teat, bring yours back here!' Needless to say, Ms. Whitfield was furious
and dragged Debbie to the office when we got back. I'm much afraid she regrets
that because Allison Smithfield and I went with Debbie and Ms. Whitfield.
We told Ms. Jones what Orie had been doing. He'll be spending a couple days
at home this week and Ms. Whitfield was ordered to apologize to Debbie. It
was like a little kid's apology. I'm sure her fingers were crossed behind
her back. After she left, Ms. Jones said, 'Debbie, what you said to Ms. Whitfield
was not a very lady-like thing to say, but I'm glad you didn't think Orie
had the right to fondle you. Lot of girls would never have complained.' Debbie
told her she was not one of them and I added, 'Neither am I! A guy just better
be sure he has permission to touch me before he does. And if Orie touches
me, my dad will have his butt thrown in jail.' Ms. Jones laughed and
told us to go to class because school was about out. 'Think you may have
a party to attend tonight so get home on time,' she added as we walked out
the door. 'Course when I got home, Mom just said Millie would be picking
me up for a celebration and dinner at 7:30. Mom was all excited that Millie
Willingham was picking up HER daughter. Only after Millie came did I get
the news."
"Glad you could come," I said and added
under my breath, "Glad you ran down." Man, that woman can talk! But Orie
really was pushing it. I kinda worried about where it might end.
Just as Linda finished, the front door
burst open and Eugene ran in, arms spread wide, and in a little baby voice
cried, "Mommy" and ran toward Millie, enveloping her in a bear hug.
"You know folks, that lawyer of mine
suggested Eugene and I might want to write a "change my mind" clause in Eugene's
adoption papers. I sometimes think it was a mistake not to do so. If this
kid keeps it up, I'll be changing his diapers before the week is out!" and
laughed a real Millie belly laugh as she embraced Eugene. "How's the back
SON?"
"Much better, I think. David wanted
to leave the bandages off so the wounds could get air. I think I'll be ok.
I took a pain pill when I got to David's and promptly fell asleep. When Matt
waked me, I went with him to help Michael get their gym ready and the time
with Michael and Matt sure helped. I think I'll be ok--out of real pain anyway--by
tomorrow."
and Eugene then looked over at Larry,
a huge smile covered his face as Larry crossed the room. It was obvious that
Larry had started to kiss Eugene, then stopped, looked up, blushed and cleared
his throat.
When he looked up, he couldn't help
but see Michael was on the receiving end of a Mary Kathryn special. As soon
as she broke the kiss, Mary Kathryn explained, "The rule at the Greywolfs'
is we are free to show affection as Yong Jin and Greywolf do in the public
areas of the house. Now that's an ok rule there. However, fool Michael and
Luke agreed to a similar rule at our house. You guys may be able to live
with a peck on the cheek, but I want to be kissed! Since I didn't agreed
to the rule, I have appointed myself a role model for Mom and Dad. They're
learning, but I sometimes have to remind them."
Dad had walked out of the den when
Eugene, David and Margaret arrived and was looking very amused at the whole
situation. He very calmly walked over to Mom, swept her off her feet and
planted a real kiss on her. When he finally put her down, she blushed and
said, "Jens, your tongue!" The whole place broke up. Larry completed what
he started, more sedately than my parents, I might add. What was the world
coming to?
"Gabrielle, I have been convinced for
some time that someone kidnapped Jens and substituted his identical twin.
I'm more convinced than ever now," Millie laughed.
"Could be, but I can't say that I miss
the old Jens a whole lot and the new one is something!" Mom said.
"Pretty sorry fellow that can't learn
a little from his kids," Jens laughed.
Just as I started to ask about Matt
and Greywolf, they came in the front door. Matt came straight to me and,
for the first time in forever it seemed, gave me a real, no-holds-barred
kiss. When we got ourselves untangled, his face was covered with a Matt special
smile as he looked at Jens, laughed and said, "I think I'm allowed extra
privileges since I have been kinda on a low-kiss diet."
"Well, if you're following the house
rules, you just missed out on the newest revision I think," Millie laughed.
"Yea, Dad just taught Mary Kathryn
a few tricks a minute ago," I said. "Man, I don't know what we're going to
do with these parents. They are getting all out of control."
"Luke, it's a good thing I remember
being young and in love or I might have thought Matt had tossed you overboard.
Weren't you supposed to run a little errand for Luke this afternoon, Matt?"
Matt started shaking his head "no" and had a puzzled look on his face. Then
his expression changed to one of alarm. "I...."
Millie laughed and handed me a fat
envelop. "I expect to see some results from my small investment in your art,
Luke. Matt, who did you have your mind on instead of Luke?" Millie asked,
looking at Matt sternly. Matt stuttered a few times before Millie slapped
him on the back and said, "Gotta move your mind upward young man."
The celebration had obviously started.
"Linda, Paula, Eugene, Larry, our children have had wine at celebrations
since they were toddlers almost. I think that was a wise decision on our
part because they see it as something special and not a way to prove they
are grown up. However, I know other parents feel differently and I certainly
don't want to go against their wishes."
"I know Eugene's parents would never
have permitted it," David said, "but he's got a new Mom now."
"He giveth wine to gladden the heart
of man--old ladies, middle aged women and young folks--Eugene, that's the
way your Mom feels about it."
"Well, I am Jewish, so that certainly
speaks for my parents," Paula said.
"I guess it has never been a question
at my house," Larry said. "My Mom told me all she would ever expect out of
me was I be responsible and thoughtful."
"All that sounds so good," Linda said.
"All my Mom would want to know was whether or not it was accepted in the
best circles."
"That is bullshit," Millie said. "I've
never been in the 'better circles' in Concord because my backbiting skills
are kinda weak, but if she's concerned about that, I could have the 'better
circles' doing my dishes, so on with the wine, Jens. I hope it's good stuff."
"Well, as an Aussie friend I met in
Germany used to say, 'It's a good drop.' It has a fruity main bouquet hinting
of blackberry and apricot with a mid-taste of toast and oak with a smooth
finish of old tennis shoes!" When we were all in the den, Jens poured the
wine and did the first toast, "Here's to an old lady who is as crusty as
they come on the outside and pure heart inside, and to the sons, old and
new, whom she loves."
As glasses were being raised, Eugene
added, "And who love her!"
It was a good drop.
Millie had the second toast which was
short and to the point, "Here's to resurrections and new beginnings!"
I was a bit surprised when Paula did
the third toast, "Here's to love and the many, many forms it takes."
By this time we were all getting a
bit misty eyed and I noticed that Eugene and Larry were standing on each
side of Millie with an arm around her waist. "Well, for those of you new
to the Larsen household, Mom is not the second best cook in the world, she's
first and the food's waiting," I said after we had finished our wine. I was
hungry. The meal, of course, was perfect. Linda and Paula sat at the table
with Mom and Dad, Millie, Eugene and Larry, David and Margaret. They carried
on an animated conversation, getting to know Paula and Linda. Matt and I,
Michael and Mary Kathryn, Greywolf and Yong Jin sat at the small table.
It was difficult to talk from one table
to the other, so our conversations were pretty much separate until there
was an outraged cry from Millie, "What in the world is going on? That is
an outrage!"
"Ok, who's in for hell this time, Millie,"
Dad asked.
"Jens, did you know this beautiful
child's father died months ago and the insurance company hasn't paid off
a cent? Has your mom talked to a lawyer, Paula?"
"She did several months ago and he
told her since it was a big insurance company there would be a crew of lawyers
and the only way he would take the case was for seventy-five percent of the
settlement. She decided she'd just keep struggling on rather than give whatever
she might get to a lawyer."
"Paula, give me your mom's home and
work number--and name--before we leave tonight. I think I have a couple of
lawyers sitting around drinking coffee and drawing a salary who need to be
at work." 'Don't get Millie riled' was the clear message being sent out.
After dinner, we all sat around and
talked about first this and then that until Millie said, "David, I'm gonna
leave the boy with you tonight just in case. Paula, Linda, guess it's time
for us to go."
Eugene looked at Larry kinda puzzled
and a huge grin spread across Larry's face.
"Oh, I forgot, hope it's ok, but I'm
leaving another of the grand kids with you tonight, David."
"That's ok, Millie. He can sleep downstairs
on the sofa," David said, as serious as he could be. I could see the grin
fade from Larry's face just as David said, "That is unless he wants to share
the invalid's bed." The grin returned.
Larry and Eugene pitched in as the
kids cleared the tables. When we finished, Mary Kathryn said, "Well, it looked
like rain all day today, but it seems to have cleared off. Think we might
make a moonlight stroll to the falls? The moon's pretty bright."
"Sounds like a winner to me," I said.
"I got so much work done today I think I can stand a little playtime."
I went to my room for a blanket while
Matt and Michael snagged the two out of the jeep and soon the six of us--Michael
and Mary Kathryn, Larry and Eugene and Matt and I--were walking toward the
falls. We had hardly left the yard when we started singing: "More than the
greatest love the world has known...."
The moon had only four or five days
until it was full and the sky was perfectly clear so the night was bright.
When we reached the falls, each couple found their own place and it was as
if Matt and I were all alone. We lay on the blanket facing each other. "Matt,
I have missed you so much today! Sometimes I don't see much of you during
the day and it's almost ok, but today I really missed you even though we
spent time together with Margaret. I guess after our talk with her, I wanted
to talk to you and we were both busy. I needed more than anything to tell
you I loved you and I never wanted to hurt you. I got frightened when Margaret
talked about our playing around, about being unfaithful. On the one hand,
that seems so silly and impossible. But on the other hand, I don't know what
it is going to be like to be separated from you this summer."
"I know, Luke, Babe. I was having some
of the same thoughts. Dad once said that having sex was like taking olives
out of a jar. The first one comes hard and after that, it's easy. I promise
you one thing, Luke, if you are ever unfaithful, I will never stop loving
you. I know that. From the very bottom of my heart, I know that. But what
else would be true, I don't know. I don't want to think about even the possibility."
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, I don't think
I could live with myself if I were ever unfaithful. And I know there is nothing
you can do to make me stop loving you. And, God, Matt, I love you. I can
just think about you and I feel like I can't hold all the love I have for
you. You are, truly, my very life." Matt and I continued looking into each
other's eyes. He was so beautiful. His gaze never left my eyes as he slowly
covered my body with his. He touched my lips with an angel kiss which gradually
became more and more passionate. His tongue entered my mouth and I could
taste his beauty, his love. As his kiss became more passionate, I felt his
manhood harden and grow against my own which was becoming equally hard. Matt
had braided his hair which made it more difficult to undo than when he just
had it in bands, but my fingers now knew how to release that rain of blackness
which fell, surrounding my face and creating a place which was truly our
own world. Matt lifted his lips from mine and started kissing my face, my
neck, my eyes as his fingers loosened the buttons of my shirt. Soon my chest
was exposed to his lips and he kissed it, paying particular attention to
my nipples. When he started sucking on one, I could feel the wetness in my
boxers from the stream of precum his loving was causing.
I took Matt's shirt off so his bare
chest was against mine, making me even hotter.
Matt was grinding his hips against
mine, our hardness pressing together as he continued licking and sucking
my nips, occasionally dragging his teeth across them. "Yonghon Tongmu, I
want to make love to you--to your body, to all of you without limits," Matt
said after he had lifted his head and gazed into my eyes. "I am so hot. I
think lust has just about consumed me!"
"I know, Love, I know. I feel the same
way. But I don't think lust can ever drive out my love for you. Maybe it
is lust, but I don't think so--well, not all of it! It's just that
I want to make love to you the way I love you, no limits, no restraints,
just... just love you all the way." Matt's lips locked on mine, our tongues
started dueling, which was a win-win situation if there ever was one. Matt's
hips started grinding and humping mine more rapidly as I raised my butt off
the blanket to press my manhood against his and his hard body. I knew where
this would end and I eagerly awaited the release his love making would bring.
Matt's breath was coming in quicker and quicker gasps and his grinding and
humping became faster and faster. I knew he was rapidly pushing me to the
edge. As I passed the point of no return, I bit Matt's lip and cried softly,
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, I love yoooooou!" My climax shook my entire body. In
response, Matt pressed his hips hard against mine and I could feel the spasms
as he shot charge after charge of man's seed between us.
Matt fell on my body, exhausted, breathing
in short gasps. When he had recovered, he raised himself, looked into my
eyes, smiled and placed the gentlest possible kiss on my lips. He rolled
off of me and we lay by eah other's side, saying nothing, letting our eyes
talk for us as we stroked each other's hair.
"I know we would all like to stay here
forever," Michael called, "but I suspect we better get back. Tomorrow's a
school day and I need a shower before bed. Four male voices responded, "Me
too."
None of the five guys tried to conceal
the wetness evident, even in the moonlight, on our fronts. "I guess we all
took care of the problem of too much loving and not enough giving," Michael
laughed. "No groans tonight!" We all laughed as we gathered up the blankets
and walked toward the house. As we did, we started singing and almost at
once, Michael, Larry, and Matt were walking backwards, holding hands with
their respective lovers as we each sang to the center of our life.
When we got back to the house, we said
goodnight to the adults and went on the porch to say our more personal goodnights.
"Matt, you know where I want to be tonight and every night of my life...."
"Right where I want you to be, Luke,"
he responded. "But I know you need to be here and we need to get some sleep.
I'm not sure we would if you were where you wanted to be and where I want
you to be. I'll see you in my dreams, Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu Larsen," Matt
said and kissed me with a soft kiss.
"I'll be waiting for you, Matthew Sarang
Hanun Pomul Greywolf." I returned Matt's kiss with one of my own, turned
and went inside. As I did, Mary Kathryn said, "Michael, love you, Hunk,"
and came inside with me.
Larry
When we reached David's, Margaret came
inside with us. David said, "Since you don't have to take care of any strays
tonight and I have two, think you might stay over?" I almost laughed at the
pleading little boy look on the grown man's face.
"Yea, since I have agreed to share
my bed with Larry, you can have the living room sofa," Eugene said.
"Well, I guess I'm just left out,"
Michael said. "Larry's not only taken my bed partner, but I bet he also takes
my bath partner. Mommy, would you give me a bath and sleep with me tonight?"
he whined.
"Well, I might have, but I just can't
stand whining young'uns," Margaret laughed. "I guess I can stay."
"Door open rule in effect!" Michael
said.
"What's this about bed and bath partners?"
I asked. "Thought you'd get away with that didn't you?"
"We'll discuss that upstairs," he replied.
"Let's go."
"No carrying on up there children,"
Margaret called as the three of us started upstairs.
"Guys, I think it's obvious we all
need a bath. I'll get a quick shower first since it will take awhile for
you to get Eugene cleaned up, especially if he gets the giggles," Michael
said as he started stripping at the top of the stairs.
While Michael got his shower, Eugene
told me about their adventure in the bathtub. I could just picture the two
of them floundering around, trying to get out. I started laughing as Michael
came out of the bathroom and said, "It's all yours, but, Eugene, I'm not
sure Larry's in any shape to take on the job."
Eugene found towels Michael had put
out for him and tossed me one as we started getting undressed. Undressed,
we stood facing each other and I drank in the beauty of my beloved Eugene.
We walked across the hall, hand in hand. "It's important that I try to keep
my back dry," Eugene said when we got to the bathroom. He turned and started
running water for our bath and I saw his back, which I had not seen before.
I looked at it in horror. His Dad had beaten him so badly his back looked
as if someone had used a cat-o'-nine-tails on it. Where the skin was not
broken, it was bruised and covered with huge red welts. Suddenly I could
hear him screaming as his dad beat him then, in my mind, it became his screaming
when I had essentially raped him. I immediately became sick and started throwing
up and crying. I collapsed on the floor in my own vomit, crying and beating
my head on the floor. His father had beaten his back raw, but I was worse.
I loved him and caused him as much pain. When I looked up, Eugene looked
bewildered and reached out to touch me. I crawled away from him, sliding
in my vomit as I continued to empty my stomach, crying in great sobs and
looking at him. I was afraid to let him touch me for fear I would hurt him.
Eugene finally called out, "Michael!
Michael, please help me!" I saw Michael rush into the bathroom as I cowered
in a corner, filthy from my own sickness. Every time I looked at Eugene,
I started throwing up and crying uncontrollably. I was shaking all over and
thought I was going insane. Why not? Why did I deserve anything better?
Michael took one horrified look at
me cowering in the corner of the bathroom and ran downstairs. When he reappeared,
Margaret and David were with him. David picked me up and held me--I couldn't
stand; I couldn't stop shaking or crying. Margaret wet a wash cloth and started
cleaning me up. "Michael, my bag is downstairs, please get it for me. Eugene,
are you all right?" she asked. I could see Eugene nodding and saw the tears
streaming down his care-marked face. That set me off crying even more and
I started throwing up again. When Michael got back upstairs, Margaret opened
her bag, took out a syringe and filled it from a bottle. David held me so
she could clean a spot on my butt and she gave me a shot. Michael had taken
over her task of cleaning me up and I was soon free of my own filth. David
carried me back to the guest room and gently laid me on the bed. I was feeling
more and more relaxed, but was still very much conscious of what was going
on. "Eugene, do you have any idea what is wrong?" Margaret asked. Eugene
nodded, but couldn't speak for the tears.
"Is it ok for me to tell Margaret what
the problem is?" Michael asked. Eugene and I both nodded.
Michael told Margaret the whole story
of how I had raped Eugene--he didn't call it rape, but I knew it was. Before
Michael was finished, Eugene was nearly in as bad a shape as I was. I was
becoming calmer--the shot I knew was taking effect, but Eugene was becoming
more upset. Margaret looked at David and motioned toward her bag with her
head. David brought it to her and she said, "Eugene, I'm going to give you
a shot too. Not enough to put you out any more than what I gave Larry will
put him out, but enough to help you regain control. We can't solve this problem
tonight, but we can get a start on it." She gave Eugene the shot and in a
few minutes we were both calm enough, maybe, to talk and listen.
"I'll go, if you like," Michael said.
"I, too," David said.
I still wasn't sure of my voice, so
I shook my head. Eugene said, "Please stay."
"Then I think we need to go downstairs
where we can all sit down," David said. He put his arms around me and Michael
put his around Eugene and we went down. When we were all settled in the den,
Margaret said, "I have heard Michael's version of what brought all this on,
but I want to hear why tonight happened." Eugene told them how we were going
to give him a bath and when we got to the bathroom and he started the water,
I had started throwing up and crying.
"When Eugene turned to start the bath
water, I saw his back for the first time. I knew it was bad, but I couldn't
believe what I saw. I could hear him screaming as his father beat him. Then,
just as I started to become enraged at his father, his screams became those
I heard when I forced myself on him. I immediately started throwing up. I
felt that I was filled with filth. I was full of loathing for myself and
what I had done to my beautiful lover. I wanted to die. And the more I threw
up, the more I hated myself. Eugene started to touch me, but I couldn't stand
the thought of his touching me because I was dirty, filthy--not just from
the vomit, but also from the horrible person I am." In spite of the shot,
I started trembling and crying again.
Eugene got up and started toward me,
but I drew away and he went back to his chair. Michael came over, put his
arms around me and hugged me to himself. How could he stand to do that? I
expected David or Margaret to do something or say something. They didn't.
When Eugene started crying softly, Margaret went to him and held him close.
"Larry, do you really, really love Eugene?" Michael asked.
"Of course I do! I love him more than
my own life."
"Do you think Eugene is a good person?"
"Of course! Do you think I hate the
man I love and think he's no good?"
"Well, do you think he would love a
man who is no good?"
I had to stop and think about that.
I wondered how Eugene could ever love me after what I did, but he did. I
knew he did. There was no question in my mind about that. He certainly deserved
someone better than me, but he loved me. "I'm confused. How can he love me?
I am a terrible person who hurt him as bad as his father, worse. I took something
from him he can never get back."
"I suspect you hurt him worse than
his father because he loved you and you did indeed violate him. No question.
But there's a real difference. Larry, how many times and in how many ways
have you said, 'I'm sorry' to Eugene? How often and how many ways have you
told and showed him you were sorry for what you did? How many ways have you
shown and told him how much you love him; how much he means to you; how important
it is and how you treasure his love for you? Yes, you did a really terrible
thing--there's no question about that and no excuse for it--and the same
is true of his father, but I haven't seen or heard of his father saying he
was sorry or telling Eugene of his love for him or how important Eugene is
to him. You are not the terrible person you think you are. Has Eugene forgiven
you for what you did?" I nodded. "Do you doubt that he has?" I shook my head
"no". "Then it seems to me you have a problem to work on here--forgiving
yourself." Of course he made sense, but how could I forgive myself? I looked
up at Michael and asked him, "How can I ever forgive myself? How can I?"
There was silence in the room for what
seemed like forever, but couldn't have been a minute. "I said we couldn't
solve this problem tonight and we are not going to. But it has to be solved,
Larry, or you are going to destroy two wonderful young men, you and Eugene,"
Margaret said. "I don't think you and Eugene are ready for the kind of talk
I had with Matt and Luke because I suspect that having sex is out for you
two right now." We both nodded. "I want you to start seeing a therapist tomorrow.
I know the very one and if you are agreeable, I'll see if she can see you...."
"She?" Eugene asked.
"She--and if you find you can't relate
to her, I'll find another. Agreed?"
Both Eugene and I answered in a whispered,
"Yes."
"What about tonight? Larry, you definitely
need a shower and Eugene can use a bath. Do you want to sleep together or
had you rather not?" David asked.
I looked at Eugene and he said, "Please."
"It's ok. We sleep together often.
And I need a bath because we got each other off without, you know...." I
could feel my face turning red, saw Eugene blushing and Michael grining.
"I'm afraid that was an ill-kept secret
when you five guys got back from the falls," David said. "Larry, grab a shower
and I will give Eugene his bath. I'm still pretty good at that. Old nurse's
training kinda sticks with you."
When we got up to leave, Margaret hugged
all three of us and said, "Larry, Eugene, if either of you need me tonight,
come get me."
"Michael is sure lucky to be getting
his new Mom," Eugene said.
"You're pretty lucky with your new
mom too, but I'm not really trying to replace Michael's mom. She was a wonderful
lady and I am just lucky to be able to share what she had for too short a
time, a wonderful man--two wonderful men."
I went upstairs and remembered the
mess I had left in the bathroom and when I went in to clean it up, Michael
had already started. "I'll clean up my mess," I said.
"Bro, I think you are going to have
to learn that you sometimes need others to help you clean up your mess and
they are ready to do it if you let them." I looked at him. What could I say?
Nothing. He was right and I had been too proud and too self-hating and self-punishing
to admit it. I guess I had started learning the language of this family for
I felt the need to hug Michael and I did. It was a great feeling, especially
when he hugged me back.
When we had finished, I took a quick
shower and went back to the bedroom. David picked up Eugene as if he weighed
nothing and took him to the bathroom. When they came back, David said, "Eugene,
I think I need to dress your back so you won't hurt it in your sleep." He
went downstairs and brought his bag back up. "Larry, you can wait in Michael's
room if you like." I shook my head and watched as David gently cared for
Eugene's back. "Eugene, your back is doing fine, but it really is much worse
than either Margaret or I thought when we first saw it. You'll have scars,
I'm afraid."
"I can live with scars on my back.
What I'm worried about are the scars Larry has inside."
"I think both of you have scars inside
and maybe open wounds that need healing. The scars inside you can also live
with if the wounds heal," David said.
"Michael started the healing when he
took us to the falls and he kept us moving tonight, now it's our time to
work on healing each other--with help," I said.
"Sure you are all right?" David asked.
Both Eugene and I said we were and David left.
As we got into bed, Eugene said, "Larry,
what a day this has been," as he snuggled up to me and kissed me softly.
"Yes, what a day this has been." I
snuggled closer to him and returned his kiss. As he put his arms around me,
I realized I was very sleepy and started to say something, but realized my
beloved Eugene was asleep. I looked into his peaceful, strong, handsome face
and thought to myself, "You stupid asshole, you almost lost him and what
good would life have been then?" I kissed him lightly on the tip of his nose
which I adored, tucked my face under his chin where I could inhale the scent
of the reason I wanted to live forever. In the comfort only he could give
me, I relaxed and drifted into slumberland.
David
As Margaret and I lay in bed, I thought
about what she had said about Elizabeth and her genuine concern for Larry
and Eugene. "Aside from your body, which I like a lot," I said, "you know
what I love about you?"
Margaret laughed and said, "I thought
it was just my young, lustful body."
"Well, I ain't saying nothing against
that! But I really love you because you are so matter of fact in your love
and concern for the kids--and we seem to have a growing number of them!"
"David, this bunch of kids is what
I have always wanted and in recent years thought I would never have. They
are like a fantastic Christmas present to me."
"Looks like you could have found a
bunch without problems."
"Do teens come that way? I didn't?
Did you?"
I laughed and said, "Well, to be honest,
I had my problems. They just seem pretty minor compared with these. I guess
Michael and Mary Kathryn have had few problems--at this point--except of
course the problems they have faced as a result of the serious ones Matt
and Luke have faced.
"You seem to be forgetting Michael
had a serious problem before any of the others did. He lost his mom."
"You're right but I guess that was
not a problem because I think of problems as something which can be solved,
fixed."
"Well, hasn't it been? Of course his
mom is still gone, but Michael had solved the problem of how he will deal
with loss and I think, until recently, did a better job than his dad."
"Yea," was all I could say. Then I
continued the thought I had started with, "They are all good kids, Margaret.
They have loving families who care about them--even Jens couldn't reject
Luke when it counted and as rigid as he has always been, he even surprised
me, but those two poor guys upstairs.... Even with Millie adopting Eugene,
there are deep scars there and I am not talking about physical abuse. And
Larry.... I really feel sorry for him. What's going to happen to those two?"
"You never can tell, but I am very
hopeful. Michael is an amazing kid, David. I think Elizabeth's death matured
him far beyond his years. He has a genuine understanding of people and a
compassion which is almost unheard of in a fifteen-year-old. Had I been dealing
with Eugene and Larry tonight, I wouldn't have used the words he used--I
don't trust pure logic as much as Michael does and would have dealt with
feelings, but he just cut to the heart of the matter without stopping. I
would have been scared to death to have pushed Larry the way Michael did,
but it worked. I'm sure those two guys will be talking to Michael and maybe
Luke and Matt more as time goes on. The therapist can do what she does, but
she is going to have a lot of support she doesn't know about from the kids
in this family. And I am so happy to be a part of it."
Margaret kissed me and snuggled close
and I inhaled deeply the scent of woman, a delight I had missed so much for
too long. In the warmth of our love, we drifted off to sleep.
Matt
I tumbled into bed, thinking how empty
it seemed without Luke beside me. I knew that I wanted him beside me as long
as I lived. I was really very sleepy for some reason, but I had to spend
time giving thanks. I thought about all that had gone on during the past
week and realized how many really caring and loving people there were surrounding
me. I thought about Eugene and the trauma he had been through, no, the two
traumas he had suffered. I wondered if I could ever have loved Luke had he
forced himself on me. I thought about how, in a sense, I had almost done
the same to him. Oh, I know I would not have had to force myself on him,
but I wanted him so bad that I had almost made him do something he really
didn't, in his heart of hearts, want to do. Well, of course he wanted to,
but at the same time.... Then I realized what I would have felt like had
he said "yes". Luke was a lot stronger than I was, I was sure of that. But
as my thoughts continued, I realized what we had was so precious that I didn't
want to change it at all. Well, I did, but I didn't. Finally I just turned
my mind off and let my heart speak of my love for Luke and his for me. I
thanked God for that and for all those who honored it. With thanksgiving
in my heart, I was at peace and the angels carried me away to blissful sleep.
When Luke arrived for our morning run,
I was ready. After a not-so-quick good morning kiss, I said, "Luke, you'll
never know how good a kiss feels until you have been put off kissing for
awhile."
"And just who do you think I was kissing
while you were on your no-kiss diet?" he laughed, his eyes shining.
We climbed down the trellis and jogged
to Michael's where Michael and Mary Kathryn had been joined by Larry and
Eugene. "Think you're up to running, Eugene?" Luke asked.
"I doubt it and I don't think Larry's
in good enough shape to run with you guys, but we thought we jog along. Maybe
one day we'll get in shape."
"Well, let's be off," Michael cried
and off we were. Luke and I were back in good form when it came to running.
It was the body building part of our former exercising that we had to work
on to get back our definition and hardness. Michael, having never missed
a workout, was in superb shape. He was a damn handsome kid. well, he was
a damn handsome man, he sure wasn't a kid any more even though he was only
turning sixteen. When it came to bodies, Mary Kathryn was no slouch either.
Of course, hers was definitely not a female body builder's body. It was soft
and curvey in all the right places. Had I been straight, I thought as I watched
her run in front of me for awhile, I would have definitely given Michael
a run for the money.
Luke, Michael and I ran a mile after
Mary Kathryn had dropped back to a jog and when we reached her on our return,
she started running again until we caught up with Larry and Eugene. "I hope
you didn't work up a sweat, Eugene," Michael said.
"I'm afraid I did and I can feel it.
There are still places on my back that are raw. I thought all of them had
scabbed over, but I found out they haven't. But the exercise sure felt good."
When we reached Michael's place, the
three guys went inside after Michael took advantage of Mary Kathryn's kissing
ability. I don't know how those two learned to kiss as they do since Mary
Kathryn never had decent role models, but however they learned, they knew
how to do it!
Luke and Mary Kathryn jogged on to
their place after Luke had also proven the Larsens knew how to kiss. I went
upstairs, got ready and went down for breakfast. And, I didn't know it, but
before long that would be the pattern of our lives with few exceptions--sleep
alone, shower alone, run with Luke, drive to school with Luke and seldom
see him otherwise. We were both soon to be extremely busy.
Tuesday, we did see each other for
a good time. Michael, Larry, Luke and I had helped Eugene get his things
together and move to Millie's. Man, he had a suite! His bedroom was as large
as mine and it, too, had a king size bed. In addition he had his own bath
complete with a jacuzza and a study/living room. Millie had seen that he
had a top-of-the-line computer all set up and a neat desk for studying and
comfortable seating for a least half a dozen people. His eyes really bugged
out when he saw it. "Eugene, this was Jason's room. I told you I wanted you
to have a good education. This is my part of making that happen for the short
time you'll still be in high school. You can put your horn over there by
the music stand. I also told you I wanted you to have time for your music.
Do you play piano?"
"Some. I mean I can, but I am no pianist."
"Would an electronic piano be a help
with your music?"
"Sure. I mean I'm not going to give
a recital, but a piano is a real help when I am working on orchestration."
"We'll look into that tomorrow when
you finish at St. Mary's if you have time; if not, as soon as possible."
"The third thing I told you I wanted
you to have was some time for fun--and friends--this is your place. I expect
you to keep it reasonably clean, decorate any way you like, and have your
friends over when you wish. My place is in the other wing and before you
disturb me, the police will be here with complaints from the neighbors. I
guess that covers it."
"Well, there is one....I mean, Millie,
it looks as if I have died and gone to heaven, but.... well, I mean heaven
would be kinda not heaven if...." I could see Millie was about to bust her
corset trying to hold back a belly laugh while Eugene stammered around, turning
redder all the time. Luke, Michael and I were about to pop as well while
Larry just stood there, looking at Eugene, a goofy grin on his face. "Millie,
I mean...."
"Eugene, I told you this had been Jason's
place and that what I had given Jason, I would give you. Now I'll admit that
Jason was in his second year of college before anyone--at least to my knowledge--shared
that bed with him. But, so far as I am concerned, if you want to share a
bed with Larry and it's ok with Larry, that's your business. Doesn't that
complete your heaven? But I guess I need to ask, Larry does your mom know
about you and Eugene?"
"Yes, ma'am, she knows all about us,
the bad and the ugly as well as the good. Millie, I think it is only right
that you know the bad and ugly as well."
"It's none of my business, but I am
always--most of the time--ready to listen."
"The other guys already know and, in
fact, Michael has been a special help to me." We all sat down and Larry poured
out his story once more. This time there were no tears and he held Eugene
rather than Eugene holding him. "That's the reason Eugene needed you to pick
us up after school today. Margaret arranged for us to get professional help
and we started today, but what these guys, and especially Michael, have done
for us is doing as much to help us--me--get over hating myself and not forgiving
myself as the therapist is."
"Larry, I said that was none of my
business. I take that back. Anything which concerns my grand children--and
I am claiming you too--is my business. Whatever you need to heal the wounds
that I can provide, ask. That's what friends are for and especially what
grandmothers are for. Sometimes it's hard to admit you need help and even
harder to accept it."
"Not if Michael's around!" Larry smiled.
"He set me straight on that last night when I objected to his cleaning up
my mess--my vomit--in the bathroom."
"I'm having a hard time deciding whether
Michael is going to end up a lawyer, a politician or a priest," Millie chuckled.
"I'm pretty sure Mary Kathryn would
vote against the priest option," Luke laughed.
"Not our kind," Mille said. "A good
woman often makes a man a good priest. And a good woman can make a good priest.
Or I guess, Michael, should that be where you land, you would have to say
a priest may be lucky enough to make.... well, let's let it go at that."
Michael is sharp and Millie didn't miss watching his blush start at his toes
and work its way up to a glorious climax on his face.
"I forgot," Luke said, "Fr. Tom was
married, wasn't he?"
"Sure was and the death of his wife
devastated him and because of the effect on him, it was also a real blow
to those of us who are his parishioners. I don't think he has ever really
gotten over it, at least not as David has. I guess some men just can't think
about another partner when one is gone. Well, how'd the ensemble like the
music?" Millie said as she switched horses.
"Well, today we just worked on known
pieces, that is, I haven't shown them any of Matt's two compositions yet,
but they were all very excited and pleased. They knew they were being given
an opportunity to really show their stuff, and they appreciated it. Tomorrow
we'll be at St. Mary's and I think that will really blow their socks off."
"Matt, how's the music for Sunday going?
You know I put those trumpets in there so even St. Mary's can get a taste
of resurrection. Some of the folks have been asleep since last Easter and
I want you to raise them from the dead!"
"Millie, if they forget to buckle their
seat belts, you may have to peel them off the ceiling!" I laughed.
"Larry, I didn't get in touch with
you after all the excitement, but I have an engineer who wants to meet you
tomorrow afternoon immediately after school. Can you arrange that?"
"So long as Eugene and I can make our
4:30 appointment."
"Shouldn't be a problem. Eugene will
be at St. Mary's and I'll come out to the school with the engineer. I'll
bring you back in time for your appointment. We can pick up Eugene after
practice. When is it supposed to be over?"
"The buses are scheduled to leave St.
Mary's at 4:30, but I had planned to leave just before that to make the appointment."
"Luke, how's your work going?"
"Great, I think. I'll know more after
tomorrow."
"Do you think you could squeeze a bit
of work in for me? I need a design for the posters and program and catalog.
Think you might have time to design one? Keep it fairly simple, but definitely
distinctive."
"I'll try to have you something by
the weekend."
"Great. Well, looks like we're going
to have some busy kids the next few weeks."
"Sure does," Eugene acknowledged. "But
it keeps us off the streets."
"Anything else we need to talk about
guys?"
We all shook our heads and Luke said,
"Guess not. Larry do you want us to drop you off?"
"No. It's not a long walk home and
I think Eugene and I need to have some time to talk about last night and
today."
"Later, guys, Millie," I said, and
Michael and Luke echoed, "Later."
"Michael a priest. Father Michael.
Father Andrews. Sounds kinda natural, don't you think, Luke?"
"Sure does, but I think maybe Brother
Michael sounds better, you know, a member of a religious order--poverty,
obedience and CHASTITY," Luke laughed.
"Poverty I know about--you've seen
Dad give me my allowance. Obedience I know about--Mary Kathryn is my woman.
Chastity--you better believe it, otherwise Mary Kathryn would use a squirrel
grip on me--grab the nuts and run. But when the church talks about chastity,
it really means celibacy and, I'm telling you, that will never be a part
of my working vocabulary!"
"Father Michael--I think it really
sounds right."
"Luke, I don't mind us kidding around
among ourselves. Hell, we've known enough on each other to be hauled off
to jail, but please don't say anything like that at school. Even if I had
even thought about the idea--and believe me I haven't--I would never want
it known at school. The kids would make my life hell."
"Gotcha, Michael, and you're right.
But you want to know a secret? I bet you can't not think about it occasionally
from now on."
I guess that left us all thinking because
the few remaining miles home were spent in silence. When we reached my place,
I kissed Luke goodnight--man, I was glad I could kiss again because Luke
is SO kissable!
Sometime during the night I dreamed
Luke and I were having our commitment ceremony and when I took my eyes off
Luke and looked at the priest, it was Michael in full vestments. When I looked
around, Mary Kathryn was breast feeding a baby who looked exactly like Michael.
In my dream, I turned to Luke and said, "I will" and he smiled a Luke Hans
Yonghon Tongmu Larsen smile and my world was complete.
Part Twenty-three
Luke
Tuesday night after the celebration,
I had worked very hard and late. It was 12:15 by the time I had everything
I needed to take to Lexington packed in crates and ready to go. I had
mentioned earlier that the packages were going to be pretty heavy, but more
than that, awkward to handle. David and Michael told me to call them when
I was ready to load the Jeep, but I hesitated to do so since it was so late.
Yet when I tried to get one of the crates in the Jeep and realized I was
running a real risk of damaging the contents, I went inside.
When I reached the den it was obvious
that Michael and David were deeply involved in conversation and I turned
to leave, not wanting to interrupt them. David saw me and called out, "Luke,
come on in. While we were waiting, Michael and I got involved pretty deeply
in a conversation, something we haven't done in awhile."
"Well, I sure hate to disturb you."
"It's ok. Maybe after we get the Jeep
loaded, you'd like to join us for some milk and cookies before going to bed."
We quickly loaded the three crates
I had packed, and secured them in the Jeep. "It's not supposed to rain tonight,
but don't you think you might better put the Jeep in the garage just in case?
I know it has the sides and all, but rain may get to the crates if the wind
gets up."
"I don't think rain could damage the
contents but you're right, better safe than sorry," I responded.
"I'll move my van."
When David pulled the van out, I moved
the Jeep into the garage and, when everything was secure, went into the house
with David and Michael. Michael and I seated ourselves around the dining
room table and David brought a plate of cookies Margaret had made earlier,
and glasses of cold milk for all three of us. "Michael and I have been
talking about a potential problem he faces; at least he assures me it is
potential and not actual at this time."
"Luke, if you so much as breathe a
word of this to Mary Kathryn I'll be forced to kill you! Dad and I have been
talking about Mary Kathryn and me becoming sexually active--Man, that sounds
so clinical! You know, making love all the way. Anyway, what do you think?"
"Michael, first of all, you're talking
about having sex with my baby sister so I don't think I'm the most objective
guy in the world on that score. Do you really expect me to be unbiased?"
"Hell yes I do! I expect you to be
as objective as if we were talking about Linda Randolph. If you can't be,
I don't see how you can be of help to me and, therefore, Mary Kathryn."
"You might expect that and it might
be a good idea, but I'm not sure I can measure up to your expectations. What
do you think about the situation?"
"Well, I don't know. No, that's not
true. I think two different things which don't seem to go together. That's
why I asked Dad in the first place. On the one hand, I can't even imagine
ever loving anyone other than Mary Kathryn. She's my very life right now
and I don't believe I could live without her and her love. On the other hand,
I'm realistic enough to know that I'm not even sixteen yet. I have two more
years in high school and at least four years of college before I could expect
to settle down. In that length of time I could fall in and out of love a
dozen times, I guess. So one part of me says I am in love with the only woman
I will ever love and therefore we should express our love for each other
in every possible way. Now don't get me wrong, you and Matt have made it
very clear to me that having sex is only one way of making love, but I certainly
think it is an important one and think you and Matt would agree. Anyway,
from that perspective, why not have sex?"
"Yet what I feel for Mary Kathryn now
goes way beyond lust and sex. She's my very best friend in the whole world.
I think if I had to choose between having her for a friend forever and having
her as a lover... well, I guess it sounds strange, but I think I'd be forced
to choose having her as a friend. But if we start having sex and our relationship
as lovers turns sour, that friendship will also be destroyed."
"But even if we don't have sex and
our relationship as lovers turns sour, could our friendship survive? I kinda
doubt it."
"I think, maybe, you can appreciate
now why I jumped off the falls. It wasn't just that I was in love with Matt,
but also because I feared that if I told him our friendship would be destroyed.
Also, in our case--my case--I feared that even if I didn't tell him, someone
would find out and take it out on Matt. But most of all I felt I knew we
would never be lovers--a problem you and Wild Woman do not have--and our
friendship would be destroyed. With you and Mary Kathryn it's different.
Maybe your love for each other won't last; to tell the truth, the odds are
against it. But, come to think of it, the odds are very much--more than with
you and Mary Kathryn in fact--against Matt and I being together until death
do us part, but I can't imagine our ever being separated because we no longer
loved each other."
"My feelings exactly. On the one hand
there's the impossibility of Mary Kathryn and me not being in love and on
the other the statistics. So what do we do?"
"Luke, I have already told Michael
that he and Mary Kathryn must talk to each other about their feelings, their
fears, their hopes and dreams. That just has to be or they may as well chuck
the whole thing now."
"Another thing you must do is to continue
to play together, to do friendship things. Matt and I are so busy right now
that we get very little time to be friends and the time we have, we spend
as lovers--I don't mean having sex, we're still keeping that promise we made
to ourselves--but we have done very few friend things. I fear what will happen
if we don't make time to do friend things. Beyond that, all I can say is
that you can never go back to where you were before you confessed your love
for each other. There is no road back and that is doubly true once you start
having sex; not that I have any experience there, but I suspect your dad
would agree with me."
"You are so very right. Once you start
having sex, there is no real stopping."
"But you and Margaret did--at least
she said you were," cut-to-the-chase Michael said.
David blushed big time. Here was his
son engaged in father-son talk about sex, and son was putting father on the
hot spot. "Yea, David, as I recall the day Margaret announced she had proposed
to you there was ample evidence that more than hand holding had taken place."
"Ok, Guys, if you tell Margaret any
of this part of the conversation, and I am able when she finishes with me,
I'll break your necks. Yes, Margaret and I did make love--we had wonderful
sex--that day at the falls. And to be honest, since we were getting married
very soon, I didn't see any reason we shouldn't keep on but, for some reason,
Margaret put me back on the slow and easy path. Well, I think I know why.
I think she wants her wedding night to be a kind of first time for us, but
of course it will not be. In that sense, there is no way back. Further, if
we had to wait several years before we were married and had made love as
we did that day, there's no way I could handle that. So that's something
you have to think about. What if, for some reason, the Larsens have to move
away or even if we have to move away? What about college? Do you know you
will be going to the same one? What if Mary Kathryn becomes pregnant? There
are lot of questions you and Mary Kathryn need to think about and talk about."
"Michael, when Matt told his dad about
Eugene and Larry, Greywolf told him he was very honored that we had decided
to wait until we are eighteen, but he also said we should never become so
lust-filled that we hurt one another. I guess that is another thing you need
to consider. I don't think there are simple answers. All I would ask as the
brother of your heart's desire is that you and she discuss your thoughts
and feelings, respect each other and make a mature, responsible and mutual
decision and accept the risks and consequences of your decision."
"Well said, Luke," David said when
I had finished.
"Why did I know neither you nor Dad
would have an answer for me?"
"Because you're Michael and we're not
and you know that. Because you may not be sixteen yet, but you're an adult
and are ready to make adult decisions and are unwilling for someone else
to make them for you--except maybe Mary Kathryn when she's in full battle
mode!" I laughed.
"Son, I am always here to listen, offer
you guidance, but I'm afraid you have to make your own decisions because
you would anyway," David said as he got up and walked over to Michael and
gave him a hug. "Now I think we better get to bed."
"Yea. Six o'clock will be here before
I'm ready. It's been a hard day getting ready to get to Lexington, but everything
is ready thanks to you two and I want to be out of here by 6:30."
"Sorry I kept both of you up so late,"
Michael said.
"Don't be, Son. I am very pleased and
honored you felt you could talk with me."
"Same here, Brother mine. I thought
about going home, but I think I'll crash upstairs if it's all right."
"Anytime," David said.
When the alarm went off, I wanted to
throw the clock across the room and silence the sound I hated most any morning,
but managed to drag myself out of bed and staggered into the bathroom where
I showered and shaved. As soon as I was dressed, I went downstairs, grabbed
an apple for breakfast and walked outside. When I reached the garage, Matt
was waiting for me. "What are you doing here Sarang Hanun Pomul?" I asked.
"There was no way I was letting you
go off on a quest, Sir Knight, without greeting the love of your life." Matt
smiled as I wrapped him in my arms, his hair, loose, surrounding me with
the scent of the man I loved more than life itself. Our kiss was deep, passionate,
filled with love. Our tongues engaged in the duel that we both knew so well,
filling our mouths with the taste of the other. Soon our very breathing became
one. As our kiss went on, I opened my eyes and found myself looking into
the black almond eyes which held the very secret of my life and happiness.
I wanted to stay here with Matt in my arms forever.
But Matt had other ideas, and as he
broke our kiss he said, "Luke, do you realize how important today is? You
are going to find out whether or not the project you dream of can be done
and the chorus and ensemble will begin to show me how good or bad my compositions
are. But Lexington calls. Luke, why don't I skip school and come with you?"
"Because you have to be here to work
with Paula and Eugene and the ensemble and chorus before I would be back.
Plus, yo' mama would have yo' hide."
"You're right, but wouldn't it be fun--just
once--to skip school? I never have."
"Neither have I," Mary Kathryn said
as she and Michael walked up behind us, dressed for the morning run.
"I haven't either," Luke said. Michael
was silent because, when he was on his "bad boy" kick, he had cut several
times.
But he finally spoke, "Well, you guys
know I cut lots for a while and, to tell the truth, it wasn't fun. It was
hell because I was trying so hard to be a bad ass and hated myself for doing
it. But now, with Mary Kathryn, I think it might just be great fun. Think
we might need to try it before school's out. Well, let's run--down the road
or to Lexington." And the three of them were off.
"And I lectured Michael about making
time to be friends," I thought as I watched Matt running away from me.
The trip to Lexington was uneventful
until I got to the outskirts. Lexington was a fairly small city, but it could
muster up a pretty good traffic jam for rush hour. I was not used to that
and found myself getting very tense as I tried to move through traffic. My
destination, Lexington Foundry, was on the other side of the city from Concord,
but I could take the bypass which would keep me from having to drive right
through the middle of town. When I arrived, Mr. Washington, the owner of
the company, was busy and his secretary said I could wait in the outer office
if I wished or I could go to a glass-enclosed room above the floor and watch
what was going on. I chose to do the latter since all of this was totally
new to me. I was absolutely fascinated with all the activity below me. I
was so absorbed in the work I was watching that I was startled when Mr. Washington
walked up behind me without my hearing him and said, "Fascinating, isn't
it?" When I jumped he said, "Sorry I startled you, Mr. Larsen."
I turned, stuck out my hand and said,
"Luke, please, Mr. Washington".
"Then I'm Tom. I am really pleased
to meet you. Lexington Foundry hasn't taken on a project like yours in years
and, in fact, I was afraid we would have to turn you down and send you on
to Jackson; but the day Mr. Stephenson called to ask about our doing your
casting work, a beloved employee who retired ten years ago just happened
to be in the office visiting. After Mr. Stephenson described what you had
in mind, I told him I didn't think we could handle it, but I would call him
back. When I hung up the phone, Herr Dietrich asked what it was we couldn't
do and when I told him he said, 'Well, I could do that if I weren't retired'.
I asked him why didn't he take on your work as a retirement project and he
said, 'I will if it's worth it'. I have known Herr Dietrich since I was a
kid and know he meant exactly what he said. So I guess we had better see
if it's worth it. Do you have your sculptures ready?"
"They're in the Jeep, but I will need
some help getting them inside. They are pretty heavy and very awkward to
handle."
"I'll get some men to bring one of
them into the office. We will only need one for Herr Dietrich to decide whether
he will come out of retirement to do your project or not. We need to get
it ready for his inspection before he arrives which will be in sixteen minutes.
When Herr Dietrich says he will be somewhere at a certain time, you can set
the sun by his arrival."
I admit I was reluctant to let workmen
carry the crate with one of the sculptures in it without my having my hands
on it, but they were as careful as they would have been with a baby. Of course
they were carrying one of my babies! When the crate was safely on a sturdy
table in Mr. Washington's office, I carefully unpacked it. When Mr. Washington
saw the whole piece ready for the final preparation and casting, he said,
"I'm sure once he sees his, Herr Dietrich couldn't be beaten away from the
casting. But put the cloth back over it so you can have an unveiling for
him."
When Herr Dietrich arrived, I was introduced
to him, of course. He was short, stocky with a little round tummy and a shock
of white hair and a great white beard. He wore glasses perched on the
end of his nose and, as soon as I saw him, I thought about St. Nick in "The
Night Before Christmas". As soon as we had been introduced, he asked to see
the sculpture and I unveiled it. I was more than a little anxious and tried
to figure out what he was thinking, but neither his body language nor expression
gave a clue. He was doing a very minute inspection of the clay sculpture
when he saw my name inscribed in the base of the piece. "Luke Hans Larsen,"
he read.
"Yes, Sir." I said.
"Dutch, Danish, Norwegian?" he looked
up and asked.
"My father is a third or fourth generation
Dane. My mother is German. My mom and dad met while he was stationed in Germany."
"I left Germany when Hitler took over.
Lucky to get away. Did my apprenticeship in Freiburg which ended up in East
Germany until the Wall came down. Great metal town. Once had silver mines."
All the time he was talking, Herr Dietrich was going over the sculpture inch
by inch. He finally stood up, looked at me and asked, "Mr. Larsen...."
"Please, Sir, call me Luke."
"I'm a bit reluctant to do that, but
I will. Luke, this is all your work and idea?"
"Yes, Sir, it is."
"And there are two other pieces?"
"Yes, Sir."
Herr Dietrich turned to Mr. Washington
and said, "Thomas, have the other two pieces brought up". As Mr. Washington
went to tell workers to bring the other two up, Herr Dietrich continued to
examine the piece before him. Not once did I see any indication that he liked
or disliked the sculpture.
When the other two sculptures were
placed on the table, the workers started to unpack them. "Thank you very
much, guys (the four who had carried the sculptures were not much older than
I), but I'll take care of the unpacking." I guess there was no real danger
of damaging the pieces accidentally at this point, but I was taking no chances.
When the two sculptures completing
the set were unpacked, Herr Dietrich said, "Thomas, get me my glass". He
had been retired for years and yet he still had some of his things at the
foundry? Mr. Washington took a large magnifying glass from his own desk and
handed it to Herr Dietrich who took as much time going over each of the two
sculptures as he had going over the first. "Are these to be displayed individually
or as a group?" he asked.
"They are to be part of a bigger piece,"
I replied.
"I don't suppose you have anything
that would give me an idea of what the final presentation would be like,
do you?" the old craftsman asked.
"In fact I do, Sir. I have a whole
group of sketches showing how the project evolved in my mind. I have several
sketches of the views of the piece as I conceive it to be in its final form.
I didn't bring them up because I wasn't sure anyone would be interested."
"I need to see them," Herr Dietrich
said. No wasted words from this man.
I went down to the Jeep and brought
the sketchbook up. Of course there were other sketches on everything from
those in the bound sketch pad to several on napkins at the fast food place
where the Gang of Four occasionally ate when Gabrielle wouldn't know about
it. I even had one I had done on toilet tissue with a felt tip pen when I
got inspired while sitting on the throne! But the sketchbook had a pretty
full history of the evolution of the project.
"I don't suppose you're interested
in the earlier sketches, just my idea for the finished project," I said as
I placed the sketchbook on the table where Herr Dietrich was still examining
the sculptures.
"Thomas, coffee for me and a coke--or
do you want something else?--for Luke in the conference room, please."
Mr. Washington sprang to the job at
once. It was obvious he respected Herr Dietrich greatly and, in some way,
looked upon him as a father. Herr Dietrich indicated the direction of the
conference room and, when we arrived, sat at the head of the table and began
looking at the sketches at the front of the book--the very beginning. When
Mr. Washington came in with two coffees and a coke, he sat down on the other
side of Herr Dietrich and said, "Luke, this man is the only reason Lexington
Foundry is still here. I was in my last year of college when my father died
very suddenly. I was ready to drop out to try to keep the foundry open, but
I really didn't know a great deal about the business. Herr Dietrich said
he would keep it going and Alexis, his wife, would handle the business end
of it as she had done for my father. I finished college and came here as
low man and learned the business from the ground up. It's doing well, but
it's almost all commercial work now--memorial plaques, building plates, that
sort of thing. We make money and keep our workers well paid, but we have
had so few good projects that, when Herr Dietrich retired, I realized we
could no longer do what you asked us to do."
"We can do it," Herr Dietrich said,
looking up from the final sketch in the book. "It will probably be my swan
song, and a great one it will be. Mr. Larsen--and in my book, you're Mr.
Larsen--I would be deeply honored if you would allow me to supervise the
casting of these three pieces and their finishing."
"Sir, you would honor me."
"Thomas, do we have enough bronze--good
bronze--to do these."
"The good bronze you left when you
retired is in storeroom. I saw no reason to use it for the kind of work we're
doing now."
"Very good. I'll work for free. The
bronze was written off years ago. I guess the only cost to this fine young
artist will be the cost of the helpers I need and the melting of the bronze,"
Herr Dietrich said, and for the first time, I saw some indication of how
he felt about casting the bronzes. He had a definite twinkle in his eyes.
"Herr Dietrich, if the casting of these
three pieces gives you pleasure, it will be a small pay back for all the
wisdom and pleasure you have given me over the years. Lexington Foundry will
be happy to provide whatever you need gratis."
I must have been sitting with my mouth
open because Mr. Washington said, "You can pick your chin up off the floor,
Luke. We both are honored that you entrust the casting of the bronzes to
us."
Herr Dietrich asked me some questions
about the three bronzes, but mostly about the rest of the piece. I told him
that a patron was helping me and since the casting was costing me nothing,
I could carry out my dream concept if I could locate the tools and materials
for the other major part of the piece. I needed a sheet of plate glass three
by five feet by, I hoped, two inches thick. Herr Dietrich asked more questions
about the final piece as did Mr. Washington. It was finally lunch time and
Mr. Washington wanted to treat us to lunch and Herr Dietrich, Mr. Washington
and I continued our conversation over lunch. I had a delightful time.
After lunch, I had an appointment with
a glass company where I learned they did not have the glass available and
didn't seem very interested in helping me find what I needed. Mr. Washington
had called a friend at another glass company before I left his place and,
even though it was across town in another direction, I drove through Lexington
and finally found it. While they did not have what I needed, the manager,
Mr. Drake, made several calls until he located it, and got the price which
he showed me while still on the phone. "Can you handle that price if the
glass is delivered to your studio?" I nodded indicating I could, so he placed
the order for it--it cost much more than I had expected, but then the castings
cost nothing except my gratitude; I could afford the glass since Millie had
given me a thousand dollars to spend.
After I had thanked Mr. Drake, I made
my last stop in Lexington at an art supply center. Again, what I wanted was
not available, but I was promised it could be shipped and in my hands by
the time the glass arrived. I had done better than I had expected, but I
would never have been able to do the project without Millie's help, even
if I had been able to locate used glass-working equipment, which I had not.
With deposits for the glass and tools, and what I would owe when they arrived,
the thousand she gave me was almost gone and I might have to spend a couple
hundred of my own money--which was all I would have had otherwise. So I was
a very happy artist as I got into the Jeep in time to join the afternoon
rush hour.
After I left Lexington behind, it was
smooth sailing back to Concord. When I arrived, I went straight to the studio
and made a list of other things I would need to put the sculpture together.
Some scrap steel and gears I could get from a junk yard for their cost as
junk metal. I also needed an electric motor or maybe two, but those would
set me back less than an additional hundred. As I finished, there was a knock
on the door. The only other part of my work which was a secret was covered,
so I just yelled, "Come on in". Matt burst in, as excited as a little kid.
"Yonghon Tongmu, you are the most wonderful
person in the whole world," Matt said as he grabbed me and pulled me from
my chair, covering my mouth with his for a kiss--the likes of which I had
not had for a long time. In fact, it was the best ever. "Yonghon Tongmu,
I love you; I love you; I love you."
"Matt, I know I am very desirable,
irresistible even, but this seems to be more than your usual attraction to
poor little me," I laughed, pulling his mouth to mine as my fingers went
to work on his hair. As soon as it was free, I picked him up and took him
to the sofa where I had slept several nights ago, laid him down and immediately
went to work on his beautiful mouth. He was so excited I couldn't hold him
down and soon he lay atop my body, kissing me in the wonderful space created
by his cascading hair. He was all over me. Even when he had wanted, desperately,
for us to go all the way, he was not as excited as he was today. He was really
a wild man, kissing every bit of exposed skin he could find on my body. By
the time he had completed that, he had my shirt unbuttoned and pulled it
off of me, throwing it on the floor as he started working on my chest with
his tongue, stopping from time to time to kiss a nip, to grab his teeth across
one, or to suck first one and then the other.
Ordinarily I think I would have been
so aroused that I would be shooting off by now, but Matt was so excited that
I got tickled and kept laughing rather than getting aroused. Lifting his
head from my chest, I pressed my lips to his in a long, slow, passionate
but gentle kiss. "Ok, Matthew, what provoked all this loving--not that I
object."
Matt sat up, turned and faced me and
said, "Luke, we had practice at St. Mary's with all the ensemble, chorus
and organ parts together for the first time. We did several pieces where
about all that was needed was to make sure we were together since, for the
most part, we all knew the music. Then we started on a part of one of my
original compositions. I had played it alone and I could hear it in my head,
but Luke it was magnificent. When we started I was thinking of you and I
just got so carried away I could hardly stand it, but I had to hold it all
in until I got here. When I saw you our whole life together since that day
I found you floating in the river came flooding back and I realized I loved
you more than I had ever thought possible," Matt said, as he once again covered
my mouth with his, his tongue carrying the taste of Matt into my mouth from
where it spread love and joy throughout my being. "But I am being selfish,
Luke. Tell me about your day."
I lay back on the sofa, pulled Matt
on top of my body and his head against my chest. I told him all that had
happened and how, with Millie's help and the gratis work and materials from
Lexington Foundry and Herr Dietrich, I was going to be able to do all I dreamed
of doing. "Matt, we are so lucky--no--we are so blessed by the people who
surround us. You do know that, don't you?"
"Yea. Sometimes I worry about it. It
all just seems too good to be true. Oh, and Millie has a surprise for you,
if you're willing." Matt then told me what Millie had proposed. We
continued talking about our work and the people who loved and supported us
for some time, stopping for a kiss from time to time until I realized it
was getting late and I needed to get home to have dinner with my family.
"Matt, I need to dash inside and tell Michael and David about the day and
then go home for dinner. I need to spend time at home tonight."
"So long as you know that's not where
I want you to be."
"Tomorrow's Thursday and we are obliged
to spend an hour enjoying being alive. Right?"
"Right. Although I do need to spend
some time practicing for Sunday. It's Easter you know and that means all
kinds of special music."
"Don't you have choir practice tomorrow
night? What time?"
"7:00 until 8:00, why?"
"Why don't we have a date tomorrow
night? We've never had one, you know. We'll go to the falls for our Mr. Mitchell
time and then get anything we need to get done, done--like I need to paint
some--and after practice we'll have dinner and do something datey."
"Datey? Datey?"
"Yea, you know, something people do
on dates."
"Don't get me wrong, Lover, but I don't
think I--we--have time for that this week. I have choir practice tomorrow
night--and it may well go over since we'll be finishing up for Easter. We
have a wedding rehearsal Saturday afternoon and you're going to Lexington
again Saturday morning, right?" I nodded. "Sunday I have Easter, followed
by the wedding. I think we have our hands full this week."
"Sounds to me like we have our hands
empty," I said, and gave Matt an impish smile.
"Luke, you're dimpling me," he protested.
"'You're dimpling me?' Just what does
that mean?"
"You're giving me that smile which
you know shows off your dimple and I just about lose it! You know that!"
Matt was still on top of me and attacked my mouth again with passionate kisses.
This time I was aroused and so was he. "Babe, I want you so baaaad!" he exclaimed
as he continued to smother my mouth and body with kisses.
"And I want you as well, Sarang Hanun
Pomul," I responded. We kept up our kissing, our tongues bringing pleasure
to the other. By this time, I had taken off his shirt. Our bare chests were
together and his hair covered both our faces as we became more and more passionate.
Our hips were pressed into each other, our hardness meeting. We continued
rubbing against each other, obviously both getting hotter all the time. Finally
I knew where this was going to end and I was ready. As Matt snaked his tongue
into my mouth, he pressed his hips against mine as I raised to meet them.
We both exploded at the same time and I could feel my hot man's seed filling
my boxers. As I came, Matt sucked my tongue into his mouth and practically
shouted, "Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu Larsen, I love you," and bit my tongue
not too gently, then collapsed on my body. I held him tight and stroked his
hair as he lay his head on my chest.
"No more than I love you, Matthew Sarang
Hanun Pomul Greywolf!" We lay together, secure in the afterglow of our love
making until I knew I had to get home. "Matt, Babe, you know I hate to break
this up, but I've got to get home."
Matt stood up and removed his pants
and briefs as I did the same. We cleaned each other up, and redressed, leaving
off our briefs and boxers. I pulled Matt to myself and once again kissed
his wonderful mouth, this time gently. "I need to speak to David and Michael
before I go. Come with me?"
In answer, Matt took my hand and we
walked, hand in hand, to the house. I told David and Michael about my trip
and then Matt and I drove to his place. When we arrived he asked, "Will I
see you later tonight?"
"Maybe after dinner and I have had
time to talk to the folks. Ok?"
"Ok."
"Bye, Babe," I said as I gave Matt
a kiss.
When I got home, dinner was almost
ready. I ran upstairs and changed into more comfortable clothes since I had
dressed in better than school clothes for the trip to Lexington--and I did
need abit more cleaning up than I had done at the studio. When I got back
downstairs, Mom had just put the last dish on the table and called Dad and
Mary Kathryn to dinner.
"How was the trip, Luke?" Dad asked.
"Wonderful. Couldn't have gone better."
I told the family all about what had happened and all of them were pleased
for me.
"And just what is it you are doing
anyway?" Dad asked.
"It's a surprise. Only Millie will
see any of it before it is unveiled at the exhibition and she will only see
a photograph for the catalog. Matt is trying to keep his two original compositions
secret until the concert and I am keeping two works secret until the exhibition.
Anything happen at school today, Mary Kathryn?"
"I think the start of something happened
today. Michael checked on his running for president of the student body and
there is no reason he can't. He and Larry were getting the announcement ready
for tomorrow. You promised a campaign poster for him so I guess you'll need
to set aside some time for that. A couple jocks heard he was running and
told him he couldn't because he'd just be a junior next year and besides
he wasn't a part of the 'real' Independence High School. You know how that
went over."
"I did a campaign poster the other
day, but forgot about it in the excitement. All it needs is a picture of
Michael--I think in his track uniform, jumping hurdles or something very
active as a kind of answer to the jocks. If I had the picture, we could get
it ready tonight and run into town and get copies printed."
"I just happen to have a few pictures
of this Michael track star jock you're talking about. I'll get them and you
can pick the best one." Mary Kathryn said. "I'll do it right after dinner."
The family continued to talk about
what was going on at school, my work and what Mary Kathryn was up to. When
dinner was finished, Mom and Dad went to the den to watch TV. Mary Kathryn
and I looked through the pictures she had of Michael. There were some great
ones and I chose one of him clearing the hurdles which I was able to use
to make a great sketch for the poster. It also fit a slogan I wanted to use:
"No hurdle too high for Independence with Michael running!" Dad said Mary
Kathryn and I could use his car so we picked up Michael, drove into town
to a quick print place and got fifty large posters and a hundred small ones
printed. We also had a thousand business card-sized ones printed with the
alma mater on the back.
By the time we had gotten that taken
care of and Michael back home, it was time for bed. It had been a great day
and I was tired and I knew Matt was, but we just hadn't had enough time together,
so as Mom and Dad got up to go to bed I said, "Mom, Dad, if you don't mind
I think I will spend the night with Matt."
"I'm sure we don't mind," Dad said,
"but why doesn't Matt spend the night with you any more?"
"Actually, Dad, we have talked about
that. While we are not having sex--at least not what we would call real sex--we
both know how uncomfortable you are with our relationship. Out of respect
for you and your willingness to accept us even if you can't accept our love
for each other, we decided we wouldn't sleep together in our house. One day--or
night--that might change, but right now I don't think you would be very comfortable
with it and neither would we."
"I hate to say it Luke, I really do,
but I think you are right and I really appreciate the fact that you and Matt
thought about that. I'm working on it, but at this point, you are right.
See you in the morning for breakfast?"
"Sure thing, Dad. And I'll ask Matt
to come with me."
"Please do," Mom said.
The moon was rapidly approaching full
and there were just a few fluffy clouds here and there in the sky. It was
truly a beautiful night as I walked to the Greywolfs'. As I approached the
house, I noticed all the lights were off. Rather than disturb anyone, I climbed
the trellis and suddenly started smiling to myself remembering Romeo and
Juliet. When I reached Matt's window, it was wide open and I saw Matt, lying
on his back, spread-eagle on the bed. The sheet just covered his hips, leaving
the rest of his dark, strong, hard, wonderful body almost glowing in the
pale moonlight.
I climbed through the window and stood
beside his bed, drinking in the beauty of the man I loved so very, very much.
I slowly and silently undressed and walked to the bed. As I approached--as
silent as the night--I could see his dark lashes resting on his cheeks. A
cloud had briefly cast a shadow on Matt's face as it crossed the moon's face.
As it moved away from the moon, the scar on Matt's cheek from the barbed
wire was illuminated. I felt a catch in my throat as all he had been through
for me raced through my mind. Realizing how he had suffered for me, I couldn't
hold back the silent tears which escaped my eyes and slowly flowed down my
cheeks. I stood over him weeping, both because of the pain I had caused this
wonderful man and for the joy his love gave me.
Matt
It had been a long, hard day. School,
for the most part, had been pretty dull, but I stayed the whole day since
Luke had the Jeep. The last period I had gone to the band room where Eugene
and the ensemble were practicing. It was really going well. When Eugene found
I was going to be with him, he had gotten the school's keyboard to use and,
while it certainly was not St. Mary's organ, it did help to give the ensemble
some idea of what working with the organ was like.
As soon as the final bell rang, Paula
came out and checked on members of the chorus getting on the buses and Eugene
checked the ensemble. I rode the bus Dad was driving and was as excited as
the kids on the bus who had started singing and playing their instruments
as we crossed town from school to St. Mary's.
I thought it would be a good idea to
let the students who had never been to St. Mary's get a feel of the organ
and played a couple short Bach pieces and really tore into Clarke's "Trumpet
Tune", with full blasts of Millie's state trumpets. When I got through, I
spoke to the whole group and told them it was very important to me and I
would really appreciate it if they would keep my two compositions a secret.
"I really want them to be completely unknown until we play them for an audience."
There seemed to be general agreement that was a delightful idea and I was
pleased.
When we were all just about completely
exhausted, Millie came by. "Kids, I've been thinking...."
"Man, we are in trouble now," I laughed.
"Yea, we are in deep doo doo," Eugene
laughed as he gave Millie a hug.
"If you two don't behave yourselves,
you are exactly right," she said, and treated the assembled chorus and ensemble
to a Millie belly laugh. "Look, I am really getting geared up to promote
this concert and exhibition. Now it really doesn't matter how many show up
for the exhibition, we can keep it open all night if it's necessary, but
the concert is different. St. Mary's is not the largest place in town, so
I am going to require people to get tickets so we can seat everyone. But
just the parents of the chorus and ensemble could be close to a hundred people
and then there are grand parents and favorite aunts and uncles, teachers.
I am really anxious to have the townspeople who do not have children in school
here so they can appreciate our school and her students. Sooo, what
I would like for you to think about is having two concerts. On Saturday evening,
have one for close family and friends. Afterwards, if Luke is willing, his
exhibition can also be opened and I would have a reception for all you artists
and your family and friends. I thought it would be nice to have a dinner,
but with the art exhibition, we are pretty much out of space, but I had planned
a reception for Sunday afternoon and I see no reason there couldn't be one
Saturday night. Give it some thought."
"I don't see what there is to think
about, Mrs. Willingham," Jackson Simpson said. "You have just offered us
an honor and an opportunity to show our parents and friends how special they
are to us AND we'll get to perform again. Sounds like a no brainer to me."
He was quickly seconded by everyone present.
"Since the next day is Sunday, would
7:00 be too late? How long is the performance going to be?"
"I think a good two hours with an intermission,"
Matt said. Paula and Eugene nodded in agreement. "But 7:00 is about as early
as people could get here and it wouldn't be too late when the concert and
reception were over. Sounds good to me." Heads nodded in agreement.
"Fine, but let's keep it under our
hats for the time being. I need to check with Luke about opening his exhibition
that night. Fr. Tom has already given his ok. What I'd like from each of
you is a list of names and addresses of those you would like invited so I
can send invitations to them. And you might divide the list into those you
just have to have come and those you would like to come if room is available.
Well, I'm off." And Millie was gone.
We had worked very hard--the kids were
disciplined artists and that impressed me. There were some rough spots that
needed work by Paula, Eugene and me, but we really made progress. I was very
pleased, but very tired.
Nonetheless, when I got home--I rode
the bus back to school and came home with Dad who was very interested in
how the practice had gone--I went out to the shed where we had our exercise
equipment. Michael was there and had worked up a real sweat already. I spotted
for him while he lifted weights and he did the same for me. I was tired when
I got home, but the workout made me tired in a very different way from school
and practice. I took a quick shower and, as I walked toward the house, noticed
the Jeep was at Michael's so I started walking toward the studio. As I walked
I became more and more excited about what had happened with the practice,
Millie's offer and my composition "Yonghon Tongmu". By the time I reached
the studio, I was as excited as a kid at Christmas and practically attacked
Luke. We spent some time together--including some really hot time--and then
went to our homes. I hoped I would see Luke later, but it was not definite.
After dinner, Mom and Dad had papers
to grade and I took the notes I had made at today's practice and worked on
the revisions for an hour. I had a bit of homework to do and when I completed
that, I decided Luke wasn't coming, so I showered and went to bed.
As I lay in bed, I thought back over
the day and how very much I had to be thankful for--my music, Paula, Eugene,
the chorus and ensemble, the family, Millie. The list was long, but ended
with my soulmate Luke. I drifted off to sleep thinking about how my life
had changed since Luke and I admitted we were in love with each other. In
my dreamless sleep, I suddenly knew Luke was approaching and finally that
he was beside me. When I opened my eyes, Luke, his nude body illuminated
by the bright moonlight pouring through the open window, stood over me.
As I reached up to wrap my arms around him, the moonlight caught the tears
running down his face. "Luke, you're crying," I said as my heart skipped
a beat. What could be wrong? "What's wrong, Yonghon Tongmu?"
As I sat up in bed, Luke leaned over
me and kissed me hard and rough, then sat beside me. "Nothing is wrong, Sarang
Hanun Pomul, nothing. It's just that when I came in the window, the moonlight
made my dark beauty's body glow. I was so full of joy because you loved me
that I was practically in tears. Then a cloud covered the moon briefly and
when it moved on, the moonlight illuminated the scar on your cheek and I
realized how much you had suffered because of me and the tears just started--tears
of pain and tears of joy."
"Luke, you give me so much joy that
the pain seems unimportant. And I am so glad you came back." I lay back on
the bed and Luke lay beside me. Our legs and arms were wrapped around each
other. We lay, as we did frequently when we were in bed together, speaking
to each other with our eyes. Finally, after a few tender and gentle kisses,
we drifted off to sleep, our bodies intertwined.
Luke and I got up, dressed in our sweats
and went for our morning run. When we got back to my place, Luke gave me
a goodbye kiss and ran on home while I showered and dressed. He had asked
me to come to breakfast with the Larsens and I had told Mom I was going when
we came in from the run.
When I got to Luke's, breakfast was
ready and we all sat down. "Luke tells me your music is going well," Jens
said. "I'm very pleased since the concert should show more what Independence
is about than the emphasis on football and basketball, although I guess that's
where the emphasis is in most schools these days."
"I'm afraid you're right and it may
cause a bit of a problem since we have convinced Michael to run for student
body president. That's always been a contest among the senior football and
basketball players and, while Michael is an excellent athlete, he's not a
football or basketball jock."
"Well, they will just have to deal
with it!" Mary Kathryn said emphatically. "They think they are what the whole
school is about and the students pretty much let them get by with it. Even
if I weren't in love with that hunk, I'd still be in favor of his being student
body president. He stands for something, something good, while those super
jocks are only concerned about themselves and their conquests."
"Well, I guess we know where you stand,
sister mine," Luke laughed. "But I agree with you 100 percent. Matt, don't
you think we need to get to school a bit early so we can get posters up?
We got them printed last night. Michael knows we have everything ready and
I told him we would pick him up as soon as we could. Larry has his first
spot ready for homeroom. He got a tape of the TV broadcast of the service
for Gregory and was going to use part of it."
"Do you think that is wise, Luke? There
are bound to be students who resented it and who may not agree with what
the boys did to Gregory, but who are homophobic."
"Dad, I know that is true. There may
be students who simply believe as you do or did, that being gay is something
someone chooses and is evil, wicked and sinful, but that's not who Michael
is and if that causes him to be defeated, students at Independence aren't
as basically good as I think they are."
"Luke, that hurts, but not because
you are wrong. It just reminds me of how far I still have to go."
"Dad, I had no intention of hurting
you, but that is just the way it is and, believe me, I appreciate your struggle
and how far you have come." Luke got up, walked behind his dad and put his
arms around him. "You don't really know just how much I appreciate you and
how you are accepting something which I know is very painful for you."
"That goes for me as well, Jens," I
said.
As soon as we had finished breakfast
and cleared the table, Luke, Mary Kathryn and I put the posters in the Jeep
and picked up Michael. When we got to school, other students were putting
up posters, none of which had the professional look of Michael's although
most had spent big money getting color copies of photos to paste on theirs.
Several of the jock types made some pretty dirty remarks about "snot-nosed
sophomores" who were "too big for their britches." Michael simply ignored
them.
The video announcements by the candidates
were pretty typical--"Hi, I'm John Doe. I play (fill in position) on the
(football or basket ball team). I am running for student body president because
I think I can do the job." Michael's was last and, man, it was polished.
Larry had used clips from the service for Gregory including the opening when
Michael's face was superimposed over the Declaration of Independence and
then over Independence High School. The voice-over was done by Larry who
said, "Isn't it time Independence had a student body president worthy of
the student body? Michael Andrews has proven he is equal to the task." The
closing shot was Michael's campaign poster. Luke leaned over to me and whispered,
"Damn, with an artist like me and a audio video guy like Larry, why isn't
he running for governor or president?" and laughed. I had to admit I had
never seen anything at Independence which came close, and this was only the
beginning.
After Luke and I finished our last
period at school, we left and went straight to the falls. The weather was
downright hot and I expected a spring thunderstorm as a result, but we had
our hour which we actually spent being kids again. We crossed the canes and
before we reached the river were both naked. We raced to the top of the falls,
laughing our heads off. When we got to the top, we joined hands and dived
into the water together. The day was hot, but the water was not. I think
if I had tried to get in a bit at a time, I would never have made it, but
suddenly I plunged beneath the crystal-clear cold water. Before I broke the
surface, I turned and saw Luke's body in the dappled light. He looked like
a golden god of the river. When we broke the surface, we were facing each
other, laughing. I think Mr. Mitchell would have given us an "A" for enjoying
being alive. We played in the water, frequently getting out to race to the
top of the falls and dive in. Finally we were pretty well played out and
swam to the middle of the basin, embraced, and exchanged a warm, loving kiss.
We swam to the shore and lay on the
blanket we had brought from the Jeep--Luke lying on his back, I on my stomach,
and we talked, really talked, about our future. We had completed the applications
for Oberlin as had Paula, Eugene and Larry, but we didn't know what would
come of that since we knew the deadline for applications was long past. "I
know Millie packs a lot of weight around here," Luke said, "but I'm not sure
how much influence she has at a college. And if Oberlin doesn't pan out what
are we going to do, Sarang Hanun Pomul?"
"I really don't know, Yonghon Tongmu.
All I know is that I'm not planning to be separated from you for a whole
school year. I'm not planning on being separated from you a minute more than
I have to until the day I die!"
"Same here, Matt. I guess we'll just
have to wait and see what develops. I think if worse comes to worse, we can
go to State in Jackson as special students. That way we can take courses
we want or need and not have to get involved with all the Mickey Mouse of
being regular students." With those words our discussion came to a close
and we enjoyed the feel of each other's body and some soft, gentle, loving
kisses. Lust was turned pretty low and we were just two mellow lovers enjoying
life. After we got dressed--unlike most classes, the Mr. Mitchell enjoy-being-alive
class was extended half an hour without protest from the students--Luke went
to his studio and I went to St. Mary's to work on music for Sunday and to
try out the changes made from yesterday's practice. When I finished,
I drove by the hospital to see if Gladys or Chelsea was on duty. Gladys was,
and I spent some time talking with her. She was very interested in what was
happening to me and Luke and I wanted to know how the hospice was coming.
Before I left, I told her I heard she and Chelsea would be at the wedding
Sunday. Wouldn't miss it, Matt. Think you and Luke deserve a lot of credit
for making that happen."
"Michael took the bull by the horns
as well. I guess the whole Gang of Four was pretty determined that was going
to happen. See you Sunday," I said as I gave Gladys a hug and then left.
I got back home just in time for supper.
Dad told me there had been some grumbling about Michael's running for student
body president. "I guess he has some of the others who are running worried.
I can see why after this morning's video and the campaign posters. Several
seniors--cheerleaders and ball players--apparently went to Ms. Jones and
complained about a sophomore running. I heard by the grapevine one of them
said, 'He's just a sophomore. Sophomores can't run because the president
has to be a senior.' Ms. Jones said and, again, I am reporting second hand.
'Why not? The only rules I have found are the student must have been a student
at Independence for a semester, have an academic average of 3.0 and a conduct
grade of A. He certainly meets those requirements as, I'm sure you are aware,
some who planned to run did not.' Another student said, 'Well, he's just
a sophomore and will just be a junior next year. He's not old enough for
the job. How could he be student body president?' To which Ms. Jones, I am
told, responded, 'I guess if he's too young and immature, you don't have
to worry since he will, obviously, be easy to defeat, then, won't he?' And
according to 'a high ranking administration figure', that ended the conversation.
But, Matt, I'm afraid it's not the end of the matter. I have overheard enough
to believe it can get nasty."
"I hope not. It would sure be a black
mark on Independence if it did, but Michael can handle it, especially with
the backing he has. He's got some really great people pulling for him. Hate
to eat and run, but choir practice could get long tonight. See you later."
Choir practice did run long. One of
the problems with being a teenaged organist is getting people old enough
to be your grandparents to listen to you. I learned long ago that I had to
depend on the choir director--who was old enough to be my grandfather--to
deal with the difficult members of the choir who believed they were good
enough for Washington Cathedral. The music was finally in good shape--at
least as good as it was going to be--and I got home about 9:00, an hour later
than usual. When I pulled in the drive, I noticed the lights were still on
in the studio and knew Luke was working late. I didn't expect him to come
crawling into bed with me and he didn't.
Part Twenty-four
Matt
When we reached school the next day,
Larry met us at the entrance, obviously upset. "Michael, I am really pissed
and if you want me to drop out of your campaign, I will."
"Why? What's wrong?"
Larry had been carrying a poster under
his arm and when he unrolled it, it was one of Michael's campaign posters.
Someone had used dayglo purple and green to spray paint "Faggot Lover" on
it. "I think all of the large posters have been spray painted. Some have
the same words as this one, others have 'The Queer Party Candidate', or 'Faggot
for President' on them. The custodian said he had taken down the worse ones
which had 'Assfucker's Support Michael', 'Cocksuckers United Candidate' and
'Fudgepacker for President'. Ms. Jones told him to leave all of them up except
those with 'cocksucker', 'assfucker' or 'Fudgepacker' on them. I'm positive
someone saw me kiss Eugene and that's what's behind this."
"Oh, I think it's just some of those
who were upset by the service for Gregory who see this as a way of getting
even for being told their attitude is shitty and sucks. I think that's what's
behind it, not something you and Eugene did. And even if someone did see
you kissing Eugene and did all this, do you think I would let that make a
difference? Man, shit like this is why I agreed to get involved in this race
to start with. Hell, fucking no, you're not dropping out. We need to have
a little conference here before school as to what we do in response."
While Michael and Larry were talking,
Paula, Eugene and Linda walked up. "'Sup? Somebody die?" Eugene asked. Larry
simply held up the poster.
As soon has he held it up, Linda said,
"That Jock asshole! If Orie didn't do that he was involved."
"But he isn't even running, Linda,"
Paula said.
"Well, it doesn't matter, his jock
friends are and he has been hanging out with some of the jokers who were
involved in the Gregory thing. He would be running except he couldn't meet
the requirements. Man, I sure hate [knowing] I got involved with that jerk.
Besides, he's mad because I am in the Select Few and he told me Matt and
Luke were faggots because he saw them holding hands and, Eugene, you and
Larry are a couple of buttfuckers because another jock asshole saw you two
kissing. So Michael is, at least to him, a faggot-lover, and probably a cocksucker
himself."
There were seven mouths hanging wide
open. "You mean to tell me Orie told you all that and you said nothing about
it?" Michael said incredulously.
"What was there to say? I just told
him I didn't have anything to say to him, didn't care to hear anything he
had to say and he was still a jock asshole. I didn't say anything to any
of you. I thought he wouldn't lie about Eugene or Larry--he wouldn't have
thought they were worth mentioning. He wanted to get in my good graces and
thought a little gossip about my friends would help, I guess. Same with Matt
and Luke. If you're couples--and I have neither seen any reason to think
you are nor any reason to doubt you are for that matter--what Orie said makes
no never mind to me--except I really did have my eye on you, Matt. But if
I'm going to lose out, it's not to some dumb bitch and, Luke, somebody else
is just going to have to do without the number two hunk in this group. Personally,
I think you're two good looking couples and since I know why Paula and I
and my two cousins were snapped up for the prom, I intend to really enjoy
myself while those two Lexington babes fall all over themselves trying to
get Larry and Eugene hot," Linda laughed.
"Linda, I really need to apologize
to you. I have always liked you and enjoyed your company, but I must confess
I thought you...."
"Yea, Matt, you just thought I was
another dumb blond. Well, we'll go into all that at lunch... no, I'll be
busy at lunch, but we don't have time right now. We need to decide how to
respond to this jock asshole shit."
"Yea, right. Important things first.
What are we going to do about the posters?" Michael asked.
"Suggestion. Leave them alone and,
Michael, cut into your spot this morning and apologize for leaving them up
and ask if someone low enough to appeal to bigotry and sink so low as to
damage campaign posters is who Independence High wants as a leader and as
its representative," Linda suggested. "Meanwhile, I'll put on the dumb blond
cheerleader routine and butter up Orie and find out who is responsible. He'll
definitely know and I wouldn't be surprised if he wasn't involved."
"Gal, I double my apology!"
"Accepted, Matt."
"Linda, you are a blond genius!" Michael
exclaimed.
"Political dynamite!" Larry agreed.
"But Linda, you're putting youself
in danger because you know what Orie's new buddies can do."
"I think I can handle that," Linda
said. "At least I am going to try."
Michael did as Linda had suggested.
Ms. Jones came on after the political spots and talked about how upset she
was about the prejudice and bigotry shown in the damaging of Michael Andrews'
posters. She agreed, she said, with leaving them up so students could see
them and decide if the people who were responsible were the kind of people
the students of Independence High school wanted to be held up as their leaders
and representatives. "But they will only stay up today. Independence has
been embarrassed enough already. Others, which had even more offensive language,
have been removed by Mr. Vincent, the custodian. I hope many of you will
apologize to Michael for what one or more of your schoolmates have done.
And, on a very practical level, Michael spent money for nice posters and
someone or someones who bought a couple cans of cheap spray paint ruined
them."
Lunch was interesting, to say the least.
It started soon after Orie got his lunch and sat down. Linda said, in a whisper,
"Look pissed off when I start". Suddenly she said, very loudly so practically
everyone in the cafeteria heard her, "Well, if that's the way it is, I'm
through with you," took her lunch and stormed away, headed for the table
where Orie was sitting. When she got there, she glared at a jock sitting
by Orie until he made room for her to sit down. We ate, trying not to laugh
out loud as Linda gave new meaning to "a woman's wiles" and the "dumb blond
cheerleader" routine. Meanwhile, a number of students walked by the table
and said how upset and sorry they were that Michael's posters were defaced.
Several dropped coins or a bill on the table. The first one said, "I want
to help pay for new posters and get you to sign it for me when the campaign
is over". She was followed by a long line saying, "Same for me". Michael
barely got to eat because he was busy passing out the business card size
posters, each of which he signed with a "To" message. He knew most of the
students' names, but occasionally needed help or apologized for having to
ask.
The last person who came by was a junior,
the best and most popular basketball player, Bill Lance, who was running
for student body president. He asked if he could sit down and we all pointed
to Linda's now vacant chair. As soon as he was seated he said, "Michael,
I decided to run for president because I think I have something to offer
as student leader". We all nodded in agreement. He was absolutely right.
"However, in light of what has happened, I think I have more to offer by
setting an example. Tomorrow my video spot will be an announcement of my
dropping out of the race in support of you."
"Bill, I appreciate the gesture," Michael
said, "but that's not necessary and it will take a good candidate out of
the race."
"Well, I would have suggested you drop
out and support me," he smiled, "but that would make it appear the assholes
who spray painted your posters had forced you out. There's no way that would
not be the claim and I'll do everything I can to see that doesn't happen."
"Bill, you're right. Larry, would you
do the video spot after school?"
"Sure."
As soon as we finished our school day,
Luke and I drove to his studio, picked up the original of the campaign poster,
took it in to town, got a hundred printed and drove back to school. We got
there just as school was out and soon the Select Few, except Linda, were
gathered in the parking lot. Bill Lance was with them. Orie drove past in
a car full of jocks and as they passed one of them--I couldn't tell which--yelled,
"Look at the Faggots and Fag Hags!"
"Ok, Select Few, we have a job to do.
Bill, looks as if you're one of us. Welcome to the Select Few."
Bill bowed and said, "I am honored,
Oh Select Ones". We all laughed.
As soon as we walked inside, Linda
joined us. "I stayed out of sight until Orie and his crew left so they wouldn't
know they are about to be sandbagged. I know the whole rotten mess. But what's
up right now? Hi, Bill. What are you doing here?"
"While you were doing your dumb blond
cheerleader bit, Bill came by the table at lunch and decided to join the
campaign," Michael said and told Linda what had happened.
"Welcome, Sir William," Linda said.
Maybe the Select Few will still be here next year. Good feeling."
"Ok, guys, Matt and I went to town
last period and got a rush job on a hundred new posters. We are on our way
to see Ms. Jones to let her know we're taking down the defaced ones and putting
these up so they will be here first thing Monday morning." When we reached
Ms. Jones' office, her door was open and we told her what we were doing.
"I was going to let Mr. Vincent take
down the defaced ones. He offered to work over because he felt, somehow or
other, he was to blame."
"Well, he's not," Michael said, "and
we have the time and manpower...."
"And womanpower," Mary Kathryn promptly
added.
"Yea, and womanpower to get the job
done quickly."
"Michael, I can see you have your hands
full at school and at home. It must be nice to have the little woman helping
out," Ms. Jones laughed. Michael blushed and Mary Kathryn laughed at him
and kissed him on the cheek.
"You better agree, Michael," she said,
taking his head in her hands and nodding it up and down.
"Ms. Jones, Bill has made a decision
about the campaign that you need to know about," Michael said.
When Bill finished telling Ms. Jones
what he had decided to do, she said, "Bill, I know you would have been a
good student body president. No doubt in my mind about that, but I also think
you will be remembered more for the leadership and the position you are taking
than you would as former student body president. I admire your courage and
the true leadership evident in your decision."
"Thanks. It is just the right thing
to do," Bill said.
"Oh, Ms. Jones, I need to call my mom
and tell her where I am," Paula said.
Ms. Jones pointed to her phone and
asked, "Anyone else need to call home?" Only Bill did. "When you kids get
finished with the posters, come back by--you too Bill. We need to talk."
Her tone was serious and I suspected what was up.
With all of us working, it took less
than thirty minutes to take down the defaced posters and put up the new ones.
While the rest of us were doing the posters, Larry and Bill did the video
spot for tomorrow when Bill would announce his decision. When we finished,
we went back to Ms. Jones's office. She closed the door and asked, "Are all
of you in this together? I mean, are you really--what? solid--with each other?
What I'm trying to say...."
"All except Bill," Matt said, "and
he definitely needs to know what he is getting into. Bill, when you learn
the facts, there's not a person in this room who wouldn't support you changing
your mind. So you don't get blindsided, Luke and I, Larry and Eugene are
couples. We are gay. Luke and I are not...."
"Right now Luke and Matt are virgins,
Bill, as if that makes any difference. And in a real sense, that is true
of Larry and Eugene. But they are gay and will definitely not be virgins
forever!" Cut-to-the-Chase Michael said. Ms. Jones, Larry and Eugene, Luke
and I all blushed big time.
"Glad those aren't requirements for
participating in this campaign," Bill laughed. "I'd strike out on both counts,
but what has that got to do with anything?"
"Ms. Jones, of course we all know about
Matt and Luke and Eugene and Larry. Linda was the last to find out--well
maybe not, she just didn't say anything," Michael said.
"Ok, I'm going to be straightforward
and blunt. We have a real problem here. I have been on the phone with Millie
and told her what happened to the posters. Needless to say she was, I believe
her exact words were 'royally pissed', does that sound right?"
"Sounds pretty calm and cool to me.
I guess it hadn't had time to sink in or she'd have been here ripping things
apart," Eugene laughed.
"To tell you the truth, I expected
her to do exactly that but, Eugene, your mother is a smart lady. She said
if she came out here it would look as if she thought I couldn't handle the
situation. She's right, of course, so it's in my hands. Anything you might
know about the situation that I might not know?"
Linda said, "It depends on how much
you know. I think I know it all. There are actually two things going on at
the same time. Orie Greenley is still really pis... ticked off that I gave
him a kick in the family jewels when he tried to force me to have sex with
him and he was really put out when I told him our date for the prom was off.
So he is out to get Matt, who is my date."
Ms. Jones looked surprised for a moment
and Paula said, "Yes, and I am dating Luke. See the two guys each met someone
they fell madly in love with at a special kind of swim meet, but they can't
date them for the prom because there's an age problem and a race problem."
Ms. Jones looked as if she was caught up in a crazy dream and kept shaking
her head.
Bill said, "The attempt at drowning
yourself--it all makes sense now, Luke".
Paula laughed, "Luke's younger than
Matt--by twenty minutes--and Matt is of mixed race".
"Well, I was wondering if I had lost
it there for a moment," Ms. Jones laughed.
"And just so you'll know the score,
my two cousins from Lexington are coming over as Eugene and Larry's dates.
I just can't wait to see them try out their man-killing ways on those two
guys! It is going to be a real treat!" Linda laughed. "Anyway, the other
part of this mess is that Orie and two of his jock buddies have been befriended
by three of the jerks who abused Gregory. All are still really angry because
of the protest against Mr. Gray since he was slipping them all sorts of help--money,
tests before they were given, changing grades--so they could play ball. And
they hate Michael because he 'made us real Independence people' look bad.
They were all out drinking last night and when they were pretty drunk, Jake
Hilliard, the ring leader of the motley crew, suggested they 'get even with
them fags,' Orie told me. They called someone, Orie wasn't sure who it was,
and made arrangements to get in the school through the gym. They stopped
at K-Mart, bought the spray paint and you know the rest."
"But whatever gave them the idea? I
can see why they might deface the posters, but why with the words they did?"
"I'm afraid Eugene and I are mostly
responsible for that," Larry said.
"You've got to include Matt and me,"
Luke added.
"Several days ago--a week or so, so
much has happened since I can't really remember, Eugene was really down because
his dad had landed on him with both feet and he had to sit through another
'faggots will roast in hell' session at church, so I spent as much time as
I could with him. To tell the truth, I was afraid he'd do away with himself
he was so depressed. I walked him to music class and when we got there, I
looked around and was sure no one was around, so I kissed him. Well, Paula
did see us and asked Michael to speak to us, which he did, but Paula believed
she was the only one who observed the kiss. Well, apparently she wasn't."
"Marshall Tucker, one of Orie's hangers-on
saw them and used that to get into the Jake Hilliard club with Orie. Then
there was Matt and Luke," Linda said.
"The day Matt and I came to see you,
we were walking down the hall holding hands, not thinking anything about
it. When we realized we were, we both looked around and saw no-one. That
didn't mean no-one saw us. Michael had taken the wrong book from his locker
and was in the hall getting the right one and saw us. Like Paula, he thought
he was the only one, but apparently Orie saw us."
"Needless to say, I had hoped that
this would not happen, but was afraid it would. I am at a bit of a loss as
to where we go from here. I just don't know. What I do know is that someone
who has a key to the school let those students into the building. There are
very few people who have those keys. I can eliminate three at once, myself,
Mr. Allan and Mr. Vincent. Mr. vincent might have been a suspect had I not
seen his reaction to the defaced posters. He may be uneducated and not too
bright, but he works hard and has a heart of gold. When he saw those posters
he kept saying over and over again, 'Look what they done did to my boy Michael's
stuff.' I don't know what you have done for him, but he worships all of you.
So he's out. Well, that's my problem, not yours. What do you want done about
the whole mess?"
"I think the best thing to do is leave
the situation in the hands of the authorities. I have no proof of what I
told you, but Orie was ready to tell me anything I wanted to know after a
few rubs of my knee against his thigh. He had seen me leave the table angry
at the Select Few, so he was anxious to let me know he was taking care of
them. I even got him to tell me what they did with the paint cans and Mr.
Vincent retrieved them for me. They are carefully wrapped in tissue in my
locker. A little quiet investigation is bound to turn up more evidence. The
paint cans surely will have finger prints and at least the three involved
in the Gregory mess have been fingerprinted. As to the name-calling, I say
ignore it as well until you have witnesses and drop the Millie rule on them,"
Linda said.
"Linda, where have you had your brain
hidden all this year?" Matt asked.
"I told you we would discuss that when
we had time, right now we're dealing with the jocko crap."
"Linda, I think your suggestions are
great, but I wonder about the four guys who are going to be, if not officially,
effectively outted. Of course the rest of you will suffer as well for being
associated with them. You can see that from what has already happened to
Michael. Bill, you really need to think about that because you will be a
special target as a basketball player."
"Ms. Jones, Luke and Matt have been
my brothers since I was born. Now Larry and Eugene have become my adopted
brothers--especially Eugene... doesn't mean I like you less, Larry, but Eugene
and I have a kind of special bond. I am willing to fight for the rights of
anyone to love anyone they please and I am more than willing to take whatever
kind of shi... manure... those jock-jerks or anyone else wants to try to
dish out. I told Larry this morning that's why I agreed to get into this
political mess anyway."
"Don't worry about me, I'm a pretty
tough woman," Paula said. "I have suffered worse than the childish pranks
of some jerks."
"Don't think I need to even ask you,
Miss Mary Kathryn," Ms. Jones said.
"Nope."
"And Linda, you have already proven
your mettle."
"Bill?"
"Well, I admit this wasn't what I had
in mind when I stopped by the Select Few's table at lunch, but I did have
in mind setting an example and especially for those who want to represent
this school on one of the teams. I'm still in. And Ms. Jones, I have no proof
so I won't state it here, but if you want to know who opened the gym, I can
give you a 99.9 percent accurate guess."
"Thanks, Bill. I suspect we would agree
on who, but I don't want you involved in that. Right now I have a call in
to the police. Linda, if you'll get me the paint cans, I'll turn them over
to the police. Meanwhile, Matt, Luke, Larry, Eugene, what about you four?
You're bound to catch a lot of flack."
"It was bound to happen sooner or later.
I wish it hadn't, but it has. Luke and I agreed that whatever came our way
we'd handle together and we will, one way or another."
"Larry and I haven't talked about it
in more than general terms. We were more concerned about my family finding
out and, since I no longer have that family, we'll handle it. In fact, I
feel kinda relieved that we no longer have to hide who we are." Larry nodded
in agreement.
"That's spoken out of your love for
your soulmate, I'm sure, and out of a lot of teenage romanticism. I only
hope you're able to remember it when the going gets tough, and it will,"
Ms. Jones said and gave each of us a warm, motherly hug. "Bill, you just
become a part of a group that knows no end of caring for each other. And
you have earned that spot," Ms. Jones said as she hugged Bill, who towered
over her.
After that, we all piled into the Jeep
and Bill's car and went to Mickey D's for drinks. As we settled in, I said
to Linda, "Ok, crisis over for the moment. Where have you had your brain
hidden, Linda?"
Linda blushed and said, "It's kinda
embarrassing, but at the beginning of school, I saw Matt sitting with all
of you and, of course Sheldon then, and I noticed no-one seemed to have their
claws into Matt so I decided I wanted that bod for my own. While I was scheming
on how to get into the Select Few, Mary Kathryn and I were walking to the
cafeteria together and she invited me to join the bunch for lunch. That was,
I thought, my lucky day. When I saw how Mary Kathryn and Paula were, I decided
I needed to take a different approach. I figured Matt hadn't shown any interest
in Mary Kathryn--Michael wasn't in the picture then--so I did what I do so
well; I became the dumb blond cheerleader of the bunch. By the time I realized
you were fun loving, but pretty serious kids, I didn't see any easy way to
drop the role. When Orie came along, it was the perfect role to get him.
When I gave him the kick in the balls and rejoined the group, there was never
any reason to be different until today. I really did want your bod, Matt
and I'm still jealous of you, Luke. If you were a woman, I'd fight you tooth
and nail for that adorable hunk who's obviously in love with you."
"And all the talk, talk, talk was an
act?" I laughed.
"Well, some things are just naturally
me!" Linda declared.
"If I win this election, you're definitely
in my cabinet," Michael said, "and I'll try to pick a few hunks. You can
take your pick!"
"Hey, I'm available!" Bill said.
"Looks like you just lost a prom date,
Matt," Paula said.
"I wish," Bill said, "but my mom has
arranged a date with my cousin from Lexington".
We laughed and Linda said, "Bill, after
the prom. We definitely have one thing in common--scheming mammas." We talked
and had a great time, forgetting what had happened. Just before we were ready
to leave, Luke asked, "Just for the record, Linda, what's your GPA?"
"You know, that was something I had
to work hard to keep Mary Kathryn from finding out or she would have blown
my cover. I didn't have such a good year last year since I was trying to
be a part of THE in-crowd and making grades wasn't tops on their list so
it is still pulling my GPA down. I have a 3.6."
We took Eugene to Millie's--to his
home--first since it was closest. "I'll walk home after Eugene and I have
some time to talk," Larry said as we pulled into Millie's drive.
Millie was waiting for us. Nothing
would do but that we go inside. When we introduced Bill, Millie, in her usual
tactful manner, asked, "I've seen you play ball, young man. Is that all you
can do or do you have a brain as well?"
"He has a 3.7 and takes honors courses
with me and Mary Kathryn," Michael said, "but I'm not sure he has a brain".
Michael then told Millie what Bill had decided and that he didn't change
his mind after he was told about the two couples.
"Young man, you got balls. Glad to
have you aboard," Millie said and shook hands with Bill again. "Ok, tell
me all we know about this crap at Independence."
We told her all that Linda had found
out--and how--and Millie said, "Matt, you're probably lucky you escaped.
Beauty and brains is a combination no man can handle. Right Michael?"
"Hey, I'm trapped. You need to be warning
Bill who is about to get caught in Linda's web."
"And you'll love every minute of it
won't you? Well, anyway Bill, you have an idea who opened the gym? It was
one of the coaches," Millie said. "They are the only ones who have keys to
the gym doors other than Mr. Vincent, Ms. Jones and Mr Allan. Heads will
roll over this--either through the school system or the police or both. Kids,
and I include you, maybe especially you, Bill, be careful. Three of those
involved have already shown what they are capable of doing and you know how
those who suck up to someone will go along with something they would never
have the guts to do otherwise. Be careful."
Bill took Linda and Paula home. "I
pass both houses on my way home," he said.
When we reached the Larsens', Mary
Kathryn got out. "I planned to get some work done today, but I suspect I
had better tell Mom and Dad what has happened," Luke said. After a kiss,
he said, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, it wasn't supposed to be this way."
"But we'll handle it as it comes, Yonghon
Tongmu," I replied, kissed him again and said, "Later, Luke".
I took Michael home and he said, "Later,
Bro," as he got out.
When I got inside, Mom and Dad were
waiting for me. We talked for a while about what had happened. When Dad asked
what we planned to do I said, "I know what I'd really like to do and that
is get in front of the whole student body and say, "I'm madly, insanely in
love with Luke Larsen and he is in love with me. If you don't like that,
that's your problem because I don't give a rat's ass what you like or don't
like. But I know that's not going to happen. But I am very tired of pretending
I am not who I am and that Luke is someone who is nothing more to me than
a good friend."
"And just how do you think Luke would
react to your doing that?" Mom asked.
"I honestly don't know. I think he
might actually be less afraid of doing it than I am."
"And what about Larry and Eugene? They
have additional problems of their own and if you and Luke out yourselves,
what will they do or think they are expected to do?" Dad asked.
"I don't know. We haven't talked about
it. What I'd really like to do is have a family meeting. Tonight. With Larry
and his mom and Eugene and Millie included."
"That comes as no surprise to me,"
Mom said. "I have already called the clan--and Larry's mom and Millie--and
suggested that if that's what you four guys wanted, we would like to have
them come here after dinner and all sit down and work out what we are all
going to do. Millie and Larry's mom were going to suggest their boys get
together and decide if they'd like to do that. I suggest you and Luke do
the same. When you have decided, let us know and whatever you decide, we'll
support."
I knew what I wanted Luke to say, but
I couldn't make the decision for him and I didn't want to influence him one
way or the other. I loved him too much to even seem as if I was pressuring
him. I drove to the Larsens and walked to the door slowly because I might
not want to hear what Luke had to say.
Gabrielle called as I walked in, "Luke's
in his room. I'm sorry about this mess," she said as I started up the stairs.
When I walked in, Luke was lying on
his bed, staring at the ceiling. "Luke, Mom and Dad were waiting for me and
we had a talk about how you and I--Larry and Eugene as well--are going to
handle the school situation."
"You know what I'd like to do? I'd
like to have a video in which I said, "I'm Luke Larsen. I'm gay. I'm in love--absolutely
teetotally in love with Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf."
I grabbed Luke and gave him the most
passionate kiss I could possibly manage. "Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu Larsen,
I love you beyond all bounds! That's almost exactly what I told Mom and Dad
I wanted to do. I'm tired of pretending I'm someone I'm not and I'm tired
of worrying that someone will discover the most important thing on this earth
to me--that you love me and I love you."
"So what are we actually going to do?"
"The whole family--and Larry and Eugene,
Millie and Ms. Watley have been put on alert. Millie and Ms. Watley are going
to have Eugene and Larry talk about the situation and, if they want to, to
join in a family meeting tonight. That is if you want one."
"Of course I want one. Dad hasn't come
home yet. It's a big step for Dad to have to sit down and face the fact that
his son is not only gay, but is known to be gay. I just don't know what to
expect."
"I guess I'll go back home then so
you can talk with Gabrielle and Jens when he gets home. See you later, Yonghon
Tongmu."
Luke kissed me softly, looked into
my eyes and said, "We'll live through this too, Matt, Babe."
"You better believe it, Light of my
Life."
When I got back home, Mom was on the
phone. When she finished her conversation, she said, "Millie told me Eugene
had gone to Larry's and they were going to talk and then talk to Larry's
mom. She is pretty sure Eugene was ready to broadcast his relationship with
Larry, but he wasn't sure how Larry would feel about it. Seems to me those
two guys have problems enough without this."
"I guess we all do," I responded, "but
it had to happen sooner or later. I'm just worried about how Jens will take
all this."
"You're not the only one," Dad said.
Supper was a pretty silent affair as
I am sure all three of us were engaged in our own thoughts. I know I was.
I remembered what Ms. Jones had said about teenage romanticism and I guess
I was realizing that she was very right. I had dreamed--literally--of announcing
to the world that I was in love with Luke and in my dreams, everyone listening
cheered. But this was no dream and I had seem [seen] how some people viewed
our love--faggot, cocksucker, buttfucker, fudgepacker. Don't tell me sticks
and stones might break my bones, but words would never hurt me. Words cut
deep and hurt a lot more than a broken bone or two. And while I would never
use the terms buttfucker or cocksucker, I guess they were just crude ways
of talking about making love as Michael was crude when he talked about fucking--and
I was, damn it, innocent!
As soon as supper was over, I went
to my room and lay on my bed, staring at the ceiling. I felt as though my
whole world could come crashing down on me any minute. I was so absorbed
in my thoughts that I almost missed feeling Luke's approaching presence.
He climbed through the window just as I realized he was nearby.
Luke came and lay beside me, saying
nothing. As soon as I turned to look at him, he faced me and said, "Matt,
Dad is really upset. He really wasn't ready for me to be out to everyone
and I expected he would give me hell about that, but he didn't. He just said,
'I suppose it had to happen sooner or later. I wish it had been later. Somehow
or other I expected it to happen after you were out of high school and didn't
have to put up with a lot of shit every day. I'm sorry, Son, I'm really sorry
that your last few weeks in high school are going to be hell.' He hugged
me and I saw big tears in his eyes. He looked me squarely in the eyes and
asked, 'Is it really worth it, Luke? Is it really worth the hell you know
you're going to go through?' Matt, I was shocked at his question. I had almost
killed myself--hell, I would have except I screwed up and failed--and he
wanted to know if loving you was worth enduring what some jock assholes would
say--or do. I looked at him like he was nuts. 'Dad, if it was worth dying
for, it's sure as hell worth living for,' I said. He hugged me again and
said, 'Then, by God, love him and to hell with those who don't know love
when they see it'. I almost fainted."
We hugged each other tightly. "God,
Luke, I was so worried, so very worried at what Jens' reaction might be.
I knew Mom, Dad and Gabrielle would take it in stride, but Jens...."
"Yea, I know. Me too. But I never expected
it to be what it was. Never."
"As if I didn't know, what are you
going to do?"
"The same as you, Matt, I'm going on
with my life and I am going to love you. I expect to go about my business
at school the same as I have except if I want to hold hands with you I will
and if I want to kiss you, I will--so long as I don't get caught by a teacher--just
as I would if you were the homecoming queen."
"You better not be caught kissing any
homecoming queen or you'll get the same treatment Michael would get if your
charming sister caught him kissing the homecoming queen!"
We both had a good laugh at the mental
picture that conjured up. I kissed Luke and said, "Well, I guess we may as
well go down and see what transpires at yet another family meeting about
two sons of the family being in love with each other."
"Actually, from what I heard Mom say
on the phone, I think this will involve four sons in love. Millie and Eugene,
Larry and Ms. Watley are coming. Dad said he told Margaret and David they
could skip with their big day coming up, but both said they would be here."
As Luke and I walked down the stairs
I said, "Luke, who do you think will be in charge of this meeting since Millie
will be here?"
"I'm betting on Greywolf."
"Even money?"
"Even money. What's the bet?"
"Winner gets to pick where he sleeps
tonight!"
"Make it Saturday night and it's a
bet! Think I'll be pretty busy tonight."
When we got downstairs everyone was
there. The two couples were sitting on the floor, one sitting between the
other's legs. Luke and I joined them with me sitting between his legs. "Before
we get into what needs to happen, everyone needs to know just what has and
what has not happened," Greywolf said.
Luke leaned over and whispered in my
ear, "In your bed tomorrow night, Loser". Man, I like losing bets like that!
Among us, we told the whole story of
what had gone on, including our meeting with Ms. Jones and Bill's decision.
"He knows about you four?" Greywolf asked.
"He does," Mary Kathryn said.
"I suppose Yong Jin and Greywolf know
things we don't," Millie said, "and there are a few aspects of the situation
I can address. Others I cannot".
Yong Jin said, "I really know more
now than I did before. I guess all I can add is that students seem pretty
equally divided between those who were outraged and those who seemed to think
it was a funny prank. I heard very little talk I would consider homophobic,
but I wouldn't expect to, not only because I am a teacher, but also because
I am Matt's mom."
"Well, the paint cans are in the hands
of the police and I know the sheriff is hot to get the ones who were involved
with Gregory. He saw Gregory after he was raped and was more than a little
upset when they got off so light. On the one hand, it's unfortunate that
all five have had a birthday since their trial in juvenile court, so their
records are sealed and can't be used against them. On the other hand, it's
good because this time they are facing hard time," Millie said.
"According to Linda, three of the five
who raped Gregory were involved in this--Jake Hilliard, Danny Elrod and Buddy
Johnson. Along with them were Orie Greenley and two of his hangers-on, Marshall
Tucker and Mickey Hansen. The six messed up the posters after someone left
the gym door unlocked," Mary Kathryn said. "She said Orie didn't know who,
but Jake called someone to get the door unlocked."
"Well, all the teachers know who has
keys--Ms. Jones, Mr. Allan, Mr. Vincent and the coaches. You can forget about
Ms. Jones, Mr. Vincent and Mr. Allan. It had to be one of the coaches," Greywolf
said. "But which one?"
"That's the big question," Millie said.
"We can't just accuse them all. I suspect one--maybe all--resented Mr. Allan's
stand at the protest and may well be jealous of his new position. Plenty
of motive for wanting to start something, especially if it would make Ms.
Jones and Mr. Allan look bad. That's why I have kept a low profile. I don't
want to even suggest they can't handle this because I know they can and will,"
Millie said, then laughed, "Spoken like a real president of the school board.
But I think we need to play this down as much as possible because I think,
given enough rope, the whole bunch will hang themselves."
"My thoughts exactly," Jens said. "If
it can be handled as a non-issue, I am willing to bet the six can't resist
something else."
"Jens, I think you are forgetting something.
I'm all for catching the rats, but I'm not sure I want these four, or really
all five, young men to be the bait. We're dealing with at least three nut
cases who have already abused and raped a young man. And I wouldn't be surprised
if Orie and his hoods wouldn't go along with whatever the other three decide
to do, especially since they apparently have the support of a teacher," Gabrielle
said.
"Point well taken," David said. "I
was just going to say we need to remember that spray painting posters might
have been a prank had it not been for the words and who did it. Those three
are capable of just about anything."
"Matt and I were talking about being
relieved that we didn't have to hide any more. Man, I guess Ms. Jones was
right about teenage romanticism. I know that I was thinking we'd just walk
in and say, 'We're in love!' and everybody would think it was great. Shit!"
"Just about the same thing Eugene and
I were thinking. Damn, even his dad beat him to a pulp and we thought school
would be all rosy. We're four dumb-shits, aren't we?"
"No, you're just teenagers in love.
That's all. You live in a dream world a lot of the time--it's normal--but
right now, it's also dangerous," Margaret said.
That brought six teenagers back to
earth in record time as evidenced by the sudden quiet in the room and the
fact that all three sitting behind their beloved had put their arms around
them and pulled them close. "I never thought about there being any danger
beyond words," Mary Kathryn said. There were five nods of agreement.
"I want you six to realize just how
much danger there might be--and you really need to talk with Linda because
I believe she thinks she knows what Orie may decide to do if she keeps leading
him on, but it's worse than that. Sheriff Putnam is so worried about what
the six are capable of doing, and might do, that he is putting four people
in the school undercover. He borrowed them from the hate crimes force in
Lexington. Two are "new students" who look the part. It just happens one
plays on one of the police league's basketball teams. The other is obvious
football material and will surely be approached soon by one of the football
coaches. The others are older and are new custodians. They will do their
best to keep an eye on you six," Millie told us.
"What is Mr. Vincent going to think
about that?" I asked. "Won't he think his job is being questioned? I sure
don't want that to happen to him." Again five heads nodded agreement.
"He knows all about it by this time.
Ms. Jones called him in and told him how much she appreciated what he was
doing in regard to this crapola," Millie said. "He will help keep the two
placed where they are most valuable. Now you six listen to me and listen
very carefully. You are to appear as normal as possible, but avoid any place
where you might be trapped. Guys, you're just going to have to hold it until
two or more of you can go. Michael, that's going to be most difficult for
you because you are in classes without any of the others--sorry, I forgot
the new member of the gang, Bill. Anyway, hold it until you see a custodian
around and he--or she if necessary--will make sure the toilets are safe.
Eugene, watch going to music. The band room is almost by itself down that
long hall. How well do you trust Mr. Smith?"
"All the way. To tell the truth, I
suspect he is gay, but I know being gay makes no never mind to him."
"I'll see what we can work out with
him about keeping a lookout. Kids, we're doing everything we can to accomplish
two things: first and foremost, keeping you safe; and second, catching those
jokers who are responsible. I guess that's all I can say right now."
"Guys, how have you decided to handle
the situation?" Greywolf asked.
"I know what we would like to do, but
it wouldn't be wise even in ordinary circumstances--we would all like to
be as open as Mary Kathryn and Michael. But even before Millie pointed out
just what we were up against, I think we pretty much decided we would just
carry on as if nothing had been said. We'll still be careful about showing
our true relationship and if people ask, well, I think we'll just ignore
that too," Luke answered for the four of us and we all nodded.
In the end, I felt good about the support
we had, and especially from Jens. When the family meeting broke up, everyone
went home expect the Gang of Four. I turned out the porch light as the four
of us went outside to say our goodnights. Before our final kiss, Luke whispered
in my ear, "I'll be collecting my bet tomorrow night, so be ready. Now I
guess I better get moving since I've got to get to Lexington as early as
I can so I can get back for the rehearsal." Our last kiss was long and passionate,
but tender and filled with love. Why did people resent that? Why did people
hate us for loving? I just didn't understand how anyone could see anything
wrong or evil with the unquestioned love I had for Luke and he for me.
When I got up the next morning and
looked, the Jeep was no longer at the Larsens'. I dressed and went down for
breakfast. After breakfast, Mom took me in to town and we picked up Eugene
and Paula. The three of us worked at St. Mary's until lunch. Once again we
got more accomplished than I dreamed we would. When Mom came to pick us up,
I asked that she take Paula and Eugene home and come back by for me. I wanted
to just walk around a while by myself. She came back and picked me up and
when we got back home, lunch was ready. Just after we sat down for lunch,
the doorbell rang. "I'll get it," I said as I got up and went to the door.
When I opened the door I couldn't believe my eyes. I just stood there with
my mouth open until I was finally able to ask, "Michael, what on earth has
happened to you?"
Part Twenty-five
Matt
When I opened the door I couldn't believe
my eyes. I just stood there with my mouth open until I was finally able to
ask, "Michael, what on earth has happened to you?" Standing before me was,
obviously, Michael--but something drastic must have happened to him. He looked
a lot older that David. "It is you? You are Michael Andrews aren't you?"
"As a matter of fact I am, young man,
but I think you have an advantage over me. I don't know you. I was directed
here, at least I thought it was to here, by a man at a convenience store
in town. I'm looking for my brother, David Andrews," the older version of
Michael said.
"Please excuse my behavior," I said.
"I am Matt Greywolf. Do come in Mr. Andrews. Mom, Dad, David's brother is
here." I shouted. Mom and Dad came rushing out of the kitchen, both still
clutching their napkins. "Mr. Andrews had been directed to our house rather
than David's and when I opened the door I almost fainted. I thought something
had happened to Michael." I was so excited I was talking a mile a minute.
"Welcome, Mr. Andrews," Dad said. "I
am Greywolf and this is my wife Yong Jin. We are having lunch. Won't you
join us while we fill you in on what's going on with your brother? This is
really going to be a big day for him. David's house is the one just down
the road. But, please, have some lunch and we'll tell you what's going on
today. David will be so high he may never come down."
"Well, I guess it would be a good idea
to know what I might be walking into and I would like something to drink."
While Yong Jin is not quite as adamant as Gabrielle, no-one, even a long-lost
brother, gets by with just something to drink. As soon as he was seated,
Mom started getting lunch for Mr. Andrews.
"I know David will be so excited he
won't know what to do when he sees you. For a number of years he has tried
to locate you, but never found a trace. Matt must have thought he saw a ghost
from the future when he opened the door. David has a son, Michael, who will
be sixteen shortly. I didn't know David named him for you, but he has always
said his son reminded him of you. Aside from the fact that you're a bit over
sixteen, you really do look as if you were Michael--some years from now,"
Dad said. He then told Mr. Andrews about David's wedding tomorrow and the
rehearsal shortly.
As soon has he finished the lunch Yong
Jin had prepared, Mr. Andrews said he should be going to David's place. I
offered to go along with him--I wanted to see the look on David's and Michael's
faces when he walked up.
When we reached David's, Mr. Andrews
knocked on the door. When Michael opened the door, he was even more opened-mouthed
than I had been. He yelled, "Dad, Dad, Michael's here." David ran out of
the kitchen, stopped--thunderstruck--then ran and embraced his brother, tears
flowing.
"I didn't think I could be any happier
than I was,' David said, "but this is the most wonderful surprise." He was
still clinging to his brother. Realizing he was still standing in the door,
he said, "Michael, come in, come in. I can't believe it's you." Then both
brothers started trying to talk at once.
"I'll see all of you later," I said.
Neither brother seemed to notice I had said anything and Michael just looked
at me and grinned.
Michael
Dad asked Uncle Michael if he had lunch
and he said he had. "Yong Jin insisted on feeding me when I came to their
door by mistake. Seems your families are very close."
"Actually there are three families
and we look upon ourselves as one. Just past the Greywolfs' is the Larsens'.
But tell me about yourself. I have tried and tried to find you, but could
never find a trace."
"That's because I have used a different
name and managed to hide for years after what that man did to you. I was
afraid you would find me and he would do something worse the next time. Six
months ago my companion of thirty years died after a long fight against cancer
and, when he did, I realized that my biological parents must be dead also
and that I wanted more than anything to find you. It took me a while to realize
that I was just bumbling around so I contacted a lost persons firm and they
found you last week. I finished up what I needed to do and set out. I didn't
want to call you for fear it wasn't really my brother they had found. Foolish,
I know, but I wanted to see you in person, not talk to you on the phone."
"Since it has been so long, you couldn't
have picked a better time," Dad said. He then told Uncle Michael about Mom's
death and how he had not gotten over it for a long time. "Suddenly one day
I noticed a woman I had known for at least a couple years, actually more,
and kinda fell in love at first sight--I guess you'd call it that." He then
told Uncle Michael how he had held back because of the age difference and
having a son, until the kids in the family kept at it until the two of them
got together.
"You have other children?"
"I said the three families think and
act as one so there are other kids, but Michael is my only biological child."
I sat, fascinated, as the two brothers
covered their personal history of more years than twice my age. "I met James
while we were students at the Chicago Art Institute. After we graduated,
we got jobs in small galleries in Chicago. We worked hard and learned the
art business very, very well. I discovered I was a pretty good businessman,
and James was an expert at design and helping people choose pieces they really
like. Although he was from Chicago, one winter's day we can home and the
furnace had stopped and the house was cold. James said, 'Damn, I hate Chicago
winters and I'm not overly fond of Chicago summers. One day of spring and
one day of autumn is not living, Michael!' I couldn't have agreed more with
his appraisal of Chicago's weather and said so. James' mother had died two
years before and he had their huge old Evanston mansion on his hands--we
had continued to live in his carriage house apartment where we first started
living together. The mansion was leased to a prominant Chicago lawyer. James
asked if he'd like to buy the place, knowing full well he would since he
had asked about it every few months. The deal was made and we took off, looking
for a place we liked. We ended up in Charleston where we opened a very successful
gallery. We had a great life together. His mom more or less adopted me and,
as a sign of my appreciation for her and as a pledge of my love to James,
I took his last name. To those who did not know we were a couple, we were
brothers."
"Two years ago he was diagnosed with
cancer. He went through surgery, chemo and radiation, all to no avail because
it kept recurring. When it came back the last time, he chose not to suffer
treatment. He stayed at home as long as he could under the care of hospice
nurses and workers. Finally, he entered the hospice and died six months ago.
Of course, it was very hard, but the love and care we both found in hospice
made it much easier. When James became ill, we hired a young man to help
out in the gallery and, after James died, I decided I wanted to spend my
remaining years around family if I could locate you and you'd have me around.
Roger is perfectly capable of running the gallery, so I gave him James' share
to run it. I had money of my own and James was the last member of his family
and left me his estate. I have enough to live very well without income from
the gallery, but I know Roger will do well with it. After all, it's his livelihood!
When all of that was squared away, I decided I would look for you. And here
I am!"
Dad was beside himself. He kept saying,
"I really can't believe you're here!"
"Tell me about your life, David. I
have thought about you so often, wondering what had happened to you."
Dad told him the story that I knew
so well, the story of how he came to be where he was today and concluded
with, "Now that you are here and I'm getting married tomorrow, I can't imagine
being happier!"
"How about you, Michael? How's life
treating you? Girlfriends? Boyfriends? School?"
"Well, I'm kinda alone in the family
since I am the only one without a boyfriend if you mean what I think you
mean," I laughed. I told him about Mary Kathryn and all about Luke and Matt.
About Larry and Eugene. About what was going on at school. "Luke was here
earlier. He left this morning about six-thirty for Lexington. He has a major
art exhibition coming up and is doing something in Lexington which is a big
secret. You met Matt. He's also involved in a major project. He's a musician
and is preparing for a recital--actually it's now more of a concert since
the brass and percussion ensemble and the chorus are a part of it."
"Sounds as if I arrived at a good time
to see a little activity," Uncle Michael said. "I'm glad."
Matt
After lunch, I went to my room expecting
to become a zombie until time for the rehearsal. I had just flopped on my
bed when I felt Luke's presence. I looked at the window, expecting him to
climb in any minute. As I gazed out of it, his presence got stronger and
stronger until I turned to see him standing beside my bed, a wonderful Luke
smile on his face.
"Hi, Matt, Babe," he said as he leaned
over and kissed me lightly.
"Hi, Luke, Babe," I said as I wrapped
my arms around him and pulled him on top of me, returning his kiss with passion.
"How'd it go in Lexington?"
"Perfectly. Absolutely perfectly. There
are a few more steps to be completed, but I can pick up... I'll go back and
get the ... anyway, it was perfect. And your work?"
"The same. Oh, I forgot. I had the
most amazing thing happen this morning." I told Luke about opening the door
and seeing a sixty-year-old Michael. "I mean, Luke, he looks exactly like
I think Michael will when we are all old men."
"And when we are an old couple," Luke
said, laughing as he kissed me again.
"Luke, I want you to promise me something.
I'm going to ask you something and will you promise me--absolutely sacred
honor, cross your heart promise--that you'll tell me the truth?"
"This sounds serious, Sarang Hanun
Pomul."
"It is very, very serious, Yonghon
Tongmu. Promise?"
"Promise," Luke said and crossed his
heart.
"Luke, a few days ago, after I had
finished at St. Mary's, I needed to take a walk to clear my head. I walked
around for a while, just sorta not thinking, when I saw something I just
had to have. Today I picked it up. In fact, I picked up two." I then reached
into the drawer of the night stand and took out two small boxes. "Luke, you
asked me to marry you once, remember?"
"Sure I remember. Of course I remember.
In case you forgot, Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf, will you marry me?"
"Yes. Till death us do part." Our kiss
was full of love and hope and promise, no lust this time. I opened a box
and took out a silver Hopi overlay ring. The overlay was a thunderbird design.
"Yonghon Tongmu, will you wear this as a sign of our promise?"
"Forever, Sarang Hanun Pomul, forever.
But why all the 'tell the truth' questions? Did you doubt for a moment that
I would wear it?"
"No, that's not the question. The question
involves this." I opened the other box which held a second ring. "I was going
to get two alike, but then I saw this one. Yours has a thunderbird--a symbol
of power--this one had corn, the symbol of life for the Hopi. That's what
you mean to me. My question is--and Luke, for God's sake, be honest--should
I wear it since the school is in an uproar already? If you think I shouldn't,
I won't. I don't know. I really don't know."
Luke took the ring from the box looked
at it, kissed it and slipped it on my finger. He looked into my eyes as he
said, "Till death do us part," as he kissed my eyes, then my lips. "Till
death do us part."
It was time for us to go to the falls
for the rehearsal which went well... I mean, what can go wrong at a wedding
rehearsal? Well, a lot of things can when there is a mother of the bride
present. Do I ever know that from the weddings I have played for at St. Mary's!
But when you are dealing with just the couple, as Fr. Tom said, "We'll walk
through all of this, but you'll not be in any shape to remember it tomorrow,
I'm sure. Even people who have been around a long time forget what to do
on their wedding day, so we'll walk through it and tomorrow I, and everyone
else, will keep you two on track. Everything will be perfect or that's what
we will all remember." As soon as we had walked though the ceremony, it was
time for the rehearsal dinner--a family picnic. Greywolf and Jens were not
slouches at fixing a picnic and soon we were all stuffed. For a half hour
we just kinda relaxed on the beach and then Michael said, "Ok, swim time."
We had all brought swim suits and Greywolf had even thought to provide one
for Fr. Tom. I wondered if he was game enough to turn his back, strip and
put it on. He was the first one in the water. Soon the whole bunch were swimming,
diving and having a great time. Uncle Michael had joined the rehearsal party
and was having just as much fun as the rest of us.
Mary Kathryn was the first to notice
Luke and I were wearing new rings and commented on them. "They are our engagement
rings," Luke said when she took his hand and looked closely at his.
Michael joined her and soon everyone
was admiring the rings. Then Jens raised the question I had raised with Luke.
"Matt, Luke, I don't want you to take this wrong, but given the situation
at school and your decision to keep things as they have been--in as much
as that is possible--do you think wearing them at school is a wise idea?"
"Jens, I worried about that myself
and asked Luke if he thought I should wear mine. He can wear his and no questions
would be asked--well, not questions we don't want raised, but he wanted me
to wear mine. I guess we'll just have to handle whatever flack that may cause."
They are beautiful rings," Uncle Michael
said. "I am very partial to Hopi silver work and those are especially good.
Since you two know what they mean, would you be offended or upset if the
other members of the family--the kids I mean--had Hopi rings? Then they could
just be passed off as friendship rings and no-one would be the wiser."
"If I had one to give to Mary Kathryn,
it would be a great deal more than a friendship ring and the whole school
would know that," Michael said. "Unlike Matt and Luke, the whole damn school
knows where I stand with Mary Kathryn." Michael then told Uncle Michael about
Mary Kathryn kissing him in front of the whole student body.
"Well, it SEEMED like a good idea and
I was willing to spring for one for you and Mary Kathryn. I had forgotten
that the two of you were also an item. You all are really keeping it all
in the family, aren't you?"
"Luke, Matt, I know how special the
rings are to you and I don't want to take anything away from that, but I
also see the danger involved in your wearing them. I also suspect, if I remember
young love and I think I do, you put them on with some kind of promise, implied
at least, that they would never be off," Fr. Tom said. Luke and I nodded.
"I remember well the first time I took off the ring my wife had placed on
my finger. But it was special because she put it there, not because others
didn't have rings--some exactly like mine. Larry and Eugene could wear rings--Millie
would see to that or Eugene probably has an allowance large enough to take
care of both, but that would only add fuel to the fire."
"The Select Few--that's the answer
if you guys are willing--the Select Few. That way no-one other than the Select
Few would have to know that the rings were more than friendship rings," Mary
Kathryn said.
"How would you feel about that?" Yong
Jin asked. "I want you and Luke to be sure before you answer," she said.
I took Luke's hand and we walked way
from the crowd and I looked deeply into his eyes and said, "Luke, what do
you think?"
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, thousands of people
wear rings. Only one person gave this ring and only one person wears it.
What others have or wear makes no never mind. This is the ring that says
you have pledged yourself to me and yours says I have pledged [myself] yourself
to you. Nothing will ever change that."
"Yonghon Tongmu, you are so right,
nothing will change that!" I said as I pulled Luke's lips to mine for a passionate
kiss. We had an audience? I didn't care. Besides some might even learn something
about kissing! "So we are agreed that the Select Few show up Monday with
rings?"
"Agreed, if we can round up the rings.
What about sizes? And the store will be closed by the time we could get there
even if we knew the sizes."
"You're right. So let's tell the family
what we have decided and the problem as we see it."
When Luke and I returned to the group,
we explained why we thought it would be ok if all the Select Few had rings.
"And it will allow us to wear ours without raising new questions, but there
are a couple problems," Luke said.
After he had explained about the need
to get sizes and the shop being closed soon, once again, those who loved
us and cared for us all came through. "Elizabeth Allison is senior sponsor
this year and I know she had all kinds of measurements on her computer,"
Yong Jin said, "including ring sizes from last year when senior rings were
ordered. That leaves only three--Linda, Mary Kathryn and Michael--as unknowns.
Two of those will prove to be no problem since they are right here."
"There is another member, Bill Lance,
but he's a rising senior and his size should be available," Michael said.
"You think Linda doesn't know her ring
size?" Mary Kathryn asked. "That girl knows everything about herself. She
may not be just a cheerleader type, but she knows how to put on the act well.
She'll know."
"Ok, I'll call Elizabeth and get the
sizes she has. Mary Kathryn, call Linda and get hers," Yong Jin said.
"We still have two problems. Uncle
Michael--you are Uncle Michael to all of us aren't you?" Luke asked and Uncle
Michael nodded. "Uncle Michael says he will spring for Mary Kathryn's and
Michael's. Matt, call Eugene and see if he can afford two rings. That still
leaves Linda, Paula and Bill. And the shop will be closing in a few minutes."
"I think I can handle that," Fr. Tom
said. "Mr. Swartz is an old and dear friend. I'm sure he would be more than
happy to open the shop if I asked. Besides, he enjoys kids who have fine
taste. When could you all get to his place to choose rings?"
Mary Kathryn got on my cell phone and
called Linda and Fr. Tom got on his and called the shop. Sure enough, Linda
knew her ring size and when Mary Kathryn told us that, Fr. Tom reminded us
that we really didn't need to know ring sizes since we could meet Mr. Swartz
at his shop at 8:00.
I called Eugene and he didn't have
the money. He and Millie hadn't talked about an allowance so he said, "Well,
I guess now is when I find out just how spoiled I am. Call you back."
"When I told Linda what was up, she
asked if Millie was buying a ring for Eugene and when I told her of course,
she said, then Mom would probably buy me two if it's something Mrs. Willingham,
THE Mrs. Willingham, is involved in. That leaves only Bill Lance and Paula,"
Mary Kathryn said.
"I think we four should pay for Bill's
since he has made enough sacrifice for our cause," Michael said.
"Agreed," Luke and I said at the same
time. "But you know Paula has no money," I added.
"I think St. Mary's owes that girl
a lot for her performance at the service for Gregory and for what she is
doing for the concert. After all, with her and the chorus, many people will
see the inside of St. Mary's who would not otherwise. My discretionary fund
will take care of hers," Fr. Tom offered.
We called all the Select Few and made
arrangements for all of us to be at the shop at 8:00. By the time all that
was done, it was almost 5:30 so we gathered things together and started walking
home. "I see the gate is in," Jens commented as we walked away from the river.
"Yes. I think your idea of having people
park at your place and the Greywolfs', and using the two vans to shuttle
them to the river is a good one and the gate will make that easy," David
said. "If we had a driver for mine it would be even better." He and Margaret,
Dad and Mom, Jens and Gabrielle and the Gang of Four were walking arm in
arm across the pasture. Fr. Tom and Uncle Michael were bringing up the rear,
carrying on an animated conversation, when Dad took Mom's hands, stepped
in front of her and, walking backwards, started singing, "More than the greatest
love..." Almost immediately five lovers were holding hands, facing their
beloved as they walked backwards and joined in... "the world has known...."
At 8:00pm all of the Select Few were
at Mr. Swartz' shop. He brought out several trays of Hopi rings. "You're
in luck," he said. "I have the largest collection of Hopi overlay rings in
the southeast. I sell very few, but I love them so much I just keep buying
them when I see one which strikes my fancy--and most do! I know I may never
sell many, but they are so lovely I can't resist."
The whole crew kept finding a ring
that was more to their liking than one they had chosen earlier. Of course,
there were times when the ring someone liked wouldn't fit, but finally everyone
had a ring they loved. "Ok," Luke said, "you all know about everyone else.
Matt gave me mine and got his for me as signs of our promise to marry each
other--of course that's not exactly right since we cannot actually be married,
but as a promise that we will have a commitment ceremony when we are ready.
You all have a right to know that."
Immediately Larry fell on his knees
and said, "Eugene, will you marry me?"
In answer, Eugene pulled Larry to his
feet, kissed him passionately and said, "Yes."
Michael looked at Mary Kathryn and
said, "I'm not sure I want to go that far right now but, Mary Kathryn, I
pledge my love to you".
"And I mine to you," Mary Kathryn replied.
I suddenly remembered Mr. Swartz was
present and turned to look at him. He was misty eyed. "Young love is so wonderful,
children, and only becomes more wonderful as it becomes old love. Bless you
all! But if I may ask, just exactly why the interest in Hopi rings and why
are some... well, what? Engagement rings while others are..."
I explained how I had been walking
by his shop a few days ago and saw the ring that I wanted as a symbol of
my promise to Luke and had then had purchased the two, one for each of us.
There have been problems at school involving some gay bashing and, since
the two of us wearing our rings might stir up more trouble, the Gang of Four--That's
us," I said indicating Luke, Michael, Mary Kathryn and myself--"are like
brothers and sisters. We decided we would all get rings, but the whole school
knows Michael and Mary Kathryn are an item, so that wasn't too good a cover,
so we decided we would get rings for our close school group--we call ourselves
the Select Few--as a sign of our friendship. What else they symbolize is
up to individuals."
"Beautiful, beautiful," Mr. Swartz
said. "I am happy to be a part of your getting the rings. By the way, Matt,
is it?" I nodded. "I take it you are wearing a medallion.'
I felt myself blush as I replied, "Indeed
I am, Sir," and pulled it from my shirt. "It's, of course, special because
I received it from Luke, but it's also special because of your beautiful
work."
"Thank you, I enjoyed doing it."
We left the store and were all standing
together when Paula said, "The rings were a tremendous idea, especially since
we are really going to have to stick together the next few weeks. I'm afraid
we haven't heard the last from the jerks at school."
"Linda, what about you? You are pretending
to not be a part of the group now. Won't there be questions about that?"
Bill asked.
"I hadn't thought about that," Matt
said. "I had forgotten Linda was undercover these days."
"Not for long. I think I have found
out about all I can from Orie so I suspect I'll be joining you again for
lunch Monday or Tuesday at the latest. I'll let Bill keep my ring until then.
Orie can't keep his hands off me and the next time he touches me in the wrong
place after I'm sure I have learned all I can, bam, and I'm out of there."
"Bill, are you sure you want to get
involved with that woman?" Michael laughed.
"I guess I'll have to learn how to
deal with her," he replied. "I haven't had much experience with women who
want anything other than to get in my pants."
"Well, Mr. Bill, you better learn because
you try to get in mine--at least before you're invited--and you'll be on
the sidelines next year," Linda said.
"You better remember that, Bill," I
said. "Otherwise you'll suffer and we'll suffer because we'll have to listen
to a second-by-second, blow-by-blow account of the whole thing!" Obviously
we were all in a good mood as we broke to go home. Luke and I took Paula
home; Uncle Michael took Mary Kathryn and Michael, and Bill took Linda. They
seemed to be off to a good start. Larry and Eugene decided to walk to Eugene's.
"Sure you don't want us to drop you off Larry?"
"I'm kinda not going home tonight,"
he replied with his goofy grin.
When we got to my place, Luke said,
"Loser, I'm collecting on my bet tonight."
"I wouldn't mind losing every day if
it gets you in my bed," I laughed as I kissed him. As Luke started to get
out of the Jeep, he reached into the back seat and picked up a package. "A
surprise for me?" I asked, as I kissed him again. Luke gave me the smile
he knew turned me to water. "You're dimpling me again."
"Yea," he smiled. "I'm making sure
you can't resist me."
"And just how often have I been able
to resist you?" Luke merely gave me that smile again.
When we got inside, Mom and Dad asked
us about trip to the shop and how our work earlier had gone. We talked with
them a while, then we said goodnight and went upstairs. When we got to my
room, Luke placed the package he had taken from the Jeep on the night stand
and looked at me briefly before pulling me into his arms. As he did, he covered
my mouth with his and his tongue slid into my mouth. My whole being was flooded
with the taste of Luke. My arms wrapped around him, pulling him close. Luke's
arms were around my neck and his fingers loosened my hair. Our kiss became
more and more passionate; our tongues entered into that battle we both loved
and in which we were both winners. Luke broke our kiss, looked into my eyes
and smiled. We were standing by my bed so Luke could easily reach behind
himself and picked up the package he had brought up. He handed it to me.
As I opened the package, Luke stood smiling, his arms again around my neck.
When the box was open, I saw massage oil, shampoo and soap, the same as Margaret
had given us. "Tonight you're mine," Luke said and kissed me again.
Soon the bed was uncovered. Remembering
the mess we had made before, I went across the hall and brought back a huge
beach towel. When I returned, Luke had undressed and stood; his hard, defined
body was so beautiful I stood, wondering at his beauty. As I stood gazing
on my beloved, he walked to me, took the towel from my hands and spread it
on the bed. Turning, he began undressing me. As he slipped off my shirt,
he bent and kissed my nipples and then started licking them, driving me crazy.
With an arm around my neck, he unbuttoned my pants, unzipped them and let
them fall to the floor. As I stepped out of them, Luke swept me into his
arms and, as he carried me toward the bed, he lifted my head and bent to
kiss me again.
When he had laid me on the bed, he
knelt between my legs, bent forward and kissed my manhood which was straining
against my briefs. "Luke, Yonghon Tongmu, you are getting close to the line."
He looked up, smiled, slid my briefs down and off. My manhood was standing
proudly. Once again, Luke bent down and kissed my manhood. An electric change
went through my whole body, a feeling unlike any I had ever experienced before.
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, as difficult as
it is to stop, I will; but that's a promise for the future." Luke lay on
top of me, kissing my eyes, nose, neck. As he rolled off of me, he reached
for the oil and said, "On your stomach, Lover!" I turned over, resting my
head on my folded arms. Luke poured a small stream of oil down my back and
spread it over my back, necks, and legs. Then he started massaging me, kneading
the muscles of my shoulders and neck.
"Luke, Babe, that feels so gooood.
I spent so much time at the organ today and I guess I was more tense than
I realized. It feels soooo good!" Luke continued to knead the muscles of
my neck and shoulders, then spread his hands and rubbed up and down my back.
After he had massaged my back, he took the bottle again and poured a small
stream over my butt. After kneading my butt cheeks, he moved his fingers
into my crack and lightly brushed my rosebud. Until he did that, I had be
enjoying the massage and the feel of his strong hands on my body. However,
when his fingers touched me in that special place I, once again, felt an
electric shock run through my body. I was hard as nails and wanted Luke so
bad I was groaning. After another feather-light touch on my rosebud, Luke
slid his hands down and started massaging my legs. He took one foot and then
the other into his hands, massaging each toe, and when he finished a foot
he kissed it on the bottom. "Babe," I groaned, "you're tickling me!" I turned
my head, so I could see Luke's face, and saw his evil grin as he kissed my
foot again.
When he had finished with my back,
I turned over and Luke started working on my front. When he had stopped running
his fingers down my crack, the heat was turned down a bit--although I was
still so hard my manhood was pulsating with each heartbeat. As Luke massaged
my chest, he rubbed my nipples with his open hand, then pinched first one,
then the other. He continued his massaging, stopping occasionally to kiss
a nipple or run his teeth over it. When he started on my stomach, he bent
forward and stuck his tongue in my belly button. It tickled like crazy, but
also made me hot. Luke skipped my private parts to move down and massage
the front of my legs. Again he took each foot, massaged it well and kissed
the bottom.
When he finished, he again looked at
me with his special Luke evil smile, which made his dimple appear and sent
me skyward. Reaching for the oil again, he held it high above my erect manhood
and poured a generous stream of oil on it. "Yonghon Tongmu, you are torturing
me," I groaned as Luke replaced the bottle of oil on the night stand. Carefully
not touching my erect manhood, Luke rubbed the oil on the inside of my thighs
and on my balls then, lifting my ball sack, he again ran his fingers along
my crack, touching my rosebud. "Babe, I am so hot I'm aching!"
Luke leaned forward, pressed him lips
against mine, his tongue snaking into my mouth. Holding the kiss, his hand
moved down my chest until it reached its goal and his fingers encircled my
aching tool. He pushed the foreskin back, removed his lips from mine and
moved down my body until his face was at my hips. He moved his hand slowly
up and down my steel rod, all the time looking at it intently. "Sarang Hanun
Pomul, do you know you have a beautiful cock?" he asked. "It's so dark, darker
than the rest of my dark beauty. I love the foreskin and how it slides back
to reveal such a beautiful, delightful pink arrow. You are well armed, my
Lakota warrior!"
Luke continued to slowly, oh so slowly,
move his hand up and down my Lakota arrow while I groaned, wanting more,
so much more--not just to receive more, but also to give to Luke, to surrender
totally to him. As Luke continued to move his hand up and down my shaft,
charge after charge of electricity shot through me. I was so aroused I thought
I could hold out no longer. "Yonghon Tongmu, I am going to explode into a
thousand pieces. I can't stand this any longer!" I said through clinched
teeth. Luke looked up into my eyes, smiled, and started moving his hand faster.
I was panting for breath--on the verge of passing out, my feelings were so
intense. "Luke, Yonghon Tongmu, I love you," I shouted as my climax hit me
more powerfully than I had experienced before. Shot after shot, load after
load of man's seed exploded out of my body, striking Luke in the face, shooting
onto my neck and chest. Wave after wave of electricity shot through my body
until, momentarily, I passed out from sheer pleasure as a thousand bursts
of light made the inside of my head like a Fourth of July celebration.
When I caught my breath and the lights
stopped flashing in my head, I looked down to see Luke's golden head lying
on my stomach, his depthless blue eyes looking into mine, a sweet smile on
his face. "I told you tonight you were mine," he whispered. He raised a hand
to his lips and licked my man's seed from it. "I now know how you taste,
Sarang Hanun Pomul. I longed to know and now I know. You taste wonderful,
my Dark Angel." Luke then drew himself up beside me and placed his mouth
against mine and this time his tongue had not only the taste of Luke but
also of me--mingled together.
After our kiss, I lay back on the bed,
exhausted. Luke lay beside me, his head on my chest. "Luke, Babe, I would
never have believed you could have given me that much pleasure without, you
know...."
"Having sex? Somehow or other, Babe,
I think love making has gotten short-changed if it only means sex by penetration--Man,
that sounds so damn clinical: sex by penetration. Shit, Man, we just made
love big time."
"I know something--rather someone--else
that has been short changed."
"Me? You think I have been short-changed?"
I nodded. "That's what you think. Giving you pleasure made me the happiest
guy in the world," my Luke said. "Never, ever think that love making is 'I
do you, now you do me,' Matt. That's not the way it is."
"I'm not sure Little Luke agrees with
you," I laughed as it was obvious that Little Luke was as hot and hard as
Chili Pepper was soft and calm. Luke laughed. "Babe, tonight you were mine,
tonight was your night. But I wouldn't mind at all joining you in the shower--for
a shower and a bit of play time."
"You've got it, Lover," I said as I
sprang out of bed, scooped Luke into my arms and headed for the shower. Luke
snagged the soap and shampoo he had brought as we passed the night stand.
Of course, I made love to Luke in the shower! His climax was not as intense
as mine, I'm sure, but when Little Luke exploded, Luke collapsed against
me and I held him close. And, yes, I did taste Luke and it was no less wonderful
than the taste of Luke I have known when his tongue invaded my mouth.
After we had washed and dried each
other, Luke carried me back to my room, stripped the oily towel from the
bed and gently laid me down. Our bodies entwined, we gave each other a goodnight
kiss and, gazing into our lover's eyes, drifted off to sleep. And while our
guardian angels watched over us, we slept; happy, content and loved--in each
other's arms.
Part Twenty-six
Matt
Easter morning dawned a beautiful spring
day: the sun was shining, fluffy white clouds dotted the sky here and there.
The sunlight coming through the window woke me. I turned and looked into
the face of my beloved Luke. With his mop of golden hair and his beautiful
face, he might have been the angel who, having announced the resurrection,
had completed his task and came to my bed for a nap. I was overwhelmed by
the love I felt for this man and as I leaned over to kiss him good morning,
Greywolf shouted, "Alleluia! Christ is risen!" loudly enough to wake anyone
sleeping and maybe a few of the dead as well. "He is risen indeed! Alleluia!"
Luke and I responded in one breath. "How did you know what you say?" I asked,
looking at his smiling face.
"Same thing going on down the road
at the Larsen place," he answered as he kissed me gently. "Sarang Hanun Pomul,
this really is Easter for me. I have been in 'death's dark bonds' and now
I am free to live and love. Today is very, very special for me."
"For me as well, Yonghon Tongmu. While
you lay in death's dark bonds, a part of me died and when you came back to
the land of the living, you brought me life as well."
"Damn, we're a strange pair," Luke
laughed. "A couple of horny nearly-eighteen-year-olds, lying in bed together,
naked as the day we were born, having made some pretty passionate love last
night and we're being theological. Think anyone would really believe that?"
"Of course not. What do you think people
think we are, freaks?"
Luke looked at me, his face aglow,
his eyes sparkling, a huge smile on his face and said, "Don't care what they
think. I know what you are. You are my beloved treasure," and covered my
mouth with his for a deep, passionate kiss.
Luke and I showered, quickly. There
was not time for a lengthy interlude in the shower, but we did make the best
of the time we had. Then we tossed on T-shirts and shorts and joined Mom
and Dad for breakfast.
When we had finished breakfast, Luke
and I went back to my room and dressed for church. Luke had really started
looking sharp. He was paying a lot more attention to what he wore than he
had. "Luke, why have you suddenly become a fashion plate?"
Luke, again, gave me that special smile
and said, "Could be I have a reason to dress to impress someone I'm in love
with."
"Couldn't be me, I like you better
the way you were when I woke up and saw you beside me!" and I pulled Luke
to me for a kiss.
"You might, but I'm not sure St. Mary's
blue-haired ladies would approve."
"They might not approve, but I bet
they'd enjoy it!"
Ordinarily I wear to St. Mary's what
I would wear to school, or maybe not even pay as much attention as I do to
school clothes. After all, very few people see my clothes since I wear an
organist's cassock and surplice. I even change shoes to play. Today, however,
I dressed for Luke. He had picked a dark, rich blue silk shirt and a pair
of deeper blue slacks. He was indeed a golden god clothed in the blue of
royalty. I picked a pale yellow silk shirt and deep, deep green slacks. Seldom
do I wear my hair loose. In fact, if I can keep Luke away from it, you can
well know I got up too late to take care of it when I leave the house with
it loose. Today, however, when I started to braid it, Luke took the brush
from my hand and brushed my hair. I guess it was the magic of his touch,
but my hair had a shine I hadn't noticed. "Leave it down for me," he pleaded.
How could I resist?
When we arrived at St. Mary's, I was
surprised to see Bill there. "Bill, what a surprise," I said, slapping him
on the back.
"Yea, well, this Linda creature I seem
to have taken up with made it very plain she'd be here this morning and she
would like to have me show up. I just hope this lapsed Baptist doesn't make
a fool of himself."
"Sit with the Gang of Four and rise
and fall with them," I laughed.
While we were talking, Larry, Eugene
and Millie walked up. "Matt, ready to raise the dead?" Millie laughed.
"You better believe it." We were standing
in the hall of the parish house and I looked around and saw only people who
knew all, so I kissed Luke and went to get vested.
The lights were off in the church and,
even with the spring sun streaming through the stained glass windows, the
church was darkened. The church bell, which had been silent since Good Friday,
rang out and Fr. Tom appeared at the back of the church holding aloft the
Paschal candle. "Alleluia! Christ is risen!" his voice boomed through the
church. The people responded, "He is risen indeed! Alleluia!" In the middle
of the nave, and at the chancel steps, the cry was repeated. The third time
the proclamation was made was my signal to start. With a fanfare from the
state trumpets, the lights came on and the processional started. Once again
the choir and I had won the Easter debate. Fr. Tom always wanted to start
with "The strife is o'er", but while it is a great hymn and will surely be
a part of the Easter Mass, it just doesn't have the "wake up the dead" quality
of "Jesus Christ is risen today!" with the organ going all out and Millie's
trumpet announcing the resurrection.
As the joyous service continued, my
mind kept returning to the fact that, for the first time, I knew what resurrection
really meant. It wasn't about a dead man walking around, it was about being
dead and being brought back to life. It was about my Yonghon Tongmu, floating
face down in a river, drowning his despair and hopelessness and now sitting
where I could see him, alive, really alive and loving me. And it was about
me, hopeless, seeing nothing in life but emptiness, now alive and knowing
the fullness of being loved and of loving. It was about Millie who, in spite
of her money and her loving son, had a dead place inside where grandchildren
should be, who now sat, proudly, beside a son who filled that emptiness.
And it was about that son who had been resurrected from the death of a father's
hatred by her love. It was about David who had died when Elizabeth died,
who now lived. My thoughts ran on and on. I didn't hear a word of the sermon;
I didn't need to. I didn't need to hear talk about resurrection because I
was surrounded by resurrected ones.
After Mass, we all met in the parish
house for coffee and goodies. I was the last one to arrive since I had to
unvest. As I pulled the surplice over my head, Luke's arms surrounded me.
"Unfair, I can't see; I can't move."
Luke lifted the surplice over my head,
put his arms around me and covered my mouth with his for a hard, passionate,
tongue-in-the-mouth kiss. "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I didn't hear a word of the
sermon. I just kept looking at the people around me and realized what this
resurrection thing is all about."
"You too? I almost forgot to start
the anthem I was so involved with thinking the same thing. Millie, David,
Margaret, Michael, Eugene, Larry ... and most of all you and me, Yonghon
Tongmu." Hand in hand we walked into the parish hall where not only the Gang
of Four, but all the Select Few except Paula were waiting for us. Millie
came over to us and said, "Matt, good job as always. Even old Mr. Snider
(who was at least 5 years Millie's junior) stayed awake without his wife
punching him in the ribs. But you know, I didn't hear a word of the sermon..."
"You, too?" Luke asked. "You were thinking
about the resurrections all around you? The living breathing resurrections?"
"Yes, but how did you know?"
"Matt and I had just said the same
thing minutes ago."
Fr. Tom came over to where we were
all standing and asked, "Well, how was my Easter sermon?"
We all cracked up. Millie, after her
great Millie laugh, said, "We were just discussing that, Tom. Not a one of
us, it seems, heard a word of what you said. We were too involved thinking
about the resurrections all around us."
"I suppose I should pout, but to tell
the truth, I forgot what I was saying at one point because, as I looked over
the congregation, I was saying to myself, 'That's what it's about. That's
a resurrected person,' and I was thunderstruck how I really, really saw that
for the first time. And, by the way, those are stunning rings you kids are
wearing. Glad you were able to solve that problem in such a delightful and
beautiful way."
"Oh, Father..."
"Lord deliver me," Fr. Tom said, "that's
Agnes Scott. If I weren't talking to a group of teens and the major patron
of St. Mary's, I'd say, 'Hide me fast. That woman wants to get in my pants.
Why do women take off after a collar, I'd like to know, especially hopeless
cases?' But since I am here in front of you innocents, I'll just say, 'Excuse
me.'"
"Matt, Bill and I are supposed to go
home with you," Linda said. "We're invited for Easter dinner."
"Great, let's jet." When we reached
the house, there was a strange car in the driveway. When we got inside, Paula
was there with her mother and Larry's mom. "Sounds strange to me too," Paula
said, "but happy Easter."
"Happy Passover to you, Paula, Ms.
Wright," I responded.
Although her wedding was only a few
hours away, Margaret was right in there with Yong Jin and Mom preparing dinner.
Greywolf had set up tables on the back deck and patio and the food was on
a long table just outside the kitchen door. Everyone gathered around and,
after grace, Greywolf said, "Let us feast!" and we did! People kept moving
from table to table, talking, laughing, enjoying being together. You would
have thought Bill had been a part of the family all his life. He really fit
right in.
When dinner was over, Greywolf said
to Bill, "Bill, I assume you drive."
"Yes, I do," he replied.
"Can we press you into duty? The wedding
guests are going to park at the Larsens' or here and be shuttled to the falls.
Luke and Matt are involved in the wedding and Jens, Mr. Larsen, and I are
driving our vans and if you would drive David's, Mr. Andrews', then they
could also park at his place. It would be a great help."
"I would be delighted. I didn't know
whether I was staying for the wedding or not."
"Linda," Greywolf called across the
patio, "what kind of woman are you, allowing a man to escape a wedding?"
Linda blushed big time. I think it was the first time I had ever seen her
blush.
After dinner, the Select Few piled
into my room and just did what a pile of teenagers do. When the couples started
to make out just a bit, Michael said, "Ok, cool it. I know what we'd all
like to do--even Bill seems to be making rapid progress with our empty-headed
cheerleader type, but remember Paula's here. No rubbing it in!"
"One of these days," Paula said. "But
thanks."
The first guests showed up at 4:00
and the three shuttles started running. Matt started the music at 4:30. The
decision had been made to allow people to sit on blankets on the beach and
the only chairs were provided for the few who needed them. I expected Millie
to take one, but I had underestimated her again. At 4:50 I recalled a line
from "My Fair Lady"--"Everyone was there who should be there". Dr. and Mrs.
Walker, Gladys and Chelsea, and heaven only knows how many more of the hospital
staff--from doctors to janitors, all the EMS staff--the EMS van was sitting
just outside the falls and the staff on duty had their radios in case of
an emergency. Gertie was sitting near Millie, the list could go on and on.
For what was to be a small wedding, there must have been almost two hundred
people there when Matt paused the music and Fr. Tom, Michael, and David took
their places.
Matt started the Purcell "Trumpet Tune"
and, while I couldn't see them from where I was standing, I realized he had
been joined by Eugene and his trumpet. I took Margaret's arm and we walked
toward the falls. I had always heard that all brides were beautiful and,
while I can't speak for all of them, Margaret was stunning. Given the outdoor
setting, she was very practical and wore flat shoes, but still came to my
shoulders. She was dressed in a white dress and had a small veil which covered
her face.
When we reached the men, I realized
Margaret was shaking all over. I remembered Fr. Tom saying she and David
wouldn't remember what to do on their wedding day. I smiled to myself and
glanced at David and realized he was as nervous as she. Here were two people
who remained cool every day in the face of countless emergencies but who,
doing what they wanted more than anything in the world, were as nervous as
two kids. Well, the wedding was perfect, of course, even though David couldn't
get Margaret's ring on and Margaret dropped his and Michael had to find it
in the sand of the beach.
As soon as the wedding was over, the
males of the family quickly set up tables for the reception and the festivities
were on. It was 6:30 before the new couple left. When Margaret tossed her
bouquet, she aimed it directly at Matt. He had a choice, catch it or drop
it. The whole crowd burst into laughter--some knew that it was no accident.
After the guests had gone, the Gang
of Four--or I guess it's the Gang of Six now, because Larry and Eugene are
definitely a part of the family--started cleaning up the falls area. Uncle
Michael joined us as we gathered up the blankets--except a couple--folded
the tables, picked up trash and Matt's keyboard and put them in the three
vans. When we had finished, we all collapsed on the blankets, relaxing in
this place which was, now even more, a special place.
Michael, Larry and I sat with our beloved
between our legs, leaning against us. It was around 7:30, and twilight, when
Michael reminded us that David and Margaret had reserved the falls for the
night. "They were going out to dinner in Lexington and said they would be
back by 9:30 and the falls better be clear!"
"Know what they mean," Luke said, "the
night after Matt and I have our commitment ceremony, the falls are ours!"
"You're having a commitment ceremony?"
Uncle Michael asked.
"Yes. We haven't decided when. We think
we'll know when the time is right. But, yes, we have pledged to each other
that we will."
Uncle Michael's Story
"That's one of the big differences
between today and thirty years ago. That would never have happened then.
But some things remain the same, huh, Eugene? You all know what happened
when my family found out about me. And if that wasn't enough, my beloved
brother was hospitalized when I saw him once. I knew then I had to disappear
from his life and it cut deeper than what my father did to me."
"Some families responded as mine when
they discovered, or a son told them he was homosexual--gay was a word which
came into use much later. Maybe most responded as mine. I don't know. There
were some who just ignored reality and pretended a son was 'normal' or who
at least never talked about it. In the fifties, homosexuality was still classified
as a mental illness; it even had a psychological disorder diagnostic code.
Those who were committed to mental institutions were almost always 'treated'
with electro-convulsive therapy--that's electric shock. Not infrequently,
electrodes were attached to the genitals."
Five males cringed. Uncle Michael laughed,
"Yea, that was my reaction when I learned it was being done. I guess having
the daylights beaten out of me was the easy treatment. Others hid by marrying,
many then led a double life. Often after children, the marriage finally came
apart with a lot of bitterness on the part of the wife and children. Life
was not easy. I guess I was fortunate in that after having the crap beaten
out of me, I escaped much of what other gay men suffered."
"I wandered around for a while, picking
up odd jobs to stay alive until I ended up in Chicago. I worked on the docks
there for a while and, one day, noticed the Chicago Art Institute was advertising
for a janitor. The pay was less than I was making on the docks, but the work
was easier and I was really interested in art so I leapt at the chance. I
had been around for six months and knew I wanted more, but saw no way to
advance until a course to train docents was offered."
"A docent? What in the world is a docent?"
Michael asked his uncle.
Before he could answer, Luke spoke
up. "It's a guide in a museum who leads people through an exhibition or through
a part of the museum. You'll know soon enough because now you don't know
what one is and in a few weeks you will be one for my exhibition!"
Uncle Michael laughed, "You should
have seen the expression on the instructor's face when I showed up wearing
my janitor's uniform. I was really determined to better myself, so I put
all I had into the training session. I was first in the class from the beginning
and, when it was over, I was immediately made a docent. I was in a dilemma
because I needed to have decent clothes for the job and I had none. When
I spoke of my dilemma to the man in charge, he told me I had done so well
he would advance me the cost of a suit, shirt, shoes and tie. I paid that
back out of my salary as quickly as possible by saving all I could on food.
That was the only way I could save any money because I was living in a single
room in the cheapest rooming house I could find."
"After six months as a docent, and
receiving superior ratings from my supervisor and high praise from patrons,
I was told that I could take classes at the Institute free--as an employee.
I was in absolute heaven. Sure, my living conditions were terrible, I had
no social life and had to work evenings to cover the time I spent in class,
but I loved it. The Art Institute became my home. Of course, I wasn't taking
anywhere close to a full load of classes and it would take me years to get
a degree, but I was learning in an area where I wanted to be. After two semesters
of classes, the professor of art history called me into her office. I was
afraid of what she might say. My grades were excellent and I was still getting
high praise for my work, but I guess I never trusted anyone."
"When I reached her office, she asked
me to sit down and started asking questions: 'Where are you from? How did
you get to Chicago? Why did you take a janitor's job? What prompted you to
become a docent?' I'm not sure to this day why I did what I did, but I just
poured out my whole story. No-one had ever asked me about myself--really--since
I left Lexington, and I guess it was like water dammed up. It all just rushed
out. When I finished, I was in tears and thought, 'Well, you can bid the
Art Institute goodbye'. Miss Tredenic, that was her name, got up from her
desk, handed me a tissue and said, 'Michael, to say I am impressed is an
understatement. You are certainly a fine young man. In looking over your
record, I was impressed, but had I known your personal history, I think I
would have thought someone was pulling my leg. I'm glad you felt you could
tell me about yourself. You took a great risk, you know that?' I could only
nod because the tears were ready to start again. 'I called you into my office
because a couple of your other professors asked that I do so after we had
talked about your performance in class. I am prepared to offer you a full
scholarship to the Institute so you can pursue your studies full-time.' I
couldn't believe my ears and asked her to repeat what she had said. When
I was sure she had offered me a scholarship, I realized that it was a dream
come true--but, almost immediately, reality hit me. 'Miss Tredenic, I hope
you won't think I don't appreciate your offer. It is a dream come true, it
is beyond my wildest dreams, but I have a real problem. I can't go to school
full-time and work full-time as well. I have absolutely no income or way
of keeping myself alive.'"
"She said, 'Michael, I didn't know
your situation until you told me. I think it would be tragic for you to pass
up this opportunity. Give me a day or two--the next semester is three weeks
away--and let me see what I can do. It is important to me and the Institute
that your talents not be wasted.'"
"A week passed and I heard nothing
from Miss Tredenic. I had tried and tried to think of ways I could earn enough
money to live and do the work the Institute would require, and I was really
down. Finally, I was called to Miss Tredenic's office again. She told me
she had arranged for me to be a night guard. She told me the pay was about
the same and I would have time to do assignments on the job. I was so ecstatic
that I just grabbed her and gave her a huge hug."
"When classes started, I was very shy
because most of the students' parents were paying major bucks for their education.
Their dress, social life and conversation all smelled of money and I had
to be careful about what I ate to keep within my income. I think, looking
back, I tried to hide in a corner in classes. I always waited until the chattering
students had gone and then left the classroom . One day, after my last class,
I was waiting around as usual when one of the students walked over to me
rather than leaving and said, 'I'm James Sanders,' extending his hand. I
took his hand and, as I started to shake it, said, 'Hi, I'm...' 'Yea, I know,
you're Michael Andrews. Buy you a cup of coffee?' 'Sure, I guess,' I answered,
not sure what to say. We went to the Institute's coffee shop and sat there
talking about classes, favorite artists and painting, about everything except
ourselves until I realized I had to go to work. 'I've really enjoyed talking
with you, James, but I've got to leave.' 'Why? I wanted to take you to dinner.'
'You don't know how much I would appreciate that, but... hell, you may as
well know, I've got to go to work.' I then told him the whole story of how
I came to be a student. 'Had Miss Tredenic not been able to get me a job
as a night guard, I would have had to turn down the scholarship. I have to
earn my living because I have no help other than, thank God, the scholarship.'"
"'Can I come along with you or do you
have to throw everyone out?' he asked."
"'Well, everyone is supposed to be
out before I go on duty, but aren't students allowed in the building? That's
what I have been told. Of course, I'm not sure that means at the guard's
station but, sure, come along.'"
"James went with me to the dressing
room where I changed into my uniform. When I was dressed, he looked at me
and said, 'I always did go for a man in uniform!' I didn't know what to say,
so I said nothing. I left James at my station as I made the required circuit,
checking doors, etc. and using the key to record the fact that I had passed
a station. When I returned, James was hard at work on an art history assignment.
We worked together on it and I was really enjoying not only the work, but
being with someone."
"After that, James came with me every
night. On Friday, he asked me if I had to work weekends. 'I work every other
weekend. When I do, I have Monday and Tuesday nights off,' I told him."
"'How about this weekend?' he asked."
"'I'm off,' I said, 'I don't have to
work again until Monday night.'"
"'Great, you're coming home with me.'
I wasn't sure how to respond and hesitated. 'Some reason you don't want to?'
he asked. I was thinking a mile a minute. I knew James had money and going
home with him would mean what? 'You don't want to come?'"
"'Look, James, you obviously have money,
I have none. You have decent clothes, I have one outfit and that's it--other
than what I wear to school.'"
"'So?'"
"'So, how can I be anything other than
an embarrassment to you?'"
"James laughed, 'I know you very well,
Mr. Andrews. We are the same size--at least what I have seen. If there is
an occasion to get dressed, you'll be one of the best dressed guys in Chicago!'"
"Honestly, kids, I was so naive that
I didn't hear what was to be one of the many clues James gave me about who
he was. How could I turn him down? I didn't want to, so I finally agreed."
"When I said I needed to go by my place
for a toothbrush, razor and that kind of stuff, James told me not to worry
about that, he had all I'd need. It was April and the weather unusually warm
for Chicago; the moon was full and there was a gentle breeze when we walked
outside. James walked over to his car, a Triumph, and opened the door for
me. I was puzzled at what was going on, but his smile reassured me. We drove
north along the lake front, on into Evanston. Before I realized it, we were
in an obviously old and very wealthy section. James finally turned into a
long, tree shaded drive. A huge house came into view--'Home,' he said, 'but
I have my own place'. He drove to the back of the house and stopped before
what had obviously been a carriage house originally, but which was larger
than the house in which I grew up. 'My place,' he said. 'I have lived here
since high school. Come on in.' We entered a beautifully appointed living
area. James continued into a studio. 'I'm not very good at studio art, but
I do enjoy trying,' he said. He then showed me his kitchen and dining area.
'Hope you can cook,' he laughed. 'I'm not very good at it.'"
"'I'm afraid I might have forgotten
how,' I responded, 'I haven't had enough money to do much real cooking, but
I used to be good.'"
"We went upstairs, where James had
a huge bedroom with a bath. 'There's another bedroom and bath across the
hall if we need it,' he said and smiled. I began to wonder what was going
on."
"'How'd you like to change into something
comfortable?' he asked as he went to a large closet and took out two robes
and two pairs of pajamas. He started undressing and all I could do was stare.
He was beautiful! 'Well, are you going to change or not?' he laughed. 'I'll
fix us a nightcap while you change.' When he went downstairs, I changed and
followed shortly afterward. When I reached the living room, James handed
me a drink. 'I guess you'd like to know who you've gotten mixed up with,'
he said. 'My family is old Chicago. My father married my mother when he was
fifty and she was thirty. They had been married five years before their first
and only child was born. Needless to say, I was spoiled rotten. My father
expected me to go into banking--his profession--and I showed absolutely no
talent or desire to do so. I was interested in art. He had pretty much given
up on my following in his footsteps when--I was sixteen--he had a heart attack
and died suddenly.'"
"To this day I don't know why what
happened next did. When he said sixteen, I suddenly remembered David. 'He
would be sixteen now,' I thought, and I was overwhelmed with what my father
had done to him and burst into great, sobbing cries. In the years which followed,
I often asked James why he did what he did and he could never answer. As
I was weeping bitterly, he came to me, took me in his arms and started stroking
my hair and singing a lullaby. I was clinging to him desperately. He finally
lifted my face and gave me a very, very gentle kiss and said, 'Michael, I
am here'. He kept holding me, stroking my hair and singing softly until I
became calm. 'Do you want to tell me about it?' he asked."
"Beginning from the beginning, I told
him everything. When I finished, he was still holding me and I looked up
into his face and said, 'Now you'll hate me too'."
"'Why?' he asked."
"'Because I'm queer.'"
"James started laughing madly. 'Michael,
I have done everything I could think of to get you to tell me--well, I had
dreamed you were. When I walked into class the very first day, the first
thing I saw was a god-like creature sitting in the back of the room, hiding.
You'll not believe this, but it took me less than thirty seconds to fall
madly in love. I was totally, completely, hopelessly in love with you even
before you looked up and I saw those beautiful blue eyes of yours. I knew
that, more than anything in the world, I wanted you to be like me--queer.
I hate the word, but... anyway I spent so much time trying to look at you
and scheming how I was going to find out, and how I was going to let you
know, that my grades have suffered. You were all I thought about night and
day. Michael Andrews, I love you with my whole heart and that's that.'"
"James kissed me again and I pulled
away. 'James, I can't say I love you. I enjoy being with you and you'll never
know how much your care for me now means, but I can't say I love you. I barely
know you.'"
"'I'm sorry, Michael. I don't want
to chase you away. All I ask is that you let me be with you and love you
any way you can accept. If you never love me, it will hurt, but know I do
love you and I don't want you, ever, to feel pressured into saying something
you don't mean or doing anything you don't want to do.'"
"Before the weekend was over, James
asked me to move in, to live with him. 'Michael, the other bedroom is yours.
I will consider it sacred territory. I will never enter unless you ask me
to do so, but my bed is always waiting for you should you ever decide, for
whatever reason, you want to share it.' I knew I trusted James and his pledge
to me, so Sunday afternoon we went to my room and got the few things I had
there--including a photo of your father, Michael--and I moved in."
"In the weeks that followed, James
let me know in thousands of ways that he cared for me, and I certainly cared
for him. I had never been so happy in my whole life; I enjoyed everything
we did together. He came every night and we did our assignments while I was
on duty. When I was free, he showed me the Chicago I had never dreamed existed.
And, yes, it wasn't long before I started sharing his bed. One night I started
to bed and caught a glimpse of David's photo, and he seemed so alive and
I broke down again. James heard me crying, came to my room, picked me up
and carried me to his bed where he held me and stroked my hair. After that,
I never returned to my bed. James' bed became our bed."
"And, yes, he introduced me to sex.
I loved being cuddled, touched and, yes, the sex. James was much more experienced
than I, and I wondered what life would be like with him and what life might
be like were I free to explore new experiences. James often told me he loved
me and, every time he did, I was in a quandary. I wanted to say that I loved
him, but I could not. After a couple weeks, when I said that I couldn't say
I loved him, he asked, 'Is it because you don't or is there some other reason?'
I finally said, 'James, I don't know why. I care for you deeply. When we
are having wonderful sex, when you hold me I feel loved, comforted, cared
for. I guess--well, I'll be honest with you. You have all kinds of experience;
you have loved other men. I have had none of the kinds of experiences you
have had. I don't know what I might miss if you were my lover. I guess--I
know--what is missing is what you said you experienced when you first saw
me. You were instantly in love, you described how, when you looked at me
in class, your heart skipped a beat, you got goosebumps all over. In short,
you described what, to me, being in love is like. It's the way I felt when
I saw the boy I loved in high school. He never knew, but just seeing him
made me weak all over. That's what I want it to be like when I say, 'I love
you,' to someone. And as much as you mean to me, and you mean a great deal,
I haven't had those kinds of fireworks inside. I'm afraid to say I love you
because I'm not sure and I'm not sure what I would miss if I pledged myself
to you. AND if I ever say I love you, that's what it will be, a pledge to
love you and you only.'"
"James, took me in his arms, kissed
me gently and said, 'Michael, I am willing to wait. I am willing to accept
what you can give me and, if you can never say you love me, I will be happy
just as we are. Sure, I long to hear those words come out of your mouth,
but if all I can have is your arms around me, the touch of your body against
mine when I wake up in the middle of the night, your smile when you look
at me, then that's enough. As to experience, I hope you never have the kind
of experience I have had. I have had two lovers, neither of which, by the
way, made my heart skip a beat or set off sky rockets in my head, but I did
love them. One proved to be nothing more than a gold digger. When I finally
realized that, I felt cheap. I felt that I had been buying sex."
"The other, I think, maybe loved me;
he thought and I thought we were in love but, in the end, it was just lust.
We had fantastic sex, but that was all. He never just held me. He never wanted
to talk about our future. One day he just wasn't here. As soon as he was
gone, I was crushed. I went the alcohol route so when I came home to a cold,
empty house, I was ready to pass out. I had no friends to whom I could turn
and no-one, no-one to love. Gradually I came to realize we were not in love,
we were just two horny men. But my life was still cold and lonely. There
was a deep black pit inside and, try as I could, alcohol could not fill it
up. I finally reached the point where I knew I was killing myself slowly
and decided to speed up the process with a mixture of sleeping pills and
alcohol. For some unknown reason, Mom decided to come out here to talk with
me. She found me unconscious. After that episode, I spent time in a private
mental institute where I was treated royally because they were trying to
treat my depression. Thank God, they didn't know I was homosexual or I don't
know what might have happened.'"
"'While I was in the hospital, my former
lover came to see me once. He cared that much about me. He left, he told
me, because he found someone who just wanted sex--no talk of love, no commitment.
So if all you can give me is the tenderness and the care you do, I'll take
that and be happy.' That was almost the last time we talked about my inability
to say 'I love you'. I did enjoy being with James, having him touch me, hold
me in his arms, stroke my hair--he was damn romantic. Then six months or
so later, he went out of town with his mom--she, by the way, had said again
and again how lucky James was to have found me. While he was away I decided
I was short-changing him by staying around and not giving him the only thing
he ever asked of me--three little words, 'I love you'. I decided the best
thing for the both of us was for me to leave so he could find someone who
could love him and say so. I took his car and drove aimlessly for hours.
When morning came, I was in the middle of acres and acres of farmland and
there wasn't a house in sight. I parked the car and got out and walked along
a river. I even thought about ending it all. Life was good to me, but I was
all torn up inside. I sat down under a tree and fell asleep. While I slept,
I dreamed that James had come into our bedroom and said, 'Michael, I love
you more than anything, but you don't love me. I think that, for both of
us, we should separate. I am transferring to another art institute. I want
you to stay here and finish your course. Remember, I love you,' and he vanished.
In my dream, I came into what had been a happy place, our house, but now
it was cold, empty and so was I. When I woke up, I was in a cold sweat. I
was haunted by an emptiness James had left. Even though I knew it was just
a dream, it seemed too real. And too frightening."
"I drove back to Chicago and when I
got home and walked in, the place was empty and cold. James was gone--he
had not returned. I climbed into bed and drew myself into a fetal position
and cried myself to sleep. I was very confused about what was going on. Sometime
in the night James returned. With the early morning sun just barely lighting
the room, I woke up and saw James beside me. No fireworks, no goosebumps,
no missing heartbeats, but I knew I loved this man. I loved him more than
I could ever tell him. Instead of the kind of reaction James described he
had when he looked at me, I just had a warm, comfortable feeling for this
beautiful man beside me. I thought to myself, 'If this is not love, it's
so damn close I can't tell the difference,' as I leaned over, kissed his
sleeping lips and, as his eyes opened, said, 'James, I love you'. That was
the first time I spoke those four words and I spent the next thirty years
saying them. And you know what, I couldn't have loved him more, but there
were never raging flames of love, just steady, glowing, embers of love for
a man I spent the next thirty years loving in my way."
After Uncle Michael finished, we all
sat silently, watching the river flow past.
I pulled Matt close, buried my face
in his hair, and whispered, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, we have so much to be thankful
for." Matt turned his face to mine and we exchanged a deep, deep, loving
kiss. "So very much," he responded. As we broke our kiss, the other couples
were following our example. I looked over at Uncle Michael expecting, I think,
to see him crying. Instead, he had a smile on his face.
When he saw me, he smiled anew and
said, "You all remind me again of the power of love. You are beautiful, all
of you, and your love for each other makes me realize how much this world
needs love--regardless of the form it takes. Thank you for listening to me
and for sharing this afternoon with me. Bless you."
We had one more task to do and when
we had completed it, we asked Uncle Michael if he would drive the van back
to the Greywolfs', and the Gang of Six walked home as the Easter moon appeared
on the horizon. Need it be said? Three very much in love young men walked
backwards, holding hands with their reason for rejoicing on the Festival
of the Resurrection as all six sang, "More than the greatest love the world
has known..."
When we reached Matt's, Yong Jin told
Larry that Bill had called and wanted him to return the call as soon as possible.
Larry went into the kitchen to use the phone, and several minutes later came
back into the living room where we were all sitting and talking. He had one
of his goofy grins on his face and said, "I guess you two artists aren't
the only ones with a secret project. Eugene, do you think you could get yo'
mama to haul our butts to school early tomorrow?"
"How early is early?"
"Before 7:00--not later than 6:45."
"I guess, if she can get me out of
bed in time."
"Oh, I think I can handle that if I'm
in the bed with you."
"I KNOW you could get me awake, but
out of bed I'm not so sure about," Eugene laughed. Larry just gave him a
goofy grin.
"I'm glad I'm old folks," Uncle Michael
laughed. "I don't think I was ever young enough to keep up with this bunch!"
"Well, Old Man," Michael said, "if
you'll give me a few minutes outside with Wild Woman here, I'll take you
home and tuck you in."
Michael and Mary Kathryn went outside
and, after ten minutes, Matt said, "Luke, I think we better rescue our brother
or he'll go home groaning again". When we stepped outside, Mary Kathryn had
Michael against the wall and you could practically see the steam rising.
"Matt, I think we're too late."
"Ah, to be young again," Uncle Michael
laughed. "Michael, I think you better get this old man home before I pass
out from the hormone overflow."
I wasn't sure whether the evidence
on the front of Michael's pants indicated he had taken care of any groaning
problem or had just made it worse. Matt and I took Larry and Eugene to Millie's
and, when we returned, Matt glanced toward the falls and said, "Luke, babe,
I bet I know one Andrews who won't be groaning tonight, at least not from
starting something he doesn't finish!"
"One day, someone else will look toward
the falls and say the same thing about you, Babe."
David
I have seen all sorts and kinds of
accidents, people in all kinds of conditions, emergencies of all kinds. Had
you asked me, I would have told you that nothing could really shake me up.
When I came to the door and saw Michael, I was shook, but not nervous. When
Easter day dawned a perfect day, I was overjoyed and looking forward to my
marriage to Margaret. The dinner at the Greywolfs was nothing different than
it had been so many times before--except of course, Margaret was there by
my side. When it came time to go to the falls, it was just another--special,
of course--but just another trip to the falls until... until Matt paused
and Michael, Fr. Tom and I walked out onto the beach, turned and faced the
friends who honored Margaret and me by their presence. Suddenly I couldn't
remember where I was supposed to be or what I was supposed to do. I grabbed
Michael's hand. He looked at me, smiled and whispered, "Never mind, Dad,
I'll get you through it," and of course he did. When Fr. Tom whispered, at
the end of the ceremony, "You may kiss your wife, David," I lifted the veil
from her face and saw tears in her eyes. I am sure she saw the tears in mine
as well.
It was difficult getting away from
the reception. So many of our friends were there and all wanted to congratulate
us, but we were finally ready to go. When Margaret was ready to toss her
bouquet, she turned her back, then cheated. She made sure she tossed it to
Matt, who had to dodge or catch it. When we left, we went to Lexington for
dinner to get away from the crowd, but we came back. Margaret had thought
a week at the lake cabin Jens got for us was great, but she said, "David,
you made love to me for the first time at the falls. I want my first time
as your wife to be there as well."
When we got back, my van was still
at Greywolfs' and I assumed, correctly, the two Michaels--brother and son--were
there. Margaret and I changed--when she had undressed, I just stood there,
holding my pants, overwhelmed by her beauty, my love for her and my joy at
having her as my wife. "David, it's ok by me if you go to the falls nude,
you'll be nude as soon as I can get your clothes off anyway, but it might
be a bit chilly later on," Margaret laughed. I grabbed and started kissing
her all over--her lips, her neck, her eyes, her nipples, her stomach. Needless
to say, it took me about half a second to get hard as a rock. Margaret took
my head between her hands, looked into my eyes, kissed me and said, "I meant
it, David, at the falls. Get yourself under control so we can get there,"
and laughed a silvery laugh. I kissed her and got dressed.
The Easter moon was bright, very bright,
and the spring night was warm and filled with delightful sounds and smells
as we walked to the falls, holding hands like two kids. Margaret started
singing softly, "More than the greatest love..." "I guess that's the family's
theme song," I laughed and, in a singing voice which never won any contest,
joined her.
After I had crossed the canes and we
walked toward the falls, I realized just how much I had been out of it as
we cleared the path and faced the falls. "Margaret, you're not going to believe
how stupid I have been. I knew we would spend our first night as husband
and wife here, but..."
"Don't tell me you didn't bring a blanket
or anything. Not always-cool stud muffin, always-prepared David."
"Ok, I won't tell you, since you are
about to find it out yourself." We both laughed. I took Margaret in my arms
and kissed her deeply, passionately, and welcomed her tongue into my mouth.
As we broke the kiss, I turned her so her face was in the moonlight so I
could enjoy her beauty before trekking back to the house.
As I turned her, she said, "I think
someone knew you weren't yourself today. Look..."
I turned to look where she was pointing
and saw two candles in Japanese temple lanterns, one on each side of a bed
made from a double sleeping bag, the top turned down to reveal two pillows.
Hand in hand we walked to the bed. Lying on each pillow was a spray of lilies
of the valley and on one a note. I sat down on the bed, pulled Margaret beside
me and picked up the note. "From six who love deeply for two who are discovering
new ways to express their love. Love deeply, love well. The Gang of Six."
Once again, I saw tears in Margaret's eyes, shining in the moonlight as I
am sure she saw in mine. "David Andrews, we are two very, very lucky people."
"Margaret Andrews, we are indeed."
With those words I lay back on the bed and pulled her on top of me.
"David, I promised you would be nude
as soon as I could get your clothes off and I have already been delayed."
Margaret started laughing as she tried to undress me and I put up a fight--a
pretty weak one, but a man has to defend his honor! Soon I was as naked as
the day I was born and as hard as if I had been as young as Michael. I wasn't
quite as fast getting Margaret undressed; I was enjoying every single moment
it took. As soon as her blouse was off, I discovered she had saved me some
time and trouble--she had on no bra. I covered her face, mouth and neck with
kisses, then started kissing her wonderful breasts. Her nipples soon became
hard and I couldn't resist kissing and then sucking each one. Still giving
attention to her breasts, I slipped her skirt from her body and discovered
she had saved me more time and trouble--she was pantyless!
Our kisses became more and more passionate
and covered more and more of the other's body. In spite of being an "old
man", I was streaming precum like a teenager! Margaret's wetness touched
my thigh as she covered my mouth with hers. Our breathing became one as I
felt her hand guide my manhood into the place it had known once before and
longed to be again. Our love making crushed a spray of the lily of the valley
and the perfume mingled with the perfume of a man and a woman.
After I climaxed--Margaret had at least
three orgasms before I did, definitely an advantage a woman has over a man!--we
lay in each other's arms, bathed in moonlight, and were silent for a long
time. "In case it has escaped you, David Andrews, I'm in love with you. You
have given me more happiness today than I have known in years."
"I hadn't noticed," I laughed softly.
"I thought I was just so sexy you couldn't resist."
"That too," she laughed, rolled herself
atop my body again and started kissing me all over. With all the excitement
of the day and the fantastic sex we had only minutes before, I doubted very
seriously that I was up to much except some heavy petting. WRONG. I was getting
a bit aroused, but certainly not ready for any more real action, I told myself,
but when Margaret kissed the head of my semi-hard man's tool, it sprang up
ready for action. And action it got! Our second love making session was considerably
less frantic than the first and I sure lasted longer, but I was finally hit
by a climax which took my breath away. When I recovered enough to talk, I
laughed, "Margaret, did you slip something in my drink at dinner? I'm acting
and feeling as young as Michael".
"I don't think it is anything I slipped
in anywhere. You seem to be the one slipping things in place!" Margaret responded,
before kissing me passionately.
"Just doing my duty, Ma'am. You seemed
to be having a problem and us EMS types are trained to deal with just about
any kind of problem."
"I won't ask who gave you your training
but, Stud Muffin, I bet you made an A in the course!"
We laughed and joked a while longer
then Margaret settled herself in my arms and we slipped off to sleep. Sometime
in the night, the song of a night bird waked me up and, when I opened my
eyes, I was gazing into my wife's eyes. She was resting on an elbow, looking
at me. "What's going on here?" I asked.
"A bird woke me up and I was just looking
to make sure I hadn't dreamed the past day and tonight."
"It's a dream, Margaret, it's a dream
come true." I pulled her face to mine, planted a kiss on her lips as she
sucked my tongue into her mouth. I needn't go into what followed, but if
you want to know how old you have to be before you can't have glorious, loving
sex three times in a night, you'll have to find someone older than I!
The next time I awoke, the sun was
high and warm. Margaret was asleep and this time it was I who leaned on an
elbow, looking at this woman I loved so much after being convinced I was
doomed to a life of loneliness. As I bent to kiss her, her eyes opened and
a smile covered her face. Suddenly, Margaret sprang up, grabbed my hand and
headed for the river basin. When she reached it, she dived in and I was right
behind her. We swam and frolicked in the water, enjoying being together.
When we flopped down on the bed, Margaret exclaimed, "Oh, my God, I think
I used it all up!" as she pointed to my manhood which was seeking escape
from the cool water. We both started laughing like teenagers and, sure enough,
she was proven wrong and, if you're counting, that made four.
After we had sunned ourselves in the
afterglow of our love making, it was time to go. We gathered everything up
and took it to the house. Michael, my brother, had breakfast waiting for
us and we enjoyed being with him for a while, then left for the lake. I was
so happy. I had a long-lost brother return and had a new, beautiful, loving
wife. For the first time in a long time, I was really alive.
A Special Place--PartTwenty-six--Eugene
When Larry and I got home, Millie was
still up, sitting in the library, having a night cap. "Guys, do you want
something to eat or drink?"
"I think I'll get a juice. Do you want
one, Larry?"
"Sure."
When I returned to the library, Larry
and Millie had been engaged in a conversation, but stopped as soon as I came
in. "Eugene, I don't know what I'm going to have to do to teach you some
manners. You don't serve juice in a can to an honored guest such as Mr. Watley.
Get back in there and put it in a glass and put some ice in it. Goodness
sakes, child."
"Yes, Mama," I hung my head and answered.
"Sorry, Mr. Watley, how very thoughtless of me." Millie gave us one of her
great belly laughs and, as soon as I left the room, she and Larry started
talking again. When I returned, they were both silent.
"Ok, I think you two are keeping secrets
from me," I said as I handed Larry his glass.
"You're right," Millie said. They wouldn't
be secrets if we told."
"All right, I guess I'll just have
to wait. Millie, Larry needs to be at school tomorrow at 6:45 at the latest.
Can you take us?"
"Lord, Child, you know I don't get
up before God and he told me he always sleeps in because people who get up
early are so damn self-righteous they don't need him and he can't stand them
anyway. Can't you drive? Don't you have a license?"
"Of course I can, I do, but I don't
think a bicycle needs a licensed driver and Larry's butt is not much..."
"Noticed he was kinda short changed
in that department, but I guess he makes up for it in other ways!" Yelp,
Millie paid attention to asses. "Well, why don't you and Larry take a look
in the garage and see if what the Easter bunny left here for you will do."
Neither Larry nor I made a move and Millie said, "Well, go on. If the Easter
bunny messed up, I guess I can drag these old bones out of bed and haul your
butts to school before God's up."
It didn't take another prompt and Larry
and I raced to the garage. Sitting beside Millie's land yacht was a fire
engine red Chrysler LeBaron convertible. We both stopped dead in our tracks.
Finally Larry said, "Must have been a damn big Easter bunny, Gene, Babe."
I looked at Larry and said, "Larry,
do you realize you have never called me anything other than Eugene and, rarely,
Babe? I think I like your calling me Gene more than a new car."
"Sure is a hell of a lot cheaper way
to make you happy." He then took me in his arms, kissed me gently and said,
"Gene, Babe, I'll call you anything you want me to call you so long as you
love me."
"Larry, Babe, you can call me anything
you like because what you call me will never change the fact that I love
you with all I am." We shared another, not so gentle, full-of-passion kiss
and went back to the library.
"Millie, the Easter bunny brought that
car for me?"
"Sure did. It's yours. He did say that
he expected you to deal with the car the way Larry's mom expects him to deal
with everything--and I do as well--be responsible and be mature, that's all
I ask of you."
I walked over to Millie, put my arms
around her and said, "I don't think anyone has a better Easter bunny than
I do. Millie, I certainly appreciate all you have done for me--it's much
more than I ever dreamed possible and much more than I deserve."
"Bullshit! You're my son and you deserve
a lot. You've already given me more happiness than I ever expected or deserved
and it's just beginning. But no spoiled brat crapola or mom will take a switch
to that bubble butt!"
"Oh, Mama, I'd like that," I said and
twitched my ass.
Millie drew back her hand to swat me
on the ass, then stopped in midair. I didn't move. "Sorry," she said.
"Didn't budge, Millie. Guess that proves
I'm not afraid any more. At least, I know anything I get from you will be
a love swat."
Millie hugged me to herself, "You are
so right, Son." Millie, Larry and I sat and talked about the day and how
exciting it had all been for us.
After a while, Millie said, "Guys,
it's bedtime for old ladies," as she got up. Both Larry and I gave her a
goodnight hug, I took our glasses to the kitchen and Larry and I went to
my room.
As soon as we were inside, Larry started
undressing me, stopping to kiss me passionately from time to time. When I
was undressed, he held me at arm's length and said, "Gene, Babe, you are
so beautiful I want to cry. How could I ever..."
"Larry, it's over; it's in the past.
Drop it, Babe. You hurt me, ok? I have long since forgiven you. Man, I love
you with my whole heart. You are my life, my world. I can't stand you're
constantly beating yourself. That hurts me way deeper than what you did out
of fear, ignorance and self-hatred. Allow yourself to know how wonderful
you are, how much I adore you and how much you mean to me. Please, put your
self-hatred behind you."
"I try, Eugene, God knows I try; the
therapy is helping. I forget about it and can almost accept me as a worthwhile
person, then I see you as you are now and I just feel so unworthy of you."
Tears were forming in his eyes.
I wrapped my arms around Larry, holding
him close and whispered in his ear, "Larry, Babe, no man I do not love with
my whole being, no man unworthy of my love will ever touch me. Can you accept
that? If you can trust me on that, then you have to know I love you with
all I am and you are worthy of the love I give you." Larry took my head in
his hands, looked into my eyes and then covered my mouth with his, giving
me a hard, passion-filled, no-holds-barred kiss. When he released me, I was
hard as a rock as he kissed my face, my neck, my nipples. As he still kissed
me, I removed his shirt and unzipped his pants which slid down his wonderful
legs. When he stepped out of them, I hooked my thumbs in his boxers and slid
them down his legs as well. He, too, was fully aroused.
We embraced, our hardened man's tools
pressed together. Without warning, I grabbed Larry, tossed him over my shoulder
and took him into the bathroom and unceremoniously dumped him into the jacuzzi
and climbed in behind him. The warm water felt good. My back was pretty much
healed and Margaret had said I could shower. I'm not sure she would have
approved of my soaking the jacuzzi, so once I was in, I kept my back out
of the water. As soon as I was in, Larry grabbed one of the huge, fluffy
towels by the edge of the jacuzzi and patted my back dry. We lazed around
with Larry almost submerging himself and me more or less sitting on the edge."
Larry came over, smiled up at me, stood
up and lifted me in his arms. Grabbing another towel, he dried me and I did
him. He then took me into his arms and carried me to what had, indeed, become
our bed. Our loving, once we were settled in bed, became hotter and hotter.
Larry, for the very first time, seemed not to be holding back. He was all
over my body--kissing, licking, touching, nipping at ear lobes and nipples.
I was streaming precum and groaning, I was so hot. Larry started kissing
my stomach, then stuck his tongue in my belly button, tickling like mad.
He moved down my body, stopped, looked up at me and surprised me by kissing
the head of my manhood. Still looking at me, he kissed it again and again,
then started licking it. I was ready to explode as electric charge after
electric charge coursed through my body. Suddenly, as he looked up at me
and ran his tongue up my shaft, I saw him as a little boy licking a lollipop
and started laughing in spite of being so hot I was ready to shoot! Larry
got a stunned look on his face and tears started forming in his eyes. I reached
down and pulled his body atop mine. "Light of my life," I said, holding him
close, "I'm sorry. I love you so very, very very much and you are so beautiful.
I have never been as hot as I was, but suddenly my mind took over and instead
of seeing the love of my life giving me pleasure, I saw a little boy, innocent,
licking a lollipop. Larry, please believe me, it was sheer joy seeing you--young,
innocent, enjoying yourself. But it sure as hell did destroy a romantic moment,
didn't it?"
Larry lifted his head, looked into
my eyes and gave me a wicked grin. "Innocent little boy? I guess I'll have
to prove I am, at least, not a little boy." His mouth covered mine, his tongue
snaked its way into my mouth. Our love making once again became hot, passionate,
unencumbered. His kissing moved down my body until he was again, kissing
and licking my rock hard shaft. He looked up into my eyes as if to ask, "Am
I a little boy now?" I was groaning and panting when, suddenly, he was no
longer licking my shaft, but covered my blood-filled head with his hot, hot
mouth. He moved up and down on my shaft, his tongue working magic on my sensitive,
throbbing head. I knew that soon I would fall over the edge, but it happened
so fast all I could do was scream, "Larry, I'm..." before I started pumping
shot after shot after shot of man's seed into Larry's mouth. I was gasping
for breath, seeing stars, and then lost consciousness for a moment. When
I recovered, Larry lay atop my body, smiling. When he kissed me, his taste
was the taste of Larry, but there was another new taste. I knew my love was
sharing my gift of love with me. Entwined in each other's arms and legs,
we kissed, then drifted off. Just before I slipped into sleep, I thought,
"My love is healing." And uttered a silent thanksgiving for the wonderful,
beautiful man who had just given me unlimited pleasure. My life, which had
been hell only days ago, was unbelievably full, rich with love. The next
thing I knew, Larry was kissing me good morning.
Part Twenty-seven
Matt
Luke had suggested we get to school
early to find out what Larry and Bill's big secret was. A new, fire engine
red convertible pulled into the school parking lot just ahead of us. I parked
beside it and, when I looked around, saw Larry, grinning from ear to ear,
getting out of the car. "Gene's present from the Easter bunny," he said as
I got out of the Jeep.
"Must have been a hell of a big rabbit,"
Luke joked.
"Millie hates to get up before God
who, it seems, always sleeps in, so she got me a car so I wouldn't bother
her getting to school. I guess it's more than my father would have given
me," Eugene laughed.
As we stood admiring Eugene's new car,
Bill pulled into the parking lot. Linda and a couple of first string basketball
players were with him. A third car pulled into the parking lot with two more
of the first string players. "Hi, guys," we all said and they greeted us
in return.
"See you guys later," Larry said, as
he waved the basketball players and Michael toward the front door.
"Linda, I've been thinking..."
"Dangerous, Matt, but what have you
been thinking?"
"Ok, we had real plans to get you and
your cousins home by your curfew so we could have a private party after the
prom. We have a real surprise in store for someone. However, now that you
are apparently hooked up with Bill, the two of you should join us--that is,
unless you get put off by guys making out with each other. Shouldn't be any
problem for Bill to get away; after all, his date is one his mom arranged.
How about you? You have those two cousins around your neck."
"Don't think I haven't been thinking
about fun time after the prom myself. I mentioned it to Bill and he said,
'You name the time and place'. If I could just convince Mom there was an
important private party after the prom that was restricted to Independence
students, she'd find a way."
"Eugene--by the way, what's with this
'Gene' bit? I've never heard you called Gene before."
"Not for public use. Larry sorta called
me that last night. We've never had pet names for each other and I told him
I liked hearing him say it, so it's been "Gene, Gene, Gene' last night and
this morning."
"Well, I guess that's for private use,
Eugene, but what I started to say was, of course we're going to end up at
the falls, but what if Millie called Linda's mom and invited Linda to a private
party?"
"No doubt in my mind she'd do it. Hate
to say this, Linda, but Millie hates the social climbers and takes great
delight in putting one over on them."
"Problem solved then," Linda said,
then immediately added, "Holy shit, hide me fast". Luke shoved her into the
Jeep and pushed her down into the seat just as Orie and his new "friends"
and hangers-on roared into the parking lot. I wondered when his uncle got
to drive his convertible because Orie seemed to be driving it to school every
day now.
As they roared past, one of them shouted,
"Other end of the parking lot, Orie, this end's for fag parking". Orie parked
as far from us as possible and we crowded around Linda to keep her from being
seen and walked into the school. As soon as we were inside she said, "See
you at lunch--I promise!" as she walked toward her locker and away from us.
The bell rang for homeroom and students
started leaving the commons area. As soon as the roll had been checked and
a few announcements made, the political videos started. The two football
players reminded the students how they and their team--who was supporting
them--made Independence High School what it was. Luke leaned over and whispered,
"How can the team support two people running against each other?".
"Because they probably can't count
to two," I joked.
The next video was a second string,
but very popular, basketball player who had something silly to say and ended
with, "I'm cute, so vote for me".
The screen went blank, then the TV
station's picture of Independence superimposed on the Declaration of Independence
gradually faded in. When it filled the screen, a hole started in the center
and widened until there was a head and shoulders shot of Bill with his four
first string team mates standing behind him. The music faded and Bill said
in a strong voice, "Fellow Independence students, I am not here to ask for
your vote. I am here to state loudly and clearly that I will fight bigotry
and intolerance any way I can. I was mortified when I walked into our school
last Friday and saw what had been done to Michael Andrews' posters. After
giving it some thought and talking with Ms. Jones, I made a decision. Over
the weekend, I talked with my team mates and four of the first stringers
agreed with my decision and stand with me. Michael Andrews has shown, by
actions and words, that his enemy is bigotry and intolerance. I am happy
to announce that my team mates and I am joining in his fight. I am hereby
announcing my withdrawal from the race for student body president in favor
of Michael. My team mates and I are warriors in Michael's campaign against
hate and I ask that all of you join us." He then held up his hand so his
ring was clearly visible and said, "Talk with anyone in the Fellowship of
the Rings--they are all wearing a Hopi ring similar to mine and they will
be happy to tell you what we stand for!". I think you could have heard a
pin drop in the whole school for a short time, then there were cheers and
boos resounding throughout the building. I don't think anyone heard a word
Michael said in his video which followed.
"Good friend," Luke whispered to me.
"He has made an issue of the rings which will eliminate any questions we
don't want asked".
Lunch started off as usual, but our
table was the focus of a lot of attention. People came over to shake Bill's
hand or slap Michael on the back. When things had settled down a little,
I glanced over toward where Orie and his crowd were sitting, and could see
Linda sitting with Orie and Jake Hilliard. She had both of them in the palm
of her hand and Jake was leaning over, whispering something in her ear. Suddenly
Bill cried, "That fucking son of a bitch!" He was staring at the table where
Linda was sitting--in fact, his eyes had hardly left it even when students
came by to speak to him. I had to turn to see Linda and when I did, I saw
Orie's hand moving up her thigh and Linda pulling her leg away. "Shit! That
Orie bastard had his hand up..."
"Orie, I warned you," Linda shouted
as every student turned to see what was going on. Bill was half-way out of
his seat as Linda slapped Orie so hard the "splat!" was heard throughout
the cafeteria. As she tried to stand, Orie pulled her back down, saying something
not loudly enough to be heard in our corner.
Bill shot across the room, shoved Orie
aside and gently pulled Linda away. "Orie, the lady asked you to stop," Bill
said in a deadly tone of voice. He pushed Linda behind him, placing himself
between her and the jocks.
"Yea, take her back to the faggot's
table, basketball faggot," Marshall Tucker sneered. "Orie, we don't want
the fag hag around. Let her go with this queer basketball player."
Bill turned to Linda and said calmly,
"Linda, you go back to the table while I tend to business here". Linda walked
quickly toward our table and Luke, Michael, Eugene, Larry and I stood, ready
to rush to Bill's aid. He didn't need it. Marshall kept up his bigoted slurs
which the other five guys at the table seemed to be ignoring. "We're making
a trip to the office," Bill said as soon as he was sure Linda would be safe.
"Says who, basketball cocksucker?"
"I think I did," Bill said, reached
over, took Marshall by the arm, twisted it behind him and started out of
the cafeteria.
"You're hurting me, you son of a bitch!"
Marshall yelled, looking toward his "friends" who made no move to come to
his defense. "HEY, guys, this bastard is hurting me. Aren't you going to
do something?" As if in answer, the five remaining jocks turned their attention
to eating.
"If you'll just walk briskly, I won't
have to twist," Bill said. As he passed our table, he said, "Need a couple
of you as witnesses to Marshall's use of pejorative words". Linda and I went
to the office with Bill. Marshall walked on his tiptoes most of the way because
every time Bill loosened his grip, he tried to break away and Bill twisted
his arm again.
After Bill told Ms. Jones what had
happened, she called Marshall's father and told him Marshall had violated
board policy on prejudice and discrimination. She offered Mr. Tucker the
option of picking up Marshall and enrolling him in the workshop, or suspension
until he enrolled himself. "I understand," she said as she hung up the phone.
"Marshall, your dad said he was through with you. It seems since you have
taken up with what he calls the wrong crowd, you have come home drunk, or
not at all, been abusive to your mother, and your grades have gone out the
bottom. He said I could do whatever I could, he was giving up. Marshall,
if you are willing to enroll yourself in the prejudice workshop, then you
can return to school. Until you do that, you are suspended. Not only does
that mean you cannot be at school during school hours, but also that you
may not be present or participate in any school-sponsored events. Do you
understand that?"
"Who gives a fuck, you old bat? I won't
attend anything which tries to tell me faggots and faggot lovers have a right
to anything except to be beat into shape. You can go to hell as all faggots
and faggot lovers will."
It was obvious to me that Bill was
ready to give Marshall what for and it was all Ms. Jones could do to hold
her temper. "I'm sorry you feel that way," Ms. Jones said. "You have exactly
twenty minutes to be off this campus and if you are not, the police will
be called and you will be arrested for criminal trespass. Do I make my self
clear?"
"Fuck you, bitch," Marshall yelled
as he picked up a glass paper weight from Ms. Jones' desk and threw it in
across the room, turned and left. Bill started to pick up the paper weight
when Ms. Jones yelled, "Don't!" Bill looked stunned. Ms. Jones took a tissue
from a box on her desk and carefully picked up the paper weight. "I suspect
we now have the third set of fingerprints there."
As we left the office and headed to
our next class, I saw Orie in his uncle's convertible roaring out of the
parking lot. Marshall Tucker and someone else were with him. "Think we ought
to inform Ms. Jones?" Linda asked.
"I will," Bill said, and turned and
went back to the office for a minute or two.
"When the next class started, Ms. Jones
came on the intercom and announced that teachers were to take roll and send
a list of absences to the office at once. If there were none, they were also
to report that. Dad looked puzzled, but did as she asked.
When the next to last class of the
day was over, the Fellowship of the Rings--had a nice sound to it, especially
since all of us, including Linda, had read Tolkein--met me and Luke as we
got ready to leave. "I got all of you together," Bill said, "to witness something".
He looked at Linda and said, "Linda, this is not a proposal of marriage,
but will you be my steady?" When Linda nodded, Bill took her ring from his
pocket and slipped it on Linda's finger and kissed her. It was obvious he
wasn't an amateur!
Luke and I went home to work. At this
point, I was working on my playing more than anything else. Paula and Eugene
were as much a part of putting things together as I. That was the pattern
for Tuesday and Wednesday. School moved along. The gay basher's table lacked
Marshall. Having left school without permission, I was surprised to see Orie
there. I thought he would have been given a vacation for a few days.
Tuesday at lunch Linda asked Bill what
he was wearing to the prom, and when he told her his mom had picked out a
baby-blue tux, she made all kinds of faces. "Hey, I didn't say she or I had
any taste," he laughed. "Guess I should have asked one of the three fashion
experts first," he continued.
"Meet us at the car after school and
we'll take care of that," Eugene said. "I know the tux guy will be happy
to make a change. You'll be very classy and he has more demand for Easter
eggs than real tux."
"Thanks, guys. I may become a classy
guy yet!"
"Bill, you are a classy guy right now.
You are as fine as they come!" Michael said, and we all agreed.
Thursday, something was up. Two sheriff's
deputies were at school, along with the sheriff. Teachers were told to report
to Ms. Jones' secretary for an appointment with Ms. Jones or Mr. Allan during
their planning period. No-one seemed to know what was going on.
Luke and I were really ready for our
"Mr. Mitchell" class. We opened the new gate and drove to the falls, took
the blanket and crossed the canes behind us as we entered that special place.
As soon as we reached the shore, we started shedding clothes since the day
was really warm and the water was truly inviting. Holding hands, we walked
to the top of the falls, stopping occasionally for a hot kiss. By the time
we reached the top, we were both hard as rocks. When we stood on the lip
of the falls, Luke grabbed my hard manhood and started to dive. I was horrified
until he laughed, turned loose and dived in. I was right behind him. True,
the day was warm and the water warmer than it had been, but it was not yet
warm. Actually, it was never really warm. Nonetheless, we swam for about
half an hour and, by that time, Luke's lips were turning blue. I swam over
to him, kissed his cold lips and said, laughing, "Think we best get out before
I have to start calling you Blue Angel". Luke nodded and, when we were out
of the water, he had goosebumps all over and was shivering. "Guess you white
men just aren't as tough as us 'breeds'," I laughed as we flopped down on
the blanket. "And look, you've taken away my toy." I pointed to his cock
which looked as if it belonged to a five-year-old.
"Seems to me you've taken away mine
too," he laughed, pointing.
We lay on the blanket, my head on Luke's
chest, being warmed by the sun. As I listened to Luke's heartbeat, it seemed
to be sounding out a rhythm of life and love. "Yonghon Tongmu, your heartbeat
is the greatest sound in the world, especially in this place where it was
almost stopped." We both were silent for a long time, each thinking, I am
sure, about how close our life together had almost ended in this place where
we were now so alive and happy. I looked up into Luke's eyes and saw a tear.
Moving up his chest, I kissed his eyes, then his lips. "Bright Angel, I love
you beyond the telling and you have made me happier than I ever dreamed was
possible." I then started kissing his face, his neck, his nipples. I was
getting hotter and hotter. Any damage done by the cold water was more than
repaired. I moved down Luke's body, kissing and licking it as I went. When
I reached his manhood, I kissed it and wanted to take it into my mouth so
bad, I looked up at Luke as if asking permission.
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, you know I want
you to take me into your mouth as much as you want to do it, but..."
"But, but, but! Damn, Luke, I know
what we promised. We were fools. Why should we wait? Are we going to be any
different after some magic date? Why, Luke, why?"
"Matt, you know the answer to that
as well as I do. Are we really fools, Matt?"
"Of course not, Luke. God, when I think
of what the whole family has and is doing for us, and all that has been asked
of us is to wait until we're eighteen. Luke, I understand that, but damn,
Luke, Babe, it is so hard, so very, very hard."
Leave it to Luke: when the pressure
is really on, he finds a way to let me escape without being smug. "I couldn't
help but notice that!" he laughed, pulled my body on top of his and gave
me a passion-filled, lustful kiss. Lying across his body, I continued to
kiss him as my hand moved down his hard stomach, past his hard man's tool
until it found his pucker. I rubbed my fingers over it lightly as he had
done the night he declared I was his. His cock was pulsating with every heartbeat
and every breath. "Please, Sarang Hanun Pomul," he groaned, moving his head
from side to side. I took his wonderful manhood in my hand and began, slowly,
to stroke it up and down.
Luke was kissing my shoulders and neck
like mad as I continued giving him pleasure. He managed to stick his tongue
in my ear, which was so erotic I couldn't help but stroke his tool harder
and faster. He had my ear lobe in his mouth and was biting it gently. My
hand continued to keep up a pace which I wish had been that of my mouth as
Luke started kissing and then sucking a spot on my neck below my ear. His
sucking became more and more intense and I knew he was nearing the point
of no return when his breath began to be a gulping of air. Suddenly he bit
my neck as his climax hit him and between clinched teeth he groaned, "Sarang
Hanun Pomul, I love youuuuuuu," and started shooting his man's seed into
the air and over my pounding fist. He shot charge after charge as if he would
never stop, then suddenly relaxed all over, his eyes closed, his breath coming
in short, shallow gasps. I stopped stroking his beautiful cock and lay across
his body, my ear pressed to his pounding heart.
When he slowly opened his eyes, I brought
my hand to my mouth and, as he had done, licked the taste of Luke from it.
Luke looked at me, smiled, and said, "Matt, Babe, you give me more pleasure
than I ever dreamed possible," and brought my mouth to his, his tongue sharing
his gift to me.
As he broke the kiss, he reached for
my Lakota arrow, but I pushed his hand away, crawled atop his body and pressed
my lips to his, hard. Then, looking into his eyes, I said, "Today was yours.
I now know that giving you pleasure does not short-change me." Luke wrapped
his arms around me and we lay together, the sun warming our bodies and making
us drowsy. Before I knew it, I had fallen asleep. Perhaps half an hour later,
I waked up to see Luke lying beside me, his day-brightening smile covering
his face, his eyes shining. "Why did you let me sleep?" I asked.
"Because I could just lie here and
drink in the beauty of my Lakota warrior, feel his heartbeat and sense his
love for me. Now, it's time for me to use that warrior's arrow." With those
words, Luke started kissing me, running his hands over my body and within
seconds, the Lakota arrow was hard, straight and true--ready for action!
It got it from Luke, my Yonghon Tongmu.
After resting in each other's arms
and enjoying the afterglow of having made love, Luke picked me up, ran to
the falls basin and tossed me in, diving in right behind me. Once again,
we swam and enjoyed being, period. Mr. Mitchell would have been proud of
his students.
"We need to go into town, Matt, and
pick up our tux," Luke said as we walked to the Jeep. We did that and Luke
asked me to go by an electrical shop where he picked up two motors. He then
asked me to take him by a scrap yard where there were some gears and metal
pieces waiting for him. When I looked puzzled, he gave me the dimple treatment
and said, "Don't ask".
I dropped Luke off at his studio and
drove home. Before I left he said, "Just leave my tux at your place". I went
into the house, hung the tux in my closet and looked over the music for Sunday.
It would be Low Sunday and the music was the easier pieces from last Sunday,
so I worked on some rough spots in the concert pieces which Paula, Eugene
and I had discussed after practice yesterday. The music was actually coming
along better than I had dared dream.
When I heard Mom and Dad come in, I
went downstairs and asked, "What was going on at school today? Why did Ms.
Jones call teachers in? Why was the sheriff at school?"
"It seems," Dad said, "that when Marshall
Tucker was ordered off the campus, he left with two other students, Orie
and Jake. Both were supposed to be in Coach Dallas Mason's class, and when
the undercover custodians told Ms. Jones the three had left, she suspected
they would not be reported absent. The absentee list each teacher turned
in was checked against that teacher's roll book and, sure enough, Coach Mason
hadn't marked the two absent on either. Ms. Jones has told Coach Mason to
be in her office at 8:00 in the morning for a conference. I suspect she knows
more and that he is about to get in real trouble. He let those guys in the
gym and everyone knows it."
"But why were the police there?"
"All this is from a high administration
official, you understand, and is not to be repeated; well, I know the--what
is it now, the Fellowship of the Rings?--will have to know, but don't let
it out where you heard the news, although it will probably be all over school
before the first period bell. With Mr. Tucker's fit today, the three who
had not been fingerprinted have all donated their fingerprints--his was the
last. The police were there to pick up the paperweight and a couple other
things."
I laughed, "If Orie hadn't been stopped,
Linda would have had to submit her private parts to be checked for Orie's".
"Matt!" Mom exclaimed, then smiled.
"By the way, I liked not only how Bill took care of any problem with the
rings, but also the fact that it indicated the boy reads. Oh, I almost forgot,
Millie came by school after you and Luke had left with envelopes for a group
of students. Mary Kathryn has Luke's."
I opened the envelope and found an
invitation inside which read, "Mrs. Millicent Willingham and Mr. Eugene Willingham
request the honor of your presence at an after-prom supper and dance. Invited
Independence High School students only. Regrets to Mr. Willingham."
"Leave it to Millie to take care of
her kids," I laughed. "There is an after-Millie's party at the falls," I
said. "Ok?"
"Sounds like a grand idea to me," Mom
said. "You can all change here."
"I suspect we'll change at Eugene's,
if not then here."
We soon had supper and then it was
off to choir practice for me. When I got home, I went upstairs, undressed
and tumbled into bed. "So much to be thankful for," I thought as I drifted
off to sleep.
When the Fellowship of the Rings arrived
at school Friday, I told them what I had learned from Mom and Dad. No-one
was surprised. When Orie roared into the parking lot, his gang was with him,
including Marshall. They got out of the car and swaggered around the parking
lot before disappearing into the gym. "Well, how do you like that?" Bill
asked. "Marshall is supposed to be out of school and arrested if he comes
back on campus. I wonder what's going on?"
"They're up to no good and you can
bet the farm on that!" Linda exclaimed, just as the first bell rang.
In homeroom, everyone was chattering
about what had happened yesterday, and no-one seemed to know what was going
on today since several students saw Marshall go into the gym. Today was the
final announcements by those running for student body president and, as usual,
Michael's video was slick and impressive. Voting took place immediately after
the videos, with the results to be announced at lunch. When the bell rang
for classes, those going toward the front of the building were surprised
to see Marshall, in handcuffs, being put in a sheriff's car.
At lunch, the whole school was abuzz
about Marshall, and a few students commented on the fact that Coach Mason
had not shown up for his classes. As Luke and I passed through the commons
area, the remaining five of the jock gang were being escorted to sheriff's
cars. "I guess the fingerprints clinched the case," Luke commented. During
lunch, there was tension in the air, waiting for the announcement of the
election results.
Before the bell ending lunch, Ms. Jones
came on the intercom and finally the student chatter in the cafeteria calmed
down for her announcement. "Students, I am happy to announce the results
of today's election. A total of 618 votes were cast. The results are as follows:
Michael Andrews, 407 votes." The cafeteria went wild. The count for the other
candidates didn't matter. Michael had won with over two-thirds of the vote
cast. For the first time I could remember, there would not even be a runoff.
When the shouting and cheering died down, Ms. Jones said, "From what I hear
on my end of the intercom, you didn't hear the count for the other candidates.
Phillip Harris, 56; Junior Johnson, 35..."
"So much for the football jocks," Bill
laughed.
"... and Jacob McAllister, 120."
"Given the landslide victory of Mr.
Andrews, the basketball jocks didn't do so badly," Bill grinned.
"I'm sure there would not have been
a landslide without your support," Michael said, as he reached across the
table and shook hands with Bill. "Welcome aboard to the new student government,
Mr. Secretary of State. How do you think we can work with Jacob since he
will be Vice-President?"
"He's a really nice guy, immature,
but next year? I think we can make a real man out of him." As Bill was talking,
Jacob walked up, extended his hand to Michael and said, "Hate to say this,
but it's true, the best man won. Congratulations."
"Thank you, Mr. Vice-President. Shake
hands with our Secretary of State." Bill extended his hand, the two shook
hands, embraced and patted each other on the back. "Why don't you join us
for the few minutes of lunch left?"
"Thanks, I will." We had only a few
minutes left before the bell, but I was impressed by Jacob. Sure, he was
immature, but I could see an ongoing "Select Few" or possibly "Fellowship
of the Rings". Maybe Mr. Swartz would sell more Hopi rings than he thought!
When Luke and I left, a sheriff's car
pulled up with Coach Mason in the back seat. An officer got out, went inside
and came back quickly with an envelope under his arm, got in the car and
left. "Well, I guess we know why Coach Mason didn't show up for class today,"
Luke said.
As we drove through town, the local
rag was being prepared for delivery and I saw a headline which had "Coach"
in it. I pulled to the curb and Larry bought one from the man getting ready
to distribute them. He read the article under the headline as we headed for
the country. "Coach Dallas Mason, Independence High School's head football
coach, was arrested today as an accomplice to six students who have been
charged with vandalism," he read. "One of the six has an additional charge
of criminal trespass lodged against him. The Sheriff refused to comment further
except to say other charges might be brought later." The rest of the article
stated that the six had allegedly been admitted to the school after hours
by Coach Mason where they had spray painted derogatory slogans on the campaign
posters of Michael Andrews, a candidate for student body president. "Guess
that takes care of that," Luke remarked.
Well, apparently the case was solved.
The local TV evening news from Lexington carried a story about the arrest
and used footage from the memorial service to pinpoint who Michael was. The
end of the story caused Mom and Dad some concern since it stated that the
six students and the coach had been released from jail almost immediately
on bond. "I don't think there is anything to worry about," I said. "Surely
they have enough sense to realize they are in deep doo-doo."
"I don't know," Dad said. "You would
have thought the three who were involved in abusing Gregory would have learned
their lesson, but apparently they did not."
I didn't have time to worry about that
since the Fellowship of the Rings was going back to the school at 7:00 to
help decorate for the prom. We didn't finish until well after midnight--of
course we could have, but we were having too much fun. Since tomorrow night
was the big event, we all went home and, I guess, tumbled into bed and were
asleep shortly thereafter. We had all agreed we would sleep late.
The guys were picking up the girls
and bringing them to my place where the limo would pick us up for dinner,
then take us all to the prom. Bill, of course, had been invited to join us
and getting reservations for two more at dinner was no problem. Paula was
coming to my place early to get dressed. What Mom and Mary Kathryn had cooked
up for her to wear was still a big secret.
Luke borrowed the Jeep at 5:00 to go
get her and, when he got back, we got our things and went to his house to
dress. Our reservations for dinner were for 7:00 so we didn't have a lot
of time to play around. Well, we did take longer than was absolutely necessary
to shower, but I mean we didn't do more than wash each other and shampoo
each other's hair. Ok, so we did stop now and then for a kiss but, I mean,
we're horny almost-eighteen-year-olds in love with each other! After the
shower we dried each other's hair. Luke still had not cut his hair and it
was now a frame of soft, pale gold curls around his heart-stoppingly handsome
face. I had more hair, obviously, but it was straight, straight. His curls
took longer for me to dry than my hair did him. When my hair was dry, Luke
brushed it until it shone. "Up or down, Luke, Babe?"
"Loose bands. I'll have it loose later,"
he asked, giving me the full dimple treatment.
When we had gotten dressed and went
downstairs, Gabrielle had to take a couple dozen pictures it seemed, "just
in case" she didn't get some later with our dates. Just before the last one,
Luke pulled me into his arms and gave me a tongue-in-the-mouth kiss. Gabrielle
made sure she got that.
I dropped Luke off at my place, then
went to pick up Linda. Eugene and Larry were already there, looking classy
in real tux. Linda was right; her cousins were real lookers. One was dressed
in a deep red gown which showed off her blond, blond hair and the other,
in a deep rich blue, was equally stunning. But neither could compare with
Linda. She was absolutely radiant. Had I been as straight as Bill, I think
she might have had my bod! She was wearing a rich forest green shimmering
gown which made her eyes look green and they were sparkling. Of course her
mom had to take a dozen or so pictures before we could leave. "Enjoy yourselves,
children," she said as we were leaving.
"We will,"one of the twins said.
"Remember, your curfew is 1:00. I promised
your mother."
"They'll be home on time, on my word
of honor," Larry responded.
"I'll see you sometime tomorrow, Mom,"
Linda said.
"She'll be at church," I joked. "If
I have to go, she has to go and I couldn't find a substitute organist."
When we reached my place, parents were
milling around with cameras and camcorders. Everyone was present except Paula
and Mary Kathryn. "Where's Paula and Mary Kathryn?" I asked.
"Don't know. Michael and I were told
just to be patient," Luke answered.
Just then Mary Kathryn came out of
Mom's room, earning a whole bunch of wolf whistles. She was dressed in a
form-fitting black dress which had silver threads all through it, and had
a silver and black band around her head. Her body had sure changed since
she had gone skinny dipping with us a few years ago! I could see Michael's
eyes pop out and his mouth drop open. "Michael, if you don't shut your mouth
you'll drool on your tux," Luke laughed.
"Ok, studs, you've got a good collection
of beautiful women here, but I'm telling you, Luke wins the prize. Matt,
you have competition," Mary Kathryn laughed. Everyone joined her, except
the twins who looked a bit puzzled. No wonder. "Ok, Paula, we're ready. Mom
walked down the hall from her room, hiding Paula until she reached the door
of the living room where she stepped aside. The doorway framed a beautiful
woman. I wondered why I hadn't thought what was up as soon as I saw her.
She was dressed in a red and gold hanbok, the Korean national dress Mom had
worn as a young, unmarried woman. It, of course, accented her dark beauty.
Mom had done her hair in the traditional Korean style of young, unmarried
women. She had a long gold pin through the back of her hair with red and
gold ribbons over the ends and hanging beside her face. "Folks, you just
can't beat a few thousand years for real style," Mary Kathryn announced.
I don't think anyone would have disagreed. More and more pictures. Then Dad
came in and said, "The limo's here. Is he bringing you back from the prom?"
"Darn! I forgot about that. He's just
taking us to the dinner and then the prom," Linda wailed.
"No problem," Greywolf responded. "David,
Jens and I will take the Jeep, Eugene's and Bill's cars over to the school,
and Yong Jin can pick us up. The prom's over at midnight?"
"Supposed to be, but you know it always
goes over until 12:30," Michael said.
"Ok, we'll have the cars there by midnight."
We all piled in the limo, gave the
driver a couple of CDs and off we went.
We caused quite a sensation when we
walked into the restaurant: six guys in absolutely classical tux with six
beautifully dressed, stunning women on our arms. Dinner was a blast. Sure
enough, Linda's cousins had started working on Eugene and Larry early. Every
time they did something to get the guys warmed up, Linda almost burst out
laughing. We had to have a toast--sparkling grape juice, sad to say--to Michael's
victory, and one to Bill for his leadership and principles and his appointment
as Secretary of State. In spite of the fact we were dressed as real adults,
our teenage appetites were evident as we ate like pigs.
We had planned to arrive a little late
at school. I mean, if you're going to make a grand entrance, you can't be
early or even on time. When the limo pulled up, students who had not gone
inside gawked and, when we walked in, everyone stopped what they were doing
and watched us as we walked to our table.
We had a blast at the ball, dancing
every dance and, since Michael and Mary Kathryn were the only couple among
the couples, we kept switching partners. It mattered not who was dancing
with Paula, they never got to finish. Someone always cut in. At eleven, Ms.
Jones went to the bandstand, took the microphone and announced, "The junior
and senior advisors have tallied the votes you cast after the first dance
for prom king and queen. If you will clear the floor for the king's and queen's
dance." The students all moved to the edge of the dance floor. "Mr. Luke
Larsen, prom king, the floor is yours for your dance with your queen, Ms.
Paula Wright!" Luke bowed to Paula, extended his arm and walked her to the
center of the room. The band started playing a slow dance tune and Luke and
Paula started dancing. After a few minutes they separated, and Paula came
to me and Luke went to Mary Kathryn. In good Independence fashion, as each
new dancer was added to the floor, they soon broke and picked two new partners.
Of course, the cousins--Linda's and Bill's--were included very early on,
and as soon as they had had their spin, Michael and Luke started picking
some of the least popular girls, ignoring the IN-crowd. Took me, Eugene,
Larry and Bill a minute to catch on, but soon the in-crowd--male and female--learned
what it felt like to be chosen last.
At midnight, Ms. Jones again took the
mike and commented on what a grand prom this had been. Then she said, "I
was really surprised at the request, but both your prom king and student
body president-elect asked for the same song to end the night. I think I
was even more surprised when the band knew it. Last dance." As I guided Linda
to the dance floor, she said, "You'll just have to close your eyes and pretend
I'm Luke and I'll pretend you're Bill.
I looked at her and smiled, "I'm afraid
your job will be easier. You're soft and have bumps in front! Luke doesn't!"
She laughed, tiptoed and kissed me on the mouth. "Well, that'll help," I
laughed. We were about half-way across the dance floor when the band started.
They were playing "More"! As I started dancing with Linda, I looked across
the floor at Luke and saw a huge grin on his face. When I looked at Michael,
I couldn't see his face. His lips were planted firmly on Mary Kathryn's as
they danced.
As soon as the last dance was over,
we went outside where the cars were waiting. Greywolf came over with David
and asked how we were going to divide up. "Luke can take the Jeep since he
and Paula are together. Michael and Mary Kathryn can go with him. Linda and
I can go with Bill and his date and Eugene and Larry can take their dates."
"Ok, but Matt, be sure Luke has your
cell phone. Here is mine for you. Eugene, do you have a phone?"
"Yes sir."
"Good. I want you to keep then handy.
Those six hoodlums are free; they have just missed the prom because of you--at
least in their minds you are to blame--and there is no telling what they
might do."
"Dad, I don't think they are that stupid."
"Well, I do. Just keep the phones handy.
And I want both cars to stay together. You can drop off Linda's cousins at
her place then drive out into the country with Bill. Promise."
"Sure, if it will make you feel better,
but I don't think we need to worry."
"I'm a parent and worrying is what
parents are supposed to do." Dad smiled, but he didn't laugh. "David, Yong
Jin and I will follow Luke to Millie's. When you leave there, I want all
three cars together."
"Ok, Dad, see you in the morning."
We drove to Linda's place where Larry
and Eugene were thanked for the evening with a goodnight kiss. The twin with
Larry was giving him a full body press and an all-out goodnight kiss. Linda
and I broke up laughing. We drove to Bill's house, left his cousin and started
back into town. A couple miles from Bill's place, a car came speeding down
the road headed directly for us; Bill was in front and swerved to the side
and Eugene did the same, both almost losing control of their cars. Eugene
regained control first and drove back onto the road with Bill now behind.
As we started back toward town, the same car, which had turned around, came
racing up behind us and started bumping Bill. I grabbed the phone and dialed
911 just as the car dropped back a bit, pulled beside us and raced ahead.
I told the operator where we were and that a car had tried twice to run us
off the road.
She asked for a
description and I handed the phone to Linda who knew Orie's car well. She even
gave the operator the license number.
At the edge of town,
Orie and his gang came racing toward us again. This time they slowed down and
started shouting, "Faggots and fag hags" as they started throwing bottles. One
cracked Eugene's windshield, luckily it did not hit him or Larry, but Eugene was
rattled enough to slow down. Bill did likewise as I started to roll up the
window. Before I had time to close the window, a bottle came whistling in,
tipped the edge of the window and hit me in the head before it bounced into
Linda's lap. I was dazed, so Linda grabbed the phone and dialed
911 again.
"We are fucking under
attack by Orie Greenley and his jock jerks. Damn it, get the cops out here!"
She had barely finished the call when Orie turned around again and was racing up
behind us, bumping Bill's car.
"I'll never tell Dad
not to worry again," I said. "Frankly, I'm scared shitless." Orie dropped back
once more then started full speed toward us again.
"Hold on," Bill said.
"Here they come!" Just before Orie's car reached Bill's, Bill jammed on the
brakes. The impact was hard, but this time Orie's crew, none in seat belts, got
tossed around. As soon as that happened, Orie stopped, jammed his car in
reverse, pulling back away from us and stopped.
Soon it was clear he
had done so only to get a running go at us. Bill laid down on his horn to warn
Eugene and headed for the shoulder of the road. Eugene did some quick thinking
and did the same.
Instead of hitting us, Orie raced into nothing. He floored the car, threw it
into a spin and headed back toward us. It looked as if he would hit Eugene head
on because Eugene was having a hard time regaining control of his car. He just
missed being hit, but Bill had enough time to dodge Orie who went roaring past.
A few yards past us, Orie threw his car into another spin to come back when the
blue lights appeared. Two sheriff's cars raced down the road. One turned
sideways between us and Orie and the other drove past, turned and blocked the
road on the other side. Four officers, two from each car, got out with guns
drawn and walked over to Orie's car. Within seconds, six guys were standing,
legs spread, leaning against their car. All six were cuffed and marched into the
two patrol cars. One officer drove Orie's car onto the shoulder, off the road.
An officer came to Bill's car and another went to Eugene's.
"Everyone ok in
here?" the officer asked.
"I think so," I said.
"You better check him
out, Officer. One of the bottles those jerks threw hit him in the head," Linda
said.
"Let's get you out
and have a look," he said. He shined his flashlight on my head. "No skin broken
and you seem to be doing ok, but you sure have a nice bump there, a real goose
egg. Put some ice on it as soon as you can. Hate to ask you this since it's
pretty clear what happened, but would you object to a breathalyzer test? You
don't have to and I have no reason to believe you've been drinking, but there's
a beer bottle in the car, the one that clobbered you, and this way no-one can
claim you were drunk."
"No problem,
Officer," Bill said. "I hope those six agree as well."
"In their case, they
can agree or disagree. If they disagree, it will be an admission of guilt in
court. There's empty bottles in their car, a couple more six packs unopened, and
several bottles with some beer in them and two open bottles of vodka. No, I'm
afraid they won't have a real choice. But let's get yours over with so you can
get on with your night. You're sure dressed for something. Good looking bunch,"
he said as he smiled.
The breathalyzer
tests took only seconds and, of course, we all blew a zero. When that was over,
the six were hauled out for theirs. A couple times the officers whistled when
they read the results. "Who was driving?" Fingers were pointing in all
directions.
"Orion Greenley was
driving," Linda said. We all nodded.
"Which one of you is
Orion Greenley?" None of them answered. "Doesn't matter. If your parents will
claim you, maybe they will know."
"Officer, all six
were arrested today and are out on bond," Linda said. Not dumb and sure not one
to get pissed off. "Makes our job easier," the officer smiled at Linda. "Now
let's check these cars and see if they are safe to drive."
Bill's car was
damaged where it had been rammed, but that didn't keep it from being safe.
Eugene's was another matter. The shattered windshield was definitely a safety
hazard. "Son, your car really isn't safe to drive. Where are you headed?"
"Home. My mom and I
are having an after-prom supper and dance for friends."
"And who's mom?"
"Millie Willingham."
"Holy shit! Excuse me
miss, I heard Millie had adopted a son, but I expected... I don't know what I
expected, and you have a smashed windshield on Millie Willingham's brand new
car."
Eugene laughed.
"Well, it's actually mine. The Easter bunny brought it."
"Must have been one
helluva big ass rabbit," he joked, then blushed when he remembered Linda was
there. "I know you want to get home and don't want to leave your car. Why don't
you follow us into town if you can see enough to drive." "The break is on the
passenger's side, so I can see. I just don't want the rest of it to come flying
back in my face."
"It won't and we'll
drive slowly. And I think you kids have had enough to deal with tonight and
you've got a supper dance yet to go. It's 1:30 already. Come down to the
sheriff's office sometime tomorrow and we'll take care of the paperwork. No
rush; those six young men have nowhere to go and when they get there, it'll not
be a party." We drove into town slowly and it was almost 2:00 when we got to
Millie's.
When we drove up,
Millie rushed out of the house, grabbed Eugene, then all of us and hugged us.
She was crying! "I was so afraid my babies were hurt," she said. "The sheriff
called and told me what had happened and that you were all right, but I was
afraid he wasn't telling me the whole story. Come on in. We're waiting for you!"
When we got inside,
Luke grabbed me, hugging me close and crying. "I'm ok, Yonghon Tongmu, I just
took a beer bottle to the head."
He looked at my goose
egg, kissed it, then gave me a gentle, soft, tender kiss. "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I
was worried sick," he said and kissed me again.
"I wasn't. I was
scared shitless!" I laughed and the gang joined in, releasing our tension.
"Well, Matt and I
have a surprise if the rest of you are up to it," Luke said as he walked across
the room and opened a door. All eyes were on the door as Sheldon walked through,
dressed as all the men, in a classic tux. He smiled a funny smile as he was
attacked by Paula.
While there had been
munchies at the prom, we had all spent our time dancing, so teenage food
consumption was at its usual level as we attacked a delicious supper at Millie's
some time around 2:30. She had obviously set the table again and it gleamed with
silver, crystal and elegant china. There was wine, of course, and therefore real
toasts to the newly-elected student body president. Michael toasted his
Secretary of State. Bill toasted the prom king and queen and Millie toasted
young love. Everyone had a second glass of wine with dinner and I
was not happy when I
noticed Sheldon had a third, fourth and fifth. Paula didn't seem to notice. She
had eyes only for Sheldon, not his drinking.
After dinner, we went
to the living room which had been prepared for dancing. Larry had taped the
music which began, need you ask?, with "More". We danced until 4:30 and I was
ready for my Luke and the falls, but not before Millie had another surprise or
two. "Before the crew goes running off to the falls to make out..."
"Mama! How could you
think such of these pure, innocent, lovely grandchildren," Eugene said in mock
horror.
"Because, Son, I can
remember, even in my aged condition and senility, being young. Besides, I know
that there have been two head prints on a certain young man's pillows! Anyway,
got a surprise or two. First of all, Matt, I know you looked for a sub for
tomorrow and didn't find one. Well, its been ages since I have played in public,
but I still play some, so you can sleep in, when you finally go to bed and go to
sleep." Luke grabbed me, his eyes sparkling, and gave me a long,
tongue-in-the-mouth, passionate kiss.
"Well, if we can get
on with the program. I have a poster for you to see." She reached behind a wall
table and pulled out a poster announcing the concert and exhibition.
"Luke, this should
definitely be included in your AP art portfolio," she said as she held up the
poster. Luke had done sketches of Eugene, Paula, himself and me in a kind of
fantasy,
ethereal manner in a
slightly darker blue than the pale blue poster background. The lettering was in
a type face most people could associate with fantasy, but was clear, sharp and
very readable. It was done in a still darker blue.
"Great job, Luke,"
Michael said. "Bet you four will have autograph hounds all over you, clutching
posters. "Here are the invitations. I thought maybe we'd have a hundred for the
Saturday night
concert, but if all invited come, St. Mary's will be packed."
The invitations had a
reproduction of the poster on the front with the invitation inside.
"Tickets for the
Saturday night concert are enclosed in the invitation with a note that they may
be given to someone else if the invited person cannot attend. The regular
tickets will be mailed out when people call in for them."
"I forgot to add
Uncle Michael to be invited," Luke groaned.
"Not to worry, Luke.
As soon as you get over the prom, he has offered to help you get the catalog
together and arrange the exhibition. Some very expensive talent you are getting
for free, let me tell you. It costs money to breathe the air as you walk by
Sanders and Sanders Gallery in Charleston! Ok, what next? The Saturday before
the night concert, Luke, Eugene, Larry, Paula and Matt, you are having an early
dinner here with the Oberlin admissions
committee and the
heads of the organ, music, art and mass communications departments. Dress
accordingly, blazers and ties guys. Larry has talked with the audio and video
engineers of the public radio and TV stations. The TV station will do a
documentary on the art exhibition to be broadcast if they consider it good
enough. It will be. The radio station will do the same with the concert. They
are working on a nationwide broadcast on the PBS "Performance Today" program.
The admissions committee will hold individual interviews with you at school
Monday after the
concert. Don't know whether that kills your evening or not, but I just got word
today and wanted you to know what you have ahead of you. Right now, I suggest
you change and get out of here. Oh, David and Margaret got back late today and
you are all having lunch at Michael's tomorrow afternoon. I think that covers
it." We all gave Millie a hug and went to Eugene's suite and changed into shorts
and shirts.
When we started down
the path to the falls, Luke said, "Matt, we forgot blankets, towels, all that
stuff." Before he finished, we emerged from the path. The moon had been waning
for a week so it was not bright, but surrounding the beach area of the basin
were torches, casting shadows about. In a neat stack on the beach were blankets,
towels and a basket of munchies and drinks.
"Sure hope there's
some beer in there," Sheldon said as he spied the tub of ice and drinks.
"Bet you are out of
luck on that one," Mary Kathryn said. She was right of course.
Within five minutes,
five couples had taken blankets and found their own place for some serious
making out. Well, to tell the truth, I guess others were into serious making
out. Luke and I just held each other, our eyes smiling at our love and
exchanging soft, tender kisses occasionally.
"Matt, you know what
I wanted more than anything tonight? I wanted to dance the night away with you.
I wanted to walk to the center of the dance floor and take you in my arms and
dance. I wanted to have you on my arm instead of Paula when the king and queen
were announced."
Luke was being very
serious as he talked softly, but his last statement sent me into gales of
laughter. "Hey, everyone, Luke just called me a queen!" I shouted as soon as I
could stop laughing loudly enough.
"I did not," Luke
shouted and started tickling me. Soon we were wrestling around on the blanket,
tickling each other and trying to not laugh as we kissed each other. It was fun!
We finally calmed down and Luke held me tightly and kissed me. As our tongues
did battle, our breathing became one and, I'm sure, our hearts beat together. As
our kisses became more passionate, I felt Luke's hardness against my thigh as
I'm sure he felt mine.
Just as things were
getting really hot, Michael yelled, "Ok, everyone, in the water!" I looked up
and saw he was naked as a jaybird and Mary Kathryn standing beside him getting
naked.
"Hell, why not?" Luke
laughed. "Babe, I want to see your naked body."
He pulled me upright
and started undressing me. I did the same and soon we, along with Michael and
Mary Kathryn were standing in the dim moonlight, wearing what we had worn the
day we were born. Larry and Eugene were soon as naked as we while Paula and
Sheldon, Bill and Linda looked up in amazement from where they were lying.
Linda said to Bill,
"Ok, I haven't tried to get into your pants yet and I can't if you don't have
any on!" She stood up, grabbed Bill's hand and yanked him to his feet. As soon
as she was standing, Linda started shedding clothes, Bill right behind her.
Michael and Mary Kathryn raced to the top of the falls and dived in. Luke and I
dived in as soon as the way was clear.
By the time we had
surfaced, Linda and Bill were standing at the top of the falls. "Are you sure
this is safe?" Linda asked.
"Of course," Michael
answered. "Just be sure you come out to the edge of the rock where you are
standing and dive. You can swim can't you?"
As if in answer,
Linda dived with Bill right behind her. Paula and Sheldon still had not joined
us, but when we yelled to them, Paula got up and started undressing. She walked
to the top of the falls alone and dived in. A few minutes later, Sheldon finally
got up, undressed slowly and dived in from the beach. He just didn't seem with
it.
We swam for, I guess,
for an hour and even I had blue lips, I suspect, when Luke said, "Enough
already!" and climbed out of the water, grabbed a towel and started drying
himself. I climbed out and finished that job and then he dried me, stopping for
a couple of kisses. Soon everyone was out.
Mary Kathryn
When Michael
whispered in my ear, "Mary Kathryn, I feel like skinnydipping," I looked into
his face and asked, "What's stopping you, Mr. Presidentelect?" "You. I want you
to go with me."
I kissed him, God I
loved this man, hard, strong, handsome, caring, and said, as we had as kids,
"Last one in�s, a rotten egg." Before the words were out of my mouth, he was
standing and stripping off his clothes. "Man," I thought to myself, "all that
personality and a bod to die for!" as I joined him in getting undressed.
Before I was
completely nude, Michael shouted, "Ok, everyone, in the water!" Matt and Luke
couldn't get undressed quickly enough and Bill and Linda were not far behind.
Sheldon seemed reluctant to join the party, but Paula finally dived in and
Sheldon kinda slunk in. There was something going on here and I didn't like it.
After we had been in
the water at least an hour, we were all half frozen. We all crawled out of the
water, dried ourselves, or dried each other. As Michael dried me, he got that
wicked grin on his face, kissed first one nipple, then the other and said,
"Remember the first time we were nude together, I mean after we were grown?"
"Was that you? I
couldn't remember who it was. I seem to remember something a bit larger," I
said, pointing to his joy stick which was hiding from the cold water.
"Sorry, I meant to
tell you. It got hit by a shrinking ray," he joked, as he pulled me to his hard,
naked body for a special Michael kiss.
"Bet I could hit it
with an unshrinking ray big time," I laughed, kissing him back. We lay on the
blanket and, even though it was warm for a predawn April morning, it wasn't warm
enough after the cold water. Five guys got up and grabbed another blanket and
five couples covered up their bare bodies.
As Michael and I lay
side by side, he looked at me with a very serious expression on
his face and said,
"Mary Kathryn, we'll be sixteen soon, sweet sixteen, getting our driver's
licenses and just know we are all grown up. But deep down inside, we both are
smart enough to know we're not. We've got a long way to go before we're really
grown." I looked into the face of the man I loved and nodded. "We're young and
what the future holds, well, we don't know. But I want you to promise me you
will remember that you were loved as fully and deeply as a nearlysixteen-year-old
can love. I know that if there is never anyone else, our love will grow, it will
change, but tonight with every fiber of my being, I love you my wild woman."
"Michael, I'll
promise to remember if you promise you will also remember that on this night you
were loved as fully and as deeply as this woman can love a man, my shining
knight." We sealed our promises with a long, passionate kiss, then I lay my head
on Michael's chest, listening to his heartbeat, warm and comfortable in his
arms. And I slept.
I awoke slowly and
when I opened my eyes, I was staring into Michael's smiling face. "You are so
beautiful when you sleep, Wild Woman. I have been awake just watching you
sleeping and wondering how I could ever love you more." With those words, he
bent his face to mine, placed his arms around me and kissed me softly, gently,
lovingly. His tongue entered my mouth and brought me a warm feeling of being
loved and I returned his love in my kiss.
As he leaned over me,
I felt his hard manhood against my leg.
Breaking our kiss, I
smiled and said, "It seems a night's rest has overcome the effects of
the shrinking ray."
"Actually," he
laughed, "I think it was cured by my aching need to pee!" He jumped up and went
to the edge of the river below the falls and let loose a golden stream into the
clear water.
As if on cue, he was
joined by the other males in the crowd. The women were a little more modest and
went behind a clump of cane. When we came back, we were all, males and females,
shivering in the predawn air, so we got dressed. When we were dressed, I noticed
the first faint glimmer heralding the sunrise. Without a word, I pointed to the
eastern sky and picked up a blanket, put my arm around Michael's waist and he
mine. We started walking to
the top of the falls
and were soon followed by the others couples, all arm in arm except for Paula
and Sheldon who were walking side by side, but not too closely.
Just above the lip of
the falls there was a huge boulder with a flat top. Many times members of the
family had sat there, in silence, facing east watching the sunrise or facing
west to watch it set. Four couples sat, one between the legs of their beloved,
leaning heads against manly chests. Paula and Sheldon sat side by side. Clearly
something was going on. As the sun crested the horizon, I leaned back with my
head on Michael's shoulder and he leaned forward to kiss me good morning.
In spite of the fact
that we had done nothing we had not done before except sleep side by side, I
sensed that the sun as dawning on a new relationship for me and Michael and not
just on a new day. From the time we had started the walk to Lookout Rock, not a
word had been spoken. As soon as the sun was fully up and no longer colored the
sky, we all got up and walked back down to the fall's basin. With few words
being spoken, we folded the blankets,
picked up the towels
and food and drinks. We left the torches in place.
After everything was
loaded into the cars, we drove to Matt's place. When we arrived, Matt suggested
we make as little noise as possible since his parents were still asleep. Before
we entered, Sheldon said, "Matt, could you run me into town to the bus station
in a few minutes?"
"Sure," Matt
responded, "but I thought your bus left at 2:00."
"I changed my plans.
It leaves at 8:00. Give me fifteen minutes with Paula and come on down."
Matt
When the Fellowship
of the Rings got upstairs, I grabbed sleeping bags out of the hall closet and
tossed them on the floor of my room. We may have been awake for the sunrise, but
we hadn't slept more than an hour or two and Linda and Bill, Michael and Mary
Kathryn immediately flopped down on the sleeping bags and were asleep in
seconds. I had told Larry and Eugene to use the bed in the guest room. Luke and
I sat in the middle of my bed, Indian style, or maybe it was Korean style, our
knees together, holding hands and worshiping
each other with our
eyes.
After a few minutes,
Luke said very softly, "Matt, something's going on with Sheldon and Paula."
"Yea. I know he had
until 2:00 when we planned to get him here so why the change in plans? And he
has been acting strange ever since he got here."
"Did you notice how
much he drank at Millie's and expected beer at the falls?"
"Sure did. Well, I've
got to go take him to the bus."
"As sleepy as we all
are, I'm going along to make sure you don't fall asleep coming back." Luke and I
left the room quietly and walked downstairs.
Part Twenty-eight
Luke
When Matt and I walked outside, Paula
and Sheldon were standing on the front porch; Paula was leaning against a
porch column while Sheldon faced her. It was obvious Paula had been crying
and Sheldon looked mostly indifferent. "I'm ready to go," he said, "Paula,
you want to go with us?" Paula started shaking her head then said, "No".
"Well, bye then," Sheldon said, as
he turned and walked off the porch.
The ride to town was done in complete
silence. Sheldon sat in the back seat, not speaking. When we arrived at the
bus station, Sheldon got out and said, "Thanks for the weekend, guys. See
ya," turned, walked into the bus station and didn't look back.
Matt turned the car around and we started
back home. "I don't know what in the hell is going on, Matt, but Sheldon
is a son of a bitch. He was a complete asshole the whole time he was here.
Sure wish we hadn't spent the money to get his shitty ass here, get him dressed
up for the prom queen and give him every opportunity to have a spectacular
weekend."
"I don't know what is going on, Luke,
but I can tell you one thing: we've got a hurting woman on our hands."
"That's for damn sure. Why did that
jerk have to mess up a whole weekend?"
"Maybe for Paula, Luke, Babe, but my
weekend wasn't messed up in the least." Matt turned to smile at me and I
grabbed a quick kiss. "Hey, I'm driving," Matt said in mock horror.
"I know. You're driving me nuts. God,
I love you, Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf."
"About half as much as I love you,
Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu Larsen!"
"Don't think so. Infinity doesn't have
a half. You know that!" I looked at the light of my days and laughed. "You
know, this damn Jeep was not made for lovers," I said as I tried to reach
over to kiss Matt again.
"Doesn't matter, we're home and my
bed is."
At the foot of the stairs, Matt suddenly
swept me off my feet and into his arms. I put my arms around his neck and
kissed him again and again as he carried me to his room. When we got there,
Paula was lying in the middle of the huge bed, curled in a fetal position,
crying. Matt stopped, put me down, and we walked to the bed. Everyone else
was sound asleep as Matt asked in a soft, tender voice, "Want to talk about
it, Paula?"
"No, not now. Later. Right now I would
like for you guys to lie down with me. I hurt."
Matt walked to the far side of the
bed, lay down beside Paula and put his arms around her. I lay on the other
side and Paula put her arms around me and said, "Thanks guys." I started
stroking her hair and saw her gradually relax. In only a few minutes she
was asleep.
Matt raised his head slightly, looked
into my eyes and mouthed, "I love you."
I smiled and mouthed "I love you too."
The next thing I knew, Greywolf was
at the door taking pictures. The flash eventually got everyone awake--not
without a lot of groaning, I might add. Greywolf said, "I thought we really
needed some after pictures to go with last night's before ones. That was
last night wasn't it? It's 3:00 in the afternoon and David and Margaret will
have lunch ready at 4:00. The downstairs bathroom is free."
"Paula, after everyone has had a chance
to pee, you, Eugene and Larry take the downstairs. Luke and I and Mary Kathryn
and Michael will take the upstairs since my stuff is up here. Linda and Bill,
you can split or if not, use the upstairs," Matt said.
"What do you mean, split?" Bill asked.
"Yea," Linda said.
"It's the slow and easy menu," Michael
said. "Where is it, Matt?"
"In the drawer of the night stand,"
Matt answered, grabbed my hand and said, "Michael, give it to Bill."
When Luke and I finished with the ritualistic
morning bladder emptying and returned to the room, Bill was looking at the
menu. "Finish it later," Michael said, headed across the hall, "unless you
can hold it." Bill put the menu on the bed and rushed across the hall behind
Michael. By the time they had finished, Linda and Mary Kathryn were back
from doing their ritual downstairs.
"Dibs on the bathroom," Michael said,
grabbed Mary Kathryn by the hand and rushed across the hall.
"Remember there are other people waiting!"
Matt said.
"And only so much hot water, sister
mine," I added.
"We'll heat it up for you, brother
mine," Mary Kathryn responded.
"You mean to tell me Mary Kathryn and
Michael shower together and are still virgins?" Bill asked with a puzzled
look on his face. "And you and Matt do this stuff and are too?"
"Unless something happened at the falls
last night with Michael and Mary Kathryn--and I suspect it didn't or we would
have heard about it from both of them by now--the answer to your questions
is 'yes'."
"Man, I find that hard to believe.
Well, maybe I don't. To tell you the truth, since I became THE basketball
player, I have had so many girls throw themselves at me and I was so horny
that I could get a fuck just about every night I wanted one. Quickies in
the back seat of the car, in the bushes. Just wham, bam, thank you ma'am.
And you know something, I usually felt shitty afterward because I know I
was just using a warm, moist hole for my cock. Just fucking. I got my rocks
off and I won't say I didn't like that but, to tell the truth, it was just
that--getting my rocks off. It just wasn't fun. Some of this stuff sounds
like fun!"
Matt laughed, "You want to get Michael
going? When he comes back, ask him if he fucks, but be prepared to run."
"Why?"
"Because the first night we all used
the Slow and Easy Menu, Michael said he'd like to go down the hall and fuck
Mary Kathryn. Matt and I had been told by Greywolf that lovemaking was what
it was about and that covered a lot of things--expressing love--but that
fucking was what you just described."
"So we both got on Michael's case big
time, but he got even. I said something about his not wanting to sleep with
a faggot and he almost busted me one," Matt laughed. "We are very careful
about two things around here. One, using the word fuck to describe something
you do with someone you love and two, using lovemaking to mean ONLY intercourse--thus
the Slow and Easy Menu."
"Where did you get this?"
"Dr. Bailey--Margaret Andrews now,
I guess--gave it to Matt and me along with some shampoo, soap and massage
oil. See, when we told the family we were in love, Greywolf asked that we
put off having intercourse until we are eighteen. He didn't tell us or beg
us not to. He just asked us if we would. Given all the family--that's the
big family--was doing for us, we agreed. One day I saw this medallion in
Mr. Swartz' shop and got one for each of us as a reminder of our promise--not
really to the family so much as to each other. Mr. Swartz did all the beautiful
engraving on them. They have long chains which means..."
"Don't they get in the way when you're...
ah... playing around?"
"Making love? That was the idea and
the answer is 'Yes!'."
"Man, you're going to think I'm a fool,
but I think I have missed out on something."
"Interesting thought coming from a
non-virgin," I said as Michael came out of the shower, whistling.
"Man, I love kissing perky nipples,"
he said as he went to the closet for a shirt and to the chest for boxers
and shorts.
"Nothing like it," Matt laughed as
Mary Kathryn came in, a towel wrapped around herself.
"Would you guys mind giving me some
time to talk to Linda?" Bill asked, still holding the menu.
"Not at all. I'll roust Larry and Eugene
out of the guest room and send them downstairs. You and Linda can talk in
there while Matt and I have our shower playtime and Paula and Mary Kathryn
can get dressed. Michael, I guess you'll just have to wait downstairs.
"Be there in a minute," man of mine,"
Mary Kathryn said, grabbing a bag she had left yesterday.
Bill went to the guest room, knocked
and, when he was told to come in, asked Larry and Eugene if they would go
downstairs for their shower so he could talk to Linda in the guest room.
Soon two sleepy eyed studs came out, grabbed towels and went downstairs.
Bill and Linda went to the guest room and Matt and I went to the shower.
There really was going to be a problem
with hot water unless we were careful, so we wet ourselves down good and
soaped each other well, kissing and rubbing against each other all the time.
We rinsed off, dried each other and left the shower. "Would have liked a
bit more playtime," Matt said, holding me tightly and giving me a real good
morning kiss.
"Do you think I don't agree?" I asked
as I returned his kiss.
When we got back to my room, Paula
and Mary Kathryn were gone, I assume downstairs. Larry and Eugene hadn't
started getting dressed and were making out big time. "Ok, studs, break it
up and get dressed, food's waiting."
"Who needs food," Eugene laughed, "when
I have Larry to eat on."
"Don't go there, Lover," Larry replied,
giving Eugene the evil eye.
The four of us were getting dressed
when we heard Linda giggling and saw her and Bill walking toward the bathroom,
holding hands. "More perky nipples are going to get kissed, I bet," Matt
laughed.
"Bill better be careful or he'll get
the Orie treatment," Luke laughed. "I think Linda meant it when she said
she'd sideline him if he got out of line."
Finally all four of us were dressed.
I brushed Matt's hair and he braided it, then he worked on mine. When we
were finished, Bill and Linda came out of the bathroom, each wrapped in a
towel. "No-one told me to bring clothes for today," Bill said, "so I guess
I'll just have to wear what I wore last night."
"I bet you could wear Michael's clothes."
"Not a big help since I'm not at Michael's."
"Michael and Luke both have clothes
here. In fact, we all three have clothes at all three places. Look in the
closet and find a shirt. Michael's shorts, socks and boxers are in the second
drawer of the chest."
"Boxers? I feel like I'm hanging out."
"Look in the first drawer. Maybe you
can wear my size. I have both," Matt said.
"Silk bikini briefs?" Bill exclaimed
as he held up a pair of bright red ones.
"Looks like something for the cheerleaders'
stud to me," I laughed.
"Ok, I know I can't go back, but can
I have a new start?" Bill asked, very seriously.
"Sure you can. I'm sorry. That was
a poor joke. No offense intended."
Bill put on the red briefs which were
a bit small, but sure gave him a super stud front, walked over to me and,
awkwardly, hugged me and said, "I know that, but I really do want to turn
over a new leaf. Man, Michael is right, playtime is fun time and I have missed
out by just fucking. And I think I have missed out by being standoffish about
hugging. Being a shithead macho-man sure carries a big price tag, I'm thinking."
Bill finished dressing and when he
had finished, Linda came out of the guest room dressed to kill and had a
smile on her face I hadn't seen before. She walked up to Bill, stood on tiptoes
and gave him a light kiss. Bill blushed!!!
When the Fellowship of the Rings arrived
at Michael's, everyone greeted the newlyweds. Lunch at 4:00 in the afternoon
revealed again the amazing capacity for food of teenagers, except for Paula
who didn't eat enough to keep a bird alive. She tried hard not to be a wet
blanket and would have done a good job except she had eight people who were
sharing her pain without saying so. When lunch was over, Bill offered to
take Paula home, but Matt said we would so he could have time with Linda.
"You two may want to talk some more," he said. Michael was walking Mary Kathryn
home and Larry and Eugene were going to home or homes in the newly christened
Bunnymobile. I had called the sheriff's department and made arrangements
for us to meet there at 8:00. When I asked if that was too late, the officer
said there was no rush because the alleged perpetrators weren't going anywhere.
I wondered what would have been necessary for him just to say criminals.
As Matt and I walked with Paula to
the Jeep, Matt asked, "Paula, do you want to talk about it?"
"I think I need to," she replied.
"With me or Matt or me and Matt?"
"I'd like to talk to you both. On the
drive home?"
"If you like, you know where we all
go, but maybe that's not the place for you."
"I think it is. I really do."
"Ride or walk?"
"Do you mind walking?"
"Not at all," I said. "Until last week,
we always walked. The gate was put in for David's and Margaret's wedding."
Matt snagged a blanket out of the Jeep as we walked past, and he and I took
Paula's hands and walked with her to the falls in silence.
When we reached there, Matt spread
the blanket on the ground and the three of us sat down; still no-one spoke.
Paula sighed several times and said, "First of all, I want to thank you two
for bringing Sheldon here. I was so surprised and happy when he walked out.
You two are so kind and loving and thoughtful and I thank you from the bottom
of my heart for the love you showed me by getting him here on prom night.
And while I'm at it, Luke, you gave me a prom I'll always remember. I was
so proud to be on your arm when the king and queen were announced. And in
spite of the fact that I knew well I was not who you wanted there, you still
treated me like a queen. You are a beautiful man with a beautiful spirit.
And so are you, Matt."
"Well, I believe I was promised a good
night kiss, which I didn't get," I said. Paula reached over and kissed me
lightly on the lips and smiled, but it was a sad smile. "I really want you
two to remember that I really appreciate what you did in spite of how it
turned out."
"Ok, it was obvious Sheldon wasn't
with the program from the time he walked out of the room at Millie's. I know
his ticket was for 2:00 because Luke and I purchased it and sent it to him.
He had to exchange it for an 8:00 one," Matt said.
"Ok, the whole story. You are right.
When I kissed Sheldon at Millie's he didn't pull away, but he wasn't very
interested either. When I kissed him, I knew he had been drinking..."
"Thank goodness he didn't go with us
to take the girls home," Matt commented. "We took a breathalizer test as
evidence that none of us had been drinking when Orie and his crew tried to...
well, I was going to say kill us and I thought they were."
"You saw how he drank at Millie's and
she certainly did. I was embarrassed. When we came to the falls and there
was no beer, he pouted about that. Then he started complaining because we
were with a bunch of fags. I was ready to strangle him at that point and
told him so, but he started pouting more. The final straw was when he insisted
on having sex. When I told him no, he said, 'Look, Paula, I don't know what
your problem is. I came all this way to be with you tonight because I thought
it would be fun. Then I find out there's no beer, you're with a bunch of
fags and you won't fuck. What the shit is going on?' I was so angry I didn't
know what to do. Then when everyone decided to go skinny dipping, I thought
he'd come around. Instead he said, 'You expect me to get naked among a bunch
of faggots or you to get naked and us not fuck? What kind of goody-two-shoes
are you?' I told him I'm the kind that doesn't fuck and doesn't plan on fucking.
With the right person with whom I am in love, I expect to make love big time,
but just fucking is out. 'Well, shit,' he said, 'I could have saved myself
a trip and been screwing Saturday night as I usually do. I have no trouble
getting a piece of ass when I want it from a girl who enjoys my big cock
in her pussy.' I was sick to my stomach, but decided I wasn't going to ruin
a beautiful night for people who knew what love meant so I joined in the
swim. I guess Sheldon decided he may as well pretend he was a part of the
party so he finally crawled into the water like the snake he is. When we
finished swimming, he started the 'I wanta fuck' bit again and I told him
if he didn't forget that, he wouldn't have anything to fuck with when I finished.
'You can bet on one thing,' he said, 'I'll be out of this shit hole as soon
as I can. There's a bus at 8:00 and I'll be on it.' I told him I hoped so
and that he'd never show his face in Concord again. 'You can bet on that,
goody-two-shoes,' he said. This morning he told me he had a high school crush
on me, but he was seeing and fucking--he got right in my face to say that--an
older woman--the assistant manager of the store where he works--'and she's
not interested in all that silly love talk and hand holding, she just likes
for me to fuck the hell out of her and I like it!' So that's the story."
Matt and I were silent as Paula fell
silent. Finally she said, "Guys, I was in love with Sheldon. You knew him.
He was kind, loving, gentle. We had fun together and talked about our future
together. I don't know who this creature is that showed up in Sheldon's skin.
I don't feel like we have broken up--I've been through that a couple times--
instead I feel like someone I loved has died. That's it. I feel as though
Sheldon is dead. I feel as much that way as I did when my dad died. But he
wasn't around after he died. Sheldon's body was still there after I realized
the Sheldon I knew was dead."
Paula started weeping softly and Matt
pulled her to himself and said, "Cry it out, Lady. Cry it out." When Matt
said that, the dam broke and Paula was crying her eyes out. I moved closer
to her and Matt and I both had her wrapped in our arms. I started stroking
her hair and Matt was singing some tune softly, and Paula cried great cries
and Matt and I were both weeping softly with her.
It was minutes before Paula's tears
stopped, and Matt and I still held her as we watched the river in silence.
She finally said, "I'm ok now. I know I have some grieving to do. I've been
there, but Sheldon is dead, dead, dead. And I'll tell you one thing: if the
choice is between friends and fuck partners, friends win hands down," she
smiled.
"Even if they're faggots?" I smiled
back.
"Even if they are men and lovers. We've
about had enough with the 'f' word this week," she said, slapping me gently
on the cheek, then kissed me again, then Matt. "I think it's time we got
downtown to deal with another bunch of jerks," she said and added, "Thanks
guys, you are true friends."
"We try to be," Matt said. When we
stood up, I grabbed the blanket and Matt and I put our arms around Paula's
waist and we walked to Matt's place. When we got there, Paula said she was
ready to go home and asked both me and Matt to go with her. When we reached
her place, she walked in, grabbed her mother and started crying again. Ms.
Wright motioned Matt and me to chairs while she held her daughter close,
looked at Matt and me and raised an eyebrow.
"I'm afraid Matt and I are to blame,"
I said. "As you know, we got Sheldon here for the after the prom party and
that was a mistake."
Paula looked up and said, "No, it was
not a mistake. Had you not done so, I might have gone on thinking there was
a Sheldon I loved. Mom, he is a complete jerk asshole." Matt and I looked
at each other; we had never heard Paula use such language. "He is no more
the man I knew before he moved than is the man in the moon. I told Matt and
Luke it was as if the Sheldon I knew was dead--he is dead--and I'll have
to get over his death. I don't know, and don't want to know, the Sheldon
who was here this weekend."
We talked with Paula and Ms. Wright
about what had happened to Sheldon for a few minutes and then she asked about
the prom. Even Paula's face lit up when she started talking about the prom.
"Mom, Luke and I were the prom king and queen!" We talked about supper at
Millie's and what we faced in a few weeks with Oberlin and about the night
at the falls. I was afraid Paula would be upset again, but she wasn't.
When she mentioned our swimming, Ms.
Wright said, "where did you get something to wear in the middle of the night?"
"We were born wearing it," Paula laughed,
a real Paula, charming laugh.
"Paula!"
"And I'll do it again if I have the
chance. It was wonderful." Her mom was obviously pleased that the whole weekend
had not been ruined for Paula.
"Luke, I've got to go. I have to be
at the sheriff's office shortly," Matt said. "See you Monday--ugh, tomorrow,"
he said to Paula. Ms. Wright had a strange look on her face and Matt said,
"We're clear. Paula can tell you all about it."
Even though I wasn't involved in the
Saturday night mess, I was with Matt so I went to the sheriff's office with
him.
Matt
When we arrived at the sheriff's office,
we were met by four deputies who took Linda and Bill, Larry and Eugene to
separate rooms. Luke and I sat waiting for a few minutes when the sheriff
came in. "Sorry I'm late, we've got something else going on," he said. "Were
both of you involved in Saturday night's adventure? I thought there were
only five."
"You're right, Sir. I'm Matt Greywolf.
My friend is Luke Larsen," I motioned to Luke.
"Nice to met you, Son," the sheriff
said, extending a huge hand to Luke. "You must be Jens and Gabrielle Larsen's
son."
"Yes, Sir," Luke answered, shaking
hands with the big man.
"And there can be little doubt you're
Greywolf's and Yong Jin's son," he smiled, again extending a hand.
"Yes, sir," I answered. "I think I'd
have a hard time denying that," I laughed as I shook his hand. "I'm Matt,
Matthew Greywolf."
"One of the bad things about my job
is that I seldom get to meet decent kids. If I'm not careful, I begin to
think all are like that bunch locked up upstairs. Again, I'm sorry I'm late,
but we have had a crew of lawyers here all day trying to get those six out
of jail and then something else broke. Not free to talk about it, but it
would be worth your while to see the eleven o'clock news. Well, Matthew..."
"Matt, if you would, Sir."
"Ok, Matt, if you'll come into my office.
The four rooms we usually use for getting information are in use." When we
got inside, the sheriff asked if I wanted a lawyer and if I objected to having
the conversation recorded. I told him no to both questions and he asked me
to identify myself with my full name and then to tell him what happened.
From time to time he stopped me and asked a question, so it was half an hour
before he was satisfied. "Thanks for coming in," he said. "I am extremely
pleased no-one was hurt. Few people realize that when a bottle is thrown
out of a car, it is traveling at the speed of the car plus any extra speed
the thrower gives it. It could have done major damage as is evidenced by
the windshield of Mr. Willingham's car. You're lucky--since this happened--that
it hit the edge of the window first. By the way, do you mean to tell me Millie
Willingham gave that new son of hers that car?"
"I'm not sure, Sir. She says the Easter
bunny brought it."
"Damn! I sure would hate to run into
that rabbit in the dark. Must be one helluva rabbit," he laughed.
"'Bout Millie's size," I grinned, and
the sheriff let loose a huge belly laugh.
"Then I know I wouldn't want to meet
him in the dark if he's like Millie! Sure wish there were some way I could
spend more time with good kids. I'm sure missing a lot. Thanks again for
coming in and I don't think you will have to worry about those six for a
while." He rose, extended his hand and, after we shook hands, he led me out
of his office.
The others had finished as well and
were standing waiting for me when two officers came in with Rev. Jonathan
McBride of the Temple of Praise. The Reverend was in handcuffs and shouting,
"I demand a lawyer."
"Take him in the back, fingerprint
him and put him in a cell after he has called his lawyer," the sheriff said.
"Remember, Matt, watch the eleven o'clock news. Bye, kids, and thanks again,"
the sheriff said, holding the door for us.
As we passed David's, I noticed his
van was not outside or in the garage. When we got to our place, the whole
family was there. "What's going on? Luke asked as we walked in the door.
"I'm not sure," David answered. "A
former member of the Temple of Praise who left before I did, called and said
I should watch the eleven o'clock news. Also, we all wanted to hear a report
from your visit to the sheriff's office, so we just sorta met half way--at
the Greywolf's. How did it go?"
"Fine, I guess, all we did was give
statements. By the way, the sheriff also said to be sure to watch the eleven
o'clock news and while we were leaving, the Rev. Jonathan McBride was brought
in--in handcuffs, screaming for a lawyer." Mom, Margaret and Gabrielle brought
sandwiches and drinks into the den and we all settled down to eat and wait
for the news.
"I told David and Michael I was glad
to arrive when there was some activity going on," Uncle Michael laughed,
"but I had no idea just how much was going on. Who is this Jonathan McBride?"
David explained who he was and that he had stayed in the Temple of Praise
until he couldn't stand the blasts against gays any longer. By the time Uncle
Michael had been filled in on the situation, it was time for the eleven o'clock
news.
The anchor opened by saying, "Good
evening. We have late-breaking news from Concord. As we reported last Friday,
six Independence High School students and the head football coach were arrested
on charges related to a break-in at the school and vandalism. The six students,
who were out on bond, were re-arrested Saturday night on charges related
to an attempt to drive two cars, driven by Independence students, off the
road and to attacking the five students in the cars by throwing beer bottles
at them. Three of the six had been given a suspended sentence by the juvenile
court earlier in regard to the rape and abuse of Gregory Burnette. Gregory
has since committed suicide and WLEX broadcast a penitential service for
Independence High School students combined with a memorial service for him.
Michael Andrews, who initiated service, was running for student body president
when the break-in occurred and his campaign posters defaced with derogatory
words. Matthew Greywolf, organist for that service was injured slightly on
Saturday night by one of the thrown beer bottles."
"This afternoon, a judge revoked the
bond of the six students and started the process to revoke the suspension
of the three's sentences. All are now eighteen and subject to regular courts.
Standing by at the Concord sheriff's office is LaTasha Jackson, WLEX reporter,
with the latest developments in this case... LaTasha."
"Stu, this case becomes more bizarre
by the moment. After the judge had revoked the bonds of the six students,
parents and lawyers filled the sheriff's department demanding their release.
When Judge Harriett Snow announced she would be attempting to revoke the
suspension of the earlier sentences of three of the students, she was asked
what that would mean. Here's her response."
"It's very simple, if the suspension
is revoked, the three will serve their sentence. Originally it would have
been served in a juvenile facility, but they are now eighteen and will serve
it with the big boys, as they will any other sentence which might come as
a result of these latest charges."
"Stu, shortly after Judge Snow made
her statement, it is this reporter's understanding that the three who had
been involved in the rape of Gregory asked to see the sheriff and a lawyer.
At this time what connection that might have with the events of Saturday
night is not known. Shortly after eight this evening, sheriff's deputies
arrived here with the Rev. Jonathan McBride, pastor of Concord's Temple of
Praise, in handcuffs. Other deputies were carting boxes of what appeared
to be video tapes, two computers, several video cameras and stacks of computer
backup tapes. The sheriff has promised a news conference in a few minutes
which we will carry live. Meanwhile, after the arrest of Rev. McBride, I
was able to interview the senior elder of the Temple of Praise, Elder Eugene
Joyce, who had been waiting outside the sheriff's office. Here is my interview
with him."
"Elder Joyce, WLEX has learned that
the Rev. Jonathan McBride was arrested this evening. Can you tell us anything
about that?"
"I most certainly can. Rev. McBride
was charged with possession and distribution of homosexual child pornography.
Nothing could be more absurd! Rev. McBride has preached and worked against
the spreading disease of homosexuality among the young men in this town.
He has encouraged parents to be on guard against their young males being
seduced into choosing that devil-serving perversion. I am sure, when this
is all cleared up, Rev. McBride will be shown to be a shining Christian knight
fighting this creeping evil and that his arrest is the result of a conspiracy
by homosexual perverts and faggots."
"Stu, the sheriff has just stepped
outside and is standing there for a news conference. Here's the sheriff."
"Ladies and Gentlemen, I have a statement
which I will read. Afterwards there will be no questions. And I would remind
you that, while arrests have been made, all persons arrested are innocent
until proven guilty. Here's my statement."
"Saturday night, six teenagers were
arrested on a number of charges growing out of an attack on two cars carrying
Independence High School students from the school's prom. The six, who had
been suspended from school as a result of a break-in and vandalizing at the
school earlier were, of course, not allowed at the prom and, in fact, were
only out of jail because they had posted bond. This afternoon, when Judge
Harriet Snow announced she was seeking to revoke the suspended sentences
three of the six had received earlier in juvenile court the for rape and
abuse of Gregory Burnette, the three asked to see a lawyer and me. While
I cannot and will not go into the details of our conversation, the three
implicated the Rev. Jonathan McBride of the Temple of Praise in pedophilia
and child pornography. Accordingly, Judge Snow granted a search warrant and
deputies searched the reverend's house and removed from it several hundred
video tapes, video cameras, computers and many computer backup tapes. At
this point all I have to say concerning this is that the reverend is in jail
under $150,000 bond and the FBI has been called in." Reporters started shouting
questions and poking their microphones in the sheriff's face, but it was
soon clear his only addition statements would be "I won't comment on that."
"Holy shit!," Michael exclaimed. "Sorry
ladies--but Dad we listened to that son of a bitch--sorry ladies--for years
while he ranted and raved against homo-sex-uals going to hell, seducing young
boys, corrupting the youth of the land and all the time he was running a
porno business, kiddie porn business for God's sake. Hanging's too good for
him. And just what do you think those three in jail had to do with it? What
about them?"
"I worry about that", Margaret said.
"It certainly seems they were involved in some way and they could be in trouble
in more than one way."
"Yes. If they became involved when
they were younger... well, I must confess that if they have been involved
for some time, I feel sorry for them," Greywolf said, very quietly.
There was a stunned silence in the
room then David said, "I'm sorry, Greywolf, it never occurred to me you would
see another side to this. Not very sensitive of us."
"Didn't expect you to make a connection.
Didn't myself at first, then I had another flashback."
"Flashback? What are you talking about,
Greywolf, I don't understand," Gabrielle looked puzzled as did Jens.
"When Matt told us he was in love with
Luke, I reacted very badly, not because I felt there was anything wrong with
their love..." Matt had walked over to his dad, sat on the arm of his chair
and placed his arm around Greywolf's shoulders. I did the same. "I had a
flashback to my youth, something which hadn't occurred in a long time. Everyone
here knows the story except you and Jens since you had been sent off to the
lake," Dad smiled weakly, then told Jens and Gabrielle what had happened
to him as a youth.
"That sure puts a new perspective on
this situation, Greywolf." Dad said.
Needless to say, school Monday was
abuzz, not with the prom, but with the events of Saturday and Sunday. Well,
that wasn't quite true; Luke got a lot of attention from the girls. Paula
was not lacking in attention either. Guys who I dare say never knew she existed,
were trying to get her attention. Obviously she was not on the top of the
world, but definitely not crushed for having lost Sheldon with his new personality.
Of course, she was grieving for the old Sheldon who, she said, was dead.
Because of Paula and Luke, our table at lunch was a focus for students, but
there was also speculating about what was going on in Concord. Aside from
all the gossip and speculation, school settled down to a routine.
Monday through Wednesday, Luke took
the Jeep and went to his studio. I stayed, to work with the brass and percussion
ensemble. About the only real change to be noticed was that Bill and Linda
were definitely becoming a couple. Linda had dropped the dumb bond cheerleader
act, but that didn't mean she had stopped talking. She, obviously, was right:
some things were just natural for her and talking was definitely one of them.
Not only was Luke leaving school to
work in his studio, but also he was working late every night--often, I'm
sure, well into the morning. About the only time I saw him was the morning
run and our trip to school. After all the excitement, and some pretty exciting
times together, our lovemaking was a few kisses in the morning. Not that
there was anything wrong with those kisses, it was just that they were too
few, and there was nothing else to go along with them.
While school may have settled in a
routine, things had not settled down in Concord. Everyday lunch involved
a discussion of the news from the night before. Monday night covered a protest
by members of the Temple of Praise led by Mr. Joyce. They, of course, maintained
that the Rev. Jonathan McBride was innocent and the victim of a plot by faggots,
homosexuals and their supporters. Mr. Joyce was extremely vocal in condemning
the police, the school board, administrators of Independence High School
and devil-worshiping so-called Christians. There were two or three hundred
protesters demanding the release of Rev. McBride and the resignation of the
sheriff. The protesters were carrying signs, singing hymns, kneeling in the
streets praying and trying to prevent anyone going into the sheriff's office.
Finally, the sheriff had to call in help from Lexington to control the mob.
Needless to say, Eugene was livid.
"How can that man carry on like that," he asked. "He has to have seen the
boxes of tapes, the cameras and all the other stuff."
"You know as well as I do," Larry replied,
"he sees and hears only what he wants to see and hear. Look what he did to
you," Larry continued, "not because you were gay, he didn't know that, but
because... well, because."
Tuesday's lunch discussion revolved
around the report that Jake and the other two who had raped Gregory had been
sent to the psychiatric wing of the hospital in Lexington for observation
and protection. In a news conference, the sheriff said Jake, Danny and Buddy
has tried to hang themselves in their cell and, had Orie and the others not
called out, they would been successful.
"I guess that's what Greywolf and Margaret
were talking about," Luke said.
"What?" Linda asked.
I then told the Fellowship of the Rings
about my dad being sexually abused as a child and how difficult it had been
for him to overcome it. "I guess most people never really recover fully.
In fact, Dad had a flashback when I told him about my love for Luke and I
thought he was going to... well, I don't know what I thought he was going
to do, but I was scared."
"It's terrible, being sexually abused.
And it's also terrible being the abuser." Larry said as huge tears started
running down his face.
I could see Eugene extend his hand
under the table and take Larry's. "It's over, Larry," he said softly, quietly,
tenderly.
Bill and Linda were looking very, very
confused. "I sometimes wonder if it will ever be over. I was trying to cover
up something as I'm sure those three guys were. I know what it's like to
think suicide is a grand solution," Larry said in a whisper.
Bill said, "Look, this may not be any
of my business and if so, say so, but I don't know what's going on." Linda
nodded agreement.
"I'm sorry," Eugene said, "but I guess
it's not something to talk about. Sorry."
"Yes it is," said Larry. "Linda and
Bill are a part of us and they need to know the whole rotten, shitty story,"
and very quietly told Linda and Bill what was wrong. "Eugene and I have been
getting professional help and the Gang of Four, especially Michael and his
dad, have been a tremendous help but, at times, I still just can't handle
it."
Man, I didn't know how Linda or Bill
would handle this latest revelation. They sure as hell had been bombarded
with one thing after another in the past week. Well, I guess I should have
known what Linda would do now that I know who she really is. She reached
over and pulled Larry's head to her shoulder and said, "Larry, I know you
hurt; you hurt because you love. You just have to let the love you give and
the love you receive wash off the shit."
Bill reached across the table and took
Larry's hand and said, "Larry, I'm here for you. I'll do anything I can to
help you overcome this. I know it can't compare to how you feel because you
really hurt someone you love but, man, I must confess I have really been
feeling like dog shit since I realized that even though the girls asked for
it, I was an asshole when I just fucked 'wham, bam, thank you ma'am'. When
I see one of them in the hall and they give me that smile, I want to say,
'Lady, don't you have any love for yourself? Larry, in spite of what you
did, you are still loved and I know--I know--lovemaking for you and Eugene
means more than sex. But I want to ask you the same question: don't you have
any love for yourself? How can you really love Eugene if you don't love the
man he loves enough to die for? You need to think about that."
I thought to myself, "YES!" The Fellowship
of the Rings would be in good hands next year!
Not at all surprisingly, Wednesday
night's news carried more of the saga. Orie, Marshall and Mickey had been
indicted on a whole string of charges--both minor and major. Orie really
got it socked to him because he was driving. His lawyer was screaming and
carrying on in a video clip because Orie had been charged with assault with
a deadly weapon, an automobile, with the intent to kill. Judge Snow was ready
to throw the man out of court, and after she looked at some papers she said,
"That's four counts for each time he threatened those in the other cars.
I'll make that eight if you like since there were two cars he attacked--according
to these statements." Orie had additional charges of driving under the influence,
possession of open container in a moving vehicle--the list went on. The other
five were charged with assault with a deadly weapon--beer bottles. Apparently
all five had left nice, clear fingerprints on the bottles. Another video
clip showed Mr. McBrayer, lawyer for all three of Orie's gang, asking that
the three be released on bond so they could attend school. Judge Snow looked
like a patient mom who had just had her last nerve stepped on. "Mr. McBrayer,
I am a firm believer in education. I certainly am." McBrayer's face lit up.
"In fact I spent many years in high school, college and law school. Now in
spite of that, I may look like a fool, but I have degrees, if you wish to
see them, which suggest otherwise. The last time these three were released
on bond, they allegedly committed enough crimes to spend the rest of their
natural born lives watching the sun rise over razor wire. I may be a fool,
but I'm not a damn fool. Bond denied. However, I have just about wrapped
up this term of court and I have time for their trial next week beginning...
" She stopped, looked at a book on her desk, and said, "Beginning Tuesday
morning at nine."
"Your honor, that hardly gives me time
to prepare the defense."
"Suit yourself. I could use a few days
off and I was only making an offer. If you can't be prepared by Tuesday,
you will have plenty of time to prepare because the next session of this
court will be in September."
"I think I can be prepared Tuesday,
your honor."
"For your clients' sake, I hope so.
Next case."
Next day at lunch we were talking about
the nightly news and Linda said, "Man, that Judge Snow... I like that's woman's
style!" and Mary Kathryn gave her a high five.
"Michael, don't you think we might
give association with these two women some more thought," Bill laughed.
"Don't think I haven't," Michael grinned,
looked around checking for teachers, and kissed Mary Kathryn on the cheek.
Bill started to do likewise to Linda, just as Miss Glaze walked into the
cafeteria, saw him, and her "dental drill in the ear" voice shouted, "Young
man!". Rather than a kiss on the cheek, Bill laid one on Linda's lips, grinned
and said, "I'm a basketball hero. Everyone knows Glazie has the hots for
anyone who can handle more than two balls." Sure enough, she just turned
and pretended she had not seen him.
Thursday, after the morning run, Luke
and I showered together and he had breakfast with my family. When we came
down, Greywolf looked at Luke and said, "Son, you look like death warmed
over. You have black circles around your eyes which would meet in the middle
except your nose is in the way. What's wrong?" I had commented on how Luke
looked earlier and he dismissed it, but he wasn't going to dismiss Dad and,
if he did, he'd still have to deal with Mom.
"Nothing's wrong. I'm fine."
"And I'm the Queen of England," Dad
said. "What's going on?"
"Everything's just fine. Well, actually,
everything is great. Things are going so well that I forget to go to bed.
I know I look like... I look pretty bad. I noticed that when I was shaving,
but I just can't seem to find a stopping place. I am almost finished with
my exhibition and a major piece involves techniques I have never tried before
and I have finally got the knack and I just can't stop."
Luke had pushed Yong Jin's mama button
hard! "Luke, you have recovered from what some of us thought was... well,
we didn't think you would make it. I'm sure, since you are young, you think
you are invincible. You're not. You are allowing yourself to get so run down,
you could easily end up sick--very sick. Just exactly how much do you have
to do?"
"I know I can finish tonight and tomorrow
night."
"Well, that's not going to happen.
You are obligated, I believe, to an hour of playtime this afternoon?" Yong
Jin was not above hitting below the belt.
"I was hoping I might skip that today,"
Luke said, looking at me for support.
"No way, Jose. You owe that to Mr.
Mitchell and I have been starving for your bod, Luke, my man," I replied.
"The old guilt trip," Luke said.
"Whatever it takes," Mom and I said
together.
Luke actually looked relieved. "Well,
I'll take that and take tonight off, but Uncle Michael and I were planning
on starting the photographs for the AP portfolio and the catalog Saturday
and there's no way I'll be ready. Maybe I can...."
"Luke, could I be of help?" Greywolf
asked.
"Well, since I am not including photography
in my portfolio, I guess you could help Uncle Michael, and I could work Saturday
morning, but isn't this a physics makeup Saturday?"
"Would be if it was needed, but it's
not. Uncle Michael and I will handle the photography."
"Well, I'll have to set us a screen
of some sort because I'm working on one of my secret projects. But I can
do that. So today will be free. Luke looked at me and gave me his evil grin
with full dimples.
Thursday afternoon, when Luke and I
came out of school for Mr. Mitchell class, it was raining. "Well I guess
that rules out the falls," Luke said.
"Sure looks like it, I guess we just
have to spend the time in my room," I said as I looked at Luke and smiled.
When we reached the house we both went
upstairs to my room. "I have to use the bathroom, Luke," I said and went
across the hall when Luke went to my room. When I finished and walked back
across the hall to my room, Luke had undressed and was lying, spreadeagle
on his back, sound asleep. I wanted to lie down beside him, but knew if I
went to sleep I would not make it to rehearsal at St. Mary's which Paula,
Eugene and I decided we needed. I moved my desk chair over to the bed and
sat watching Luke sleep. He looked so peaceful, relaxed and beautiful. I
thought to myself, "I am enjoying being alive and so is Luke. The difference
is he doesn't know it. God knows, he sure looks like he needs the rest. When
the time came for me to go to St. Mary's, I bent over Luke and kissed him
on the forehead ever so lightly so as not to wake him.
I knew it would take the buses a while
to get to St. Mary's, so I sat watching Luke for several minutes after the
end of school. When I went downstairs, Mom was coming in the door. "Mom,
when we got home I went to the bathroom and when I got back to my room Luke
was already sound asleep. He is still asleep; should I just leave him sleeping?"
"Of course. He said he would take the
night off. I'll call Gabrielle and tell her he's here. If he wakes up for
supper, fine; if not, we will just let him sleep. That's what he needs."
I got to St. Mary's just as Paula and
Eugene were warming up their groups. "Sorry I'm late," I said.
"We just started warming up," Eugene
said, "and need a few more minutes." Paula's group was doing vocal exercises
and Eugene's were practicing scales. Over all the noise, Paula shouted, "Matt,
if you want to do some exercises, go ahead." I went to the organ, changed
my shoes and started playing a Bach piece. Pandemonium reigned! After a couple
more minutes, Paula shouted, "Enough already!!!" In a minute silence descended.
"Ok, Matt, what do we need to do?"
"Paula, Eugene, I see no reason for
everyone to be here for the parts which are all organ. Also, I think we need
to look at the parts which are all organ and ensemble or organ and chorus
and divide practice accordingly. AP exams are coming up shortly, and I know
we all have a lot of work at the end of school. If we divide practice, there
are times when I can practice alone, other times, chorus and organ, sometimes
organ and ensemble. That way we can get maximum practice, with minimal time
for everyone except me. And after all, this is a class for me, so I should
spend more time here. How about if we have chorus and organ on Monday, ensemble
and organ on Tuesday and everyone on Wednesday?"
"Sounds good to me," said Eugene.
"Excellent idea, I think," Paula agreed.
"How does that sound to all of you?"
I asked the groups. Heads were nodding everywhere. "I guess it's agreed then,"
I said. "I'll see Paula and chorus Monday, Eugene in the ensemble on Tuesday,
everybody on Wednesday and no more Thursdays unless we really need them."
I think that was a wise decision, because everyone worked harder than they
had before. It put no less work on me, but I was off a period a day, every
day, to work on the organ. The chorus and ensemble were doing this out of
their love of music.
We all worked very hard--very, very
hard. Greywolf and Mr. Allen came in to remind us that the time for practice
was over--fifteen minutes ago. I was very, very tired and wondered if Luke
was still asleep as I drove home. When I walked in, Yong Jin said, "I haven't
heard a peep out of Luke. I'm sure he's still sound asleep. I talked to Gabrielle
and she said Luke needed sleep more than food and if he was asleep at supper,
let him sleep. You might want to go up and check, but I suspect you'll find
him asleep." I walked up the stairs very quietly, looked into my room and
saw Luke, now on his stomach, still spreadeagle, sleeping soundly. My handsome,
beautiful man had utterly exhausted himself with his art. I really wondered
what his secret project was which was taking so much time and energy. I guess
I would just have to wait for the unveiling. Luke not only had agreed with
Millie, but also was delighted with the idea that his exhibition would be
shown twice: at the Saturday night for parents and friends and at the open
exhibition on Sunday. I stood at the door and watched him for several minutes,
then turned and went downstairs quietly. After supper, I went to my room,
sat at my desk and did the little bit of homework I had, looked over the
notes Paula, Eugene and I had made today and found I was very tired and very
sleepy. It wasn't really late but I undressed as quietly as possible and
lay down beside Luke. I was afraid I would wake him, but I didn't. Without
waking, he put his arm around me and smiled in his sleep. Drinking in his
beauty, feeling his love, I went to sleep, happy.
Part Twenty-nine
Matt
The sun shining in the window waked
me and when I opened my eyes, I was looking into Luke's face. The sun had
turned his hair into a golden halo and his blue, blue eyes were smiling into
mine. Truly he was my beloved Luke. As I smiled he brought his lips to mine
and gave me a tender, loving, gentle kiss as he said, "Good morning, Dark
Angel."
"Good morning Bright Angel," I replied
as he broke our kiss. "You want to run or play around?"
"Foolish question. You know I want
to play around."
"How about running and then playing?"
"Sounds good, but first, I gotta piss."
Luke hopped out of bed and dashed across the hall with me right behind. When
we had finished that task, we brushed our teeth and Luke took me into his
arms and gave me a real Luke, tongue in the mouth kiss. "That's a much nicer
good morning kiss now that we have gotten rid of morning dragon mouth," he
laughed.
"Sure you want to run?" I asked as
I returned his kiss.
"Well, I guess so. There's something
sexy about your sweaty body that really turns me on."
He was still holding me close and I
couldn't help but observe, "Seems to me you are already pretty turned on
or is that something else hard against my leg?"
Luke laughed and said, "Yea, but let's
run." We threw on shorts--it was no longer cold enough to need sweats--and
a T-shirt and went down the trellis.
As we got to the front, Michael and
Mary Kathryn came running up. "Don't tell me you slept at my place last night,"
Luke said to Michael.
"Don't I wish! No, when I was ready,
I decided to go meet Wild Woman. We're ready to run. How about you two?"
"Matt's been trying to seduce me and
make me stay and play around, but I have resisted."
"He just wants to get you sweaty and
hot," Mary Kathryn laughed and, damn, I blushed. I thought I had gotten over
that.
When we had finished our run, Michael
turned into his place after kissing Mary Kathryn and we slowed down to a
fast walk. "Luke, you sure look a lot better today than you did yesterday,"
Mary Kathryn observed. "I guess Matt didn't keep you up too late playing
around."
"Actually, sister mine, I fell asleep
in Matt's bed while he was in the bathroom yesterday and I didn't wake up
until just before we came out for the run."
"Likely story," Mary Kathryn laughed
as she started running toward home.
"Tell Mom I'm having breakfast with
Matt," Luke yelled after her.
"Tell her you're having Matt for breakfast?"
she tossed over her shoulder.
"Yea, I'm having Matt for breakfast,"
he yelled. When he turned around he said, "Matt, I thought you had given
up blushing," which, of course, brought on a new and improved blush.
"I owe you one, Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu
Larsen!" I said as I punched him on the arm.
He immediately went into the "I'm a
wounded bird with a broken wing" routine. "I'm so wounded, I can't climb,"
he pouted, and went into the house through the front door. When he saw Mom
in the kitchen, he whined, "Mom Greywolf, your beloved treasure has wounded
me!"
Mom said, "If you two don't behave,
I'll wound both of you!" and laughed. "I think we've been through this whole
routine a million times." Mom was right. Luke and I had been playing as we
did when we were just kids. "Breakfast will be in fifteen minutes."
Luke and I went upstairs, stripped
off our sweat-soaked shirt and shorts, and I scooped Luke into my arms and
carried him to the shower. As I bent to turn on the shower and adjust the
temperature, Luke was kissing my back, sticking his tongue in my ear and
reaching around me to pinch my nipples. I turned to Luke, grabbed his head
and crushed my lips against his. We both pushed our hips forward, pressing
our hard man's tools together.
"Babe, we barely have time for even
a quick quickie," Luke said. "Wanna wait?"
"You know I don't want to wait, but
I hate quickies. Let's wait," I said, as I kissed my man. We really didn't
have much play time in the shower, but even less time for serious love making.
We quickly washed the other's hair then soaped each other's body. We were
both still hard and I yelled when Luke reached down and turned the hot water
off. The sudden shower of icy water almost did the trick. We got out of the
shower, dried each other, and I dressed while Luke shaved. He then dressed
quickly and we went down to breakfast--late.
"What was the yelling about cold water
I heard," Dad asked.
"Matt had a little problem--actually
it was a pretty big problem--I had to help him take care of," Luke said in
mock seriousness. I blushed while Mom and Dad laughed.
"He certainly did," I laughed, pulling
Luke to myself for a kiss. And, damn, I blushed again! "I don't know what's
gone wrong with me," I said. "I had just about quit blushing and now I've
started over again."
"Could it be you have something to
blush about?" Yong Jin said with a laugh.
"Mom!" I exclaimed, and blushed again.
Luke, Greywolf and Yong Jin all were about to split laughing.
"Luke, you sure look a lot better this
morning than you did yesterday," Greywolf said. "I'm glad Matt didn't keep
you awake all night."
" You know, yesterday I had two feelings
when I got here. On the one hand, I felt I definitely should go to the studio,
but on the other, I realized I was exhausted and that I did owe Mr. Mitchell
his hour for me to enjoy being alive. I walked up the stairs with Matt and,
when he went to the bathroom, I went to his room, undressed and lay down.
Actually, I barely remember collapsing on his bed. And I had the strangest...
well, I guess it was a dream. I don't know what else to call it. I didn't
know where I was because suddenly there was a gray fog all around me. I was
frightened. I felt I had been there before and I didn't like it. I started
to cry out for Matt when, suddenly, the fog began to lift and I was in a
very pleasant place with sunshine and blue skies. I couldn't see Matt, but
I knew he was near. No longer frightened, I relaxed and soon felt myself
drifting high above a beautiful landscape. I felt as light as a cloud, just
drifting and experiencing a great feeling of peace and comfort flow through
me. I wasn't sure why I could drift in the sky, but it felt wonderful. There
was a delightful scent in the air which I recognized as the fragrance of
Sarang Hanun Pomul. As I continued to drift, I felt closer and closer to
Matt, then I knew he touched my forehead with his lips as he had done when
I was in a coma. I could feel him moving away from me, but he had given me
his strength. As I felt him leave, I slowly drifted to the ground. I was
under a huge tree and I lay down on a bed of soft moss under it. As soon
as I lay down, I fell into a deep, peaceful, refreshing sleep. Then it all
started fading away and I opened my eyes and saw the sun streaming through
the window and my Sarang Hanun Pomul lying beside me. You know, Mom Greywolf,
I think you were right. I was close to getting sick or something. I think
it was the same place I was when I had those awful nightmares in the hospital
only, this time, I wasn't near death, just near being exhausted."
"Sounds very reasonable to me," Mom
said. "You need to remember that and keep it as a warning."
"I also had that sense of Matt's presence
as I did in the hospital. I feel him near sometimes now, but I had forgotten
just how powerful his presence can be." There were several minutes of silence
and the mood had become very serious compared to our conversation before
Luke talked about his dream. I'm sure we were all thinking about how near
we had come to not having Luke. I know I was, and felt a single tear run
down my cheek. Luke leaned over and kissed it away and said, "There, now
it's all better," with exactly the intonation Mom had used as long as I could
remember when she kissed a bruise or boo-boo one of the kids had gotten.
I smiled and Luke and I ate breakfast.
When we got to school, Bill pulled
into the parking lot right behind us, with Paula and Linda with him. Linda
bounced out of the car and said, excitedly, "Paula has good news!"
"Well, is she going to get to tell
us or is Linda the mouth going to?" Luke laughed. Linda put on her pout face
which Bill quickly kissed away.
Paula said, "When I got home yesterday,
Mom was home. Generally I don't see her until later because she works until
time to go to school and doesn't get out of school until 9:30. I asked her
what was wrong and she said, 'Nothing's wrong, things are ok. One of Millie's
lawyers, a Mr. Henshaw, asked me to come to his office as soon as possible
and I left work immediately. When I got to the office, he had a man from
the insurance company there. The long and the short of the story is Mr. Henshaw
told Mom that the insurance company had essentially stalled, believing that
she would take a lower settlement, until he had contacted the state insurance
commission. He told Mom now the company was willing to settle for a little
over twice what she would have received had they paid off immediately. Mom
could take $500,000 and settle or he would be happy to sue for more. The
insurance representative was looking very nervous when Mom said she would
have to think about it and asked to talk with Mr. Henshaw alone. Essentially
she was told if the case went to court, she might get more or just the original
amount after it had been in court for years. 'Millie had me look over your
financial situation. With $500,000, you can be debt free. The farm, which
is prime property, could be leased. The income from that and the interest
on the settlement--even after you pay everything you owe--will get you a
very nice house in town and take care of your living expenses.' Mom told
him she would take the settlement. She came home, called and resigned her
job, called the college to switch to day classes and enrolled as a full-time
student beginning in the summer. The farm is up for lease and Mom is looking
for a house. So..."
There were high fives all over the
place.
The rest of the school day was an ordinary
school day for a change--at least the school day itself was.
Luke
Lunch was normal, if the way it used
to be was normal. We were all talking about Paula's mom's settlement and
how if there was one thing people better remember it was don't piss off Millie.
"I knew Millie packed a lot of clout around here," Bill said, "but, man,
she sent her lawyers to the state and got action." Just before the end of
lunch, I told Matt I would be around after school. "Uncle Michael and I are
meeting with Mr. Stephenson last period so I'll be here to drive you to St.
Mary's--that is, if you can stand spending a few minutes with me this afternoon."
"I've told you I want to spend every
minute with you! But I'm not sure I can take just a few minutes. Besides,
it's Friday. I'm not going to St. Mary's." Matt had that look in his eye
and his smile made the scar on his face stand out. Margaret had been right;
it was damn sexy and was a constant reminder of his love for me.
"Well, that's all you get!"
"Then I guess I better get more now,"
Matt's smile took on a mischievous look as he started rising from his chair
and leaning across the table. I couldn't believe it! Matt was sure as hell
about to kiss me in the middle of the cafeteria. Holy shit! "Matt! Cool it
stud!" I said in a whisper. The whole table cracked up as Matt, laughing,
settled back into his chair just as the bell rang.
At the beginning of last period, I
went to the commons area to meet Uncle Michael, who was waiting for me. We
walked down the hall toward the band and art rooms at the back of the school.
As we neared the band room, we could hear the ensemble practicing. "Luke,
the ensemble sure sounds good. I'm surprised that such a small high school--any
high school for that matter--has such an excellent group. And this is all
their idea?"
"Yes. I guess they are good because
Eugene is excellent and they are doing it out of their love of music. Besides,
it is a real challenge, not just a "please the parents" little concert."
When we reached the art room, Mr. Stephenson
was in his office talking to a student. While we waited, Uncle Michael wandered
around, looking at the art on display and watching students work. He spied
a pot, picked it up and walked toward the window to see it in natural light.
When he turned it up, he looked at me and asked, "This is yours, right?"
"Yes, I took a ceramics class last
year. I must have thrown a ton of clay before I produced that. It was about
the only decent thing I produced, but I like it very much."
"It's very good. Are you including
it in the portfolio?"
"I hadn't planned to. Ceramics is not
a medium I feel comfortable with."
"I think you should include it. It's
a good piece and it would be another demonstration of your versatility. That's
important for the portfolio even if you don't want to include it as a part
of the exhibition." He turned again to the window and continued to look at
the pot closely.
He was still facing the window as Mr.
Stephenson walked up beside me and spoke. When Uncle Michael turned from
the window, Mr. Stephenson practically shouted, "Michael Sanders! I'll be
damned!" Realizing what he said, he turned to the class and said, "Excuse
me, class, but this is a real surprise! I have known Mr. Sanders for years.
Michael, it never occurred to me that 'Uncle Michael' was Michael Sanders
and not Michael Andrews. Michael Andrews is a student here and I assumed
you were Michael Andrews and he was named for you."
"Actually, you are right on both counts,"
Uncle Michael laughed. "It's kinda a long story."
"Come on in the office where we can
talk. Luke, will you excuse us for a few minutes?"
"Sure."
"There's really no need to exclude
Luke unless you particularly want to. He knows the whole story, don't you
Luke?" I nodded and Mr. Stephenson still seemed unsure, but Uncle Michael
took me by the arm and the three of us went into the office. Since it had
a glass wall and Mr. Stephenson could keep an eye on the class, he closed
the door and motioned to two chairs for me and Uncle Michael. "I haven't
seen you for--what--two years now?" Uncle Michael said.
"Two years ago spring break was the
last time I was in Charleston. That, too, is a long story. But what's this
Sanders/Andrews confusion?" Uncle Michael told Mr. Stephenson a short version
of the story he had told us at the falls.
"Of course I knew you and James were
a couple and I always wondered why you had the same last name, but never
asked. Sorry about James, he was a delightful and really talented man. You
have my sympathy. Luke, how did you take the news that Michael was gay?"
"I knew part of the story, that is
I knew David had a brother who had left years ago. I learned the whole of
David's part of the story when Matt and I..." Damn! I had just let something
slip and immediately looked at Mr. Stephenson and felt myself turn snow white
as hot tears started running down my cheeks.
Uncle Michael reached out, took my
hand and said, "It's ok, Luke, what you said or will say is safe with John.
Trust me."
"Luke, I didn't know. But you are two
beautiful men inside and outside and if you love each other, I am happy for
you. I only hope you will have the kind of relationship Michael and James
had.
"Well, I don't know how it will play
out in the long run, but I can tell you, they have no trouble expressing
their love for each other and can make out big time," Uncle Michael laughed.
Suddenly Mr. Stephenson got very quiet.
He looked up and I saw his eyes were moist. "That's why you tried to kill
yourself." Not a question, but a statement. I nodded. "Why not tell him everything?"
I asked myself, took a deep breath and did. When I finished, Mr. Stephenson
was weeping silently.
"Know kinda how you felt, Luke, except
in my case..." I looked up quickly and he nodded, "Yes, I tried that way
out once. That's why you haven't seen me in Charleston, Michael. Luke, you
and Michael have been lucky in love. I think I can say that although you
and Matt have been together for only a couple of months. I know you very,
very well and I know Matt--not as well as you, but well enough to know that
both of you are honest and devoted to everything you do and I have no doubt
you will be devoted to each other. I met Michael when my lover and I--yes,
I'm gay--went to Charleston on what I guess was our honeymoon. We both loved
the place, and on that first trip I met Michael while I was in Sanders and
Sanders, admiring stuff I couldn't afford..." Mr. Stephenson looked at Uncle
Michael and smiled and Uncle Michael shrugged." Bruce and I talked about
moving to Charleston, but I couldn't find a teaching job and, had I done
so, the pay would have been really rotten. Bruce was a contractor who designed
and installed very expensive kitchens. I realize now we could have lived
well on his salary, but he didn't suggest it. So we became part-time lovers.
I spent holidays and summers in Charleston and he occasionally came to Lexington
and we spent a weekend together. Now it wouldn't have mattered if he came
here, but had he done so several years ago, I would have been fired for sure.
So we spent precious months, hours, days together. For five years we were
lovers. Then, spring break two years ago, I went down and he had a sixteen
year-old living with him. I didn't think anything about it when I arrived,
but when it came time for bed, he came into the bedroom with us and Bruce
said, 'It's three way time! John, you're going to love what a young cock
can do for you!' I couldn't believe what I had just heard. I told Bruce there
was no way I was going to get involved with someone who could land me in
jail and we had agreed we were a monogamous couple. He asked me how I expected
him to go without sex while I was here and that Chase, that was the boy's
name, was no more illegal than what we would have done by ourselves. 'Besides,
you'll like what he can do.' I felt as though my whole world had just disappeared.
I just turned, walked out without looking back and walked the streets of
Charleston all night, crying until I had no more tears. At sunrise, I was
somewhere on a waterfront and as the sun came up, I thought, 'It's a new
day for someone, but it's the end of the day for me' and jumped off the dock
into the water."
"When I woke up, I was in a hospital.
I was told that an old black fisherman had seen me 'fall' into the water
and pulled me out. I had stopped breathing and he got the water out of my
lungs and me to breathing again, but I was still unconscious. He literally
carried me to a phone at the end of the dock and called the police who sent
an ambulance. He didn't tell the police his name, just that he had seen me
trip and fall into the water. I guess they believed him because I was released
from the hospital two days later and came back to school. I grieved for a
long time and finally realized I wasn't making any progress so, when the
summer break came, I knew I had to get over Bruce and decided I needed time
alone and a change of scenery. I spent the summer hiking the Appalachian
trail, taking pictures and coming to grips with myself. In language I sometimes
hear around here, 'I got my shit together.' I still missed Bruce--the Bruce
I thought I had known and knew I loved--but I realized I had a life to live
and, there among the mountains, I decided it was worth living." When Mr.
Stephenson stopped talking, there was a long silence as he sat with his head
down. He finally looked up and said, "Michael, as painful as James death
had to be for you, be thankful because he loved you to the end. 'Till death
do us part,' that's what I had said to Bruce, but... Luke, you are a very
lucky man if Matt Greywolf loves you as you deserve to be loved.... Now,
we have an exhibition to talk about."
He and Uncle Michael spent so much
time catching up, there was very little time left--so Mr. Stephenson suggested
he come out to the studio tomorrow and work with Uncle Michael and Greywolf.
"Do you need me to bring my large format camera?" he asked. Before Uncle
Michael could answer, the bell ending school sounded and students rushed
out of the room, headed for the weekend.
When they had gone, Uncle Michael said,
"That would be great." About that time, Matt walked into the office. When
Mr. Stephenson saw him he said, "Hi, Matt, I hope you know you are a very
lucky man. Michael, Luke, I'll see you two in the morning around nine. Right
now I've got to rush. I have a dental appointment."
Uncle Michael, Matt and I walked out
of the building together and when we reached the parking lot, Uncle Michael
said, "Matt, I can take Luke to the studio and you can keep your Jeep."
Matt didn't seem right and I was sure
I knew what was gnawing him. "Matt doesn't go to St. Mary's today," I said.
"I'll go with him." And to myself I said, "I damn well better go with Matt;
we've got a problem."
"See you later," Uncle Michael said
and walked to his car.
"You need to get to your studio," Matt
answered. "You have to get ready for the photographs tomorrow." His voice
was calm, cool--no, cold.
"Matt, I need to be with you and if
I'm not ready tomorrow, too bad. We're more important than any damn exhibition!"
"Ok," was all he said. I don't mean
just then, I mean all the way home. When we reached his place I said, "Just
stop here." He pulled into the drive, I got out of the Jeep, grabbed the
blanket and said, "Let's go." Matt made no response, but followed me as we
walked toward the falls. For the first time in two months, we walked side-by-side
without holding hands. I crossed the canes across the path, spread the blanket
and we sat down. Silence. Just when I had decided I was going to have to
break the silence, Matt--his head hanging down--said, "You told Mr. Stephenson
about us, didn't you? Why, Luke, why?" He looked up at me with tears in his
eyes.
My first impulse was to say, "Look,
Matt, you told half the damn hospital without my knowledge," and caught myself.
I remember how I had reacted then and knew that I was about to do something
we had promised each other we would never do. I was about to intentionally
hurt Matt. I bit my lip and said, "Matt, it just slipped out. Please, let
me tell you what happened and then we will talk about it, please." His head
still hanging down, Matt nodded--thank God--and I told him the whole story.
When I finished, he said nothing for
what seemed hours, but couldn't be more than a couple minutes. Then he looked
up at me, started to say something, but stopped, put his arms around me and
gave me a long, brutal kiss. "Luke, I am so sorry! While you were talking,
I remembered what happened in the hospital when you found out I had told
people and I remembered our promises that we would never hurt each other
intentionally. Yonghon Tongmu, I am so very, very sorry. Please forgive me."
"If you forgive me." His answer was
another passion-filled kiss as he started undressing me, almost ripping my
shirt off. As he undressed me, he started kissing my body all over as I undressed
him. As soon as we were both naked, he climbed atop my body and went wild,
kissing me, licking my chest, and giving me deep french kisses. He was a
Korean Lakota wild man. Damn, I was enjoying my Matt but, when he went for
my manhood, I knew that promises were about to broken and underneath his
fun-loving, seemingly seldom-serious exterior, Matt was a super-sensitive
person and would hate himself so I reached down and pulled him up my body
and brought my lips to his. Matt kissed me passionately, almost brutally,
his tongue exploring all of my mouth. He kept his lips to mine until I realized
we were breathing together. His body was moving all over mine, his arrow
rubbing against my stomach, as mine was his. He grabbed a handful of hair
on either side of my head and pulled my lips to his even harder. I released
his hair and it covered us. I rolled over until I was on top of him, his
hair like a black cloud surrounding his head on the blanket. Both of us were
streaming precum. I started kissing his neck and ears, his chest. Matt was
groaning, tossing his head from side to side. I began sliding up and down
on his now sweaty and precum-slick body. My man's tool was becoming very
sensitive. Suddenly I knew I was beyond the point of no return and, just
as my manhood pulsed for the first time, Matt started shooting like crazy.
He screamed, "Yonghon Tongmu, Yonghon Tongmu" loudly. As I climaxed, I bit
Matt's neck just below his ear where I had been sucking, hard. Spasm after
spasm shook my body with the intensity of my eruption. It was so intense
that my head was filled with shooting stars and I finally collapsed, completely
drained, on Matt's body. I lay still, not moving, my eyes closed.
I felt Matt's fingers in my hair and
then he began to stroke it slowly. When I opened my eyes, he was staring
into them, a sweet, gentle smile on his face. "Yonghon Tongmu," he asked,
"how can you be both so controlled and yet passionate in utter abandon?"
I smiled at my Dark Angel and said,
"I think the answer to your question is that I am hopelessly in love with
Sarang Hanun Pomul and, more than anything in the world, I want to make him
happy."
"Then you need to know you do a perfect
job of that!" Matt said, his eyes smiling as he pulled me in for a long,
gentle kiss. "Yonghon Tongmu, day after day you make me the happiest man
in the world--even when I make it hard for you..."
"No, you don't make it hard for me.
You make it hard for you," I responded with a smile. We just lay, holding
each other, looking into the windows of our souls for a long time. Finally
I said, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I need to get to the studio and if we don't
do a little cleaning up, we'll both have to go, stuck together!"
Matt laughed, stood up, swung his black
mane around, grabbed my hand and started running toward the top of the falls.
When we reached the top, he took me into his arms, kissed me deeply, held
my hand and we dived. After such hot lovemaking the cool water was refreshing,
so we swam for a short time, got out and used our shirts for towels. This
time we did walk across the meadow hand-in-hand. We were about half-way to
his house when he turned and said, "Luke, I really am sorry for what I did
to you this afternoon. It must have made me seem ashamed of our love. I'm
not. I guess..."
"Matt, I know you are not ashamed of
our love and even I can understand, given what we have been through recently,
how telling anyone is frightening. I know that, had you been there, you would
not have been frightened at all, but you weren't. You're sorry for your reaction,
I'm sorry for causing it. It's just one of those bumps in our road together.
Let's hope there are none bigger." I took Matt into my arms and drew his
naked chest to mine. I placed my lips against his in a kiss I hoped would
convey the depth of my love for him, and Matt returned it with equal passion.
As we broke our kiss, I realized that there had been some marks from our
lovemaking before, but this time Matt was going to have a lot of explaining
to do. "Babe, no-one is going to believe we had even the smallest bump in
our road when they see your neck!"
"You don't think I could claim a bug
bite?"
"Not unless you say it's a flea from
Eugene's Easter bunny!" When we reached Matt's place, he drove me to the
studio. "Babe, I won't see you again until late tomorrow afternoon. I have
got to work as long as I can. Dream of me," I said as I kissed him goodbye.
When I got to studio, the first thing
I did was throw up a temporary screen so I could work on my project. I looked
at the one which was completed and was really pleased with it. I would let
the men photograph it tomorrow. I was not sure when the other--much more
complex and difficult--would be completed, but I was sure of one thing: no
project was important enough to take me back to that place where I had been
fighting exhaustion, as I had been the night before, or to drive a wedge
between me and Matt. Sure he had over-reacted, but that didn't matter. Regardless
of the reason, when a wedge came between us it had to be removed. That was
for damn sure.
All the parts for the big piece were
complete and I started assembling it. The work went quickly, much faster
than I expected. Then came a moment of truth. I had a 3 by 5 foot sheet of
glass which was about two inches thick. It had to be lifted and mounted in
framework prepared for it. I struggled with it, trying first one thing and
then another, but there was no way I was going to get the piece in place.
I could manage to wrestle it around, but even if I could get the piece up,
I'd need two more hands to mount it. Damn, why hadn't I seen this was going
to be a problem? Because I was pig-headed and was all-sufficient. Well, there
was only one thing to do. Tomorrow when Greywolf, Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson
came over, I would swallow my foolish pride and ask for help. After all,
Mr. Washington and Herr Dietrich had helped. But of course, they were outside
the family and the piece was a surprise for the family. "You fool!" I thought
to myself, "You can't do it alone. You are going to have to accept help.
You can stay here all night, frustrated, or you can accept that you are human,
one human being, and you can't do everything!" Suddenly I realized I was
smiling. I mean I was smiling before I realized it. There was nothing more
I could do--or needed to do for that matter.
I closed the studio, looked at my watch
and saw it was just past one. When I looked up, Matt's room was dark. My
smile got larger. I walked down the road in the dark of the moon. It had
taken my eyes a while to adjust, but there was enough starlight for me to
manage after I had stood outside the studio for a few minutes, thinking about
how things had changed in the past two months.
I walked slowly toward Matt's place,
climbed the trellis and went to Matt's room. Because the moon was dark, I
could barely make out the body of my dark beauty lying on the white sheet,
but I didn't have to see clearly to again realize how handsome he was, his
long braid lying across his chest. I undressed and climbed in bed beside
him without waking him. He turned in his sleep and spooned himself against
me, his arm reaching over me.
Matt
Luke was working in his studio and
I decided I would finish Monday's homework Friday night to be free should
he have time for us to spend together. Having finished my homework, I looked
over the notes I had made for myself concerning organ parts of the recital/concert.
There were some pieces that needed work--not that I wasn't doing them well,
I just knew I could improve. I wasn't devoting a great deal of time to practice
for Sunday, but I knew St. Mary's wasn't being short-changed. I had been
playing so long that hymns were familiar and the other music was music I
had known for years. I had finished with music by 9:30, and I suppose the
emotional drain of the afternoon was taking a toll on me. I was pretty tired,
but decided I would read awhile before going to bed. After Bill had created
the Fellowship of the Rings, I decided to re-read Tolkein. I had read the
trilogy when I was in junior high and found, as I read the books again, I
was reading a very different story. No wonder Mom's students got excited
when she assigned the Brothers Grimm to senior high school students. Since
I read and re-read those stories, I guess I wasn't conscious of how what
I know and understand, how my feelings and emotions determine much of what
I see when I read. It was an amazing revelation to me. After reading for
about an hour, I undressed, went to bed and almost immediately I was dreaming
of Luke.
Sometime during the night, I sensed
Luke's presence coming closer and closer. Without waking up, I realized he
was beside me and I was happy. I had mentioned to Mom that Luke and I could
feel the other approaching--sometimes the feeling was much stronger or clearer
than others--and that I found this very strange. She said, "Well, I am a
modern Korean--at least a modern half-Korean--and a college graduate, so
I found the whole idea of shaman old-fashioned and superstitious, but when
I said so to my grandmother just after I had finished high school, she said,
'You don't know what you are talking about. Our family has always had members
who were shaman and, unlike most, they have all been males. Not only that,
through the many, many years of our family history, some have passed the
shamanistic power to someone to whom they were close. You'll be convinced
one of these days.' I guess, Matt, I am convinced!" She laughed, but I knew
there was a seriousness beneath her laugh. Me, a shaman? It was certainly
a weird idea.
When Saturday morning came, the sun
woke me and I saw Luke's golden hair before my face. I raised up on one elbow
slowly and looked at my sleeping beauty. How could anyone--even an angel--be
more handsome than Luke Hans Yonghon Tongmu Larsen? The answer was pure and
simple--it was not possible! Even seeing only his back, I had been sure of
that and now that I was looking down on his profile, my heart skipped a beat
at his beauty and, without thinking I said, "YES!" pulling my fist through
the air. "And he's MINE! YES!" As Luke stirred, turned on his back and smiled
up at me, I attacked, planting the day's first kiss passionately, hard on
his lips.
"Dark Angel, what's going on here?
Not that I don't like it!" He pulled me atop his body and placed his lips
against mine, gently.
"Bright Angel, I felt you come to me
last night even though I didn't wake up, and when I woke up this morning
and saw you... Babe, I was just celebrating the fact that you are the most
handsome man in the world and you're MINE!"
"I think I disagree with the first
part of that, but you are absolutely, positively correct about the second.
I am yours and you are MINE!" Luke kissed me quickly and said, "But that
doesn't change the fact that morning wood is related more to the need to
piss than to make love!" We both jumped out of bed and ran across the hall.
That ritual finished, we did the "prevent cavities" routine. "Shower?" Luke
asked, a wicked grin on his face as he turned on the water.
"I don't feel like I need one. You
just go ahead," I said, trying to sound serious. The words were hardly out
before I felt myself being lifted into the air and placed squarely in the
shower.
"Luke, the water's cold!" I yelled.
"Not if you help me heat it up," he
said, then adjusted the temperature. Unlike our recent shower sessions, we
played like two little boys, grabbing and tickling each other, wrestling
in the shower and squirting body wash on each other until the shower was
filling up with suds. We finally got calmed down enough to exchange a few
really great kisses, washed each other's hair and rinsed the suds off. "I've
got to get out of here and to the studio soon," Luke said.
"You know you'll not escape without
breakfast."
"Then I guess I need this," he said
as he reached out and turned all the hot water off--again!
"Luke!!! Look what you have done."
The water was COLD and it had done what cold showers are supposed to do.
"You killed Chili Pepper."
"Yea, looks like Little Luke is almost
hiding or something." We both hopped out of the shower and dried each other.
"We keep doing this and I guess I'll
have to get my hair cut. It keeps getting wet."
"You dare! You just dare! I'll shave
my head if you cut the tiniest bit off. That hair is MINE because it's on
MY MAN. I think we made that clear awhile ago."
"Then you're going to have to dry it
for me."
"Terrible job. It could take me all
day," Luke laughed.
"I thought you were in a great rush
to get to your studio."
"That was before you aroused my hair
fetish," Luke said, as he picked up the drier and my brush. It does take
a long time to get my hair completely dry, but I never do that. When Luke
finished, I dried his. It really takes as long to do Luke's because, while
it doesn't look long, it is. His curls hold it close to his head--well, they
used to do that, now there was so much it was obviously long. When I had
finished, he went back to the bathroom and shaved. Every time I see him do
that I give thanks for my hairless genes! We finally got dressed and went
downstairs where Greywolf was fixing breakfast--his Saturday chore.
"Sounded like rough-housing going on
upstairs," he said in a mock stern voice.
"Luke tried to freeze me--again," I
pouted.
"I guess he has finally found a way
to get you under control so he can get to work at a reasonable time," Dad
laughed.
Uncle Michael
I saw Luke walking out to his studio
and went out to join him. He told me the problem he was having with his piece
and showed me the unassembled work. It was going to be something special
and that was certain! "I think you, John and I can handle the assembly,"
I said. After all, John and I aren't a part of this." Luke laughed and pointed
to two spots on the glass. "Damn, Luke, you have flat covered everything,"
I laughed. "Well, we'll just have to wait until Greywolf and John get here,"
I said.
"I guess you were really surprised
to see Mr. Stephenson yesterday?" Luke asked. "He said you two had met in
Charleston some years ago."
"'Really surprised' doesn't begin to
cover it. As John had said, I met him when he came into the gallery one day
and just wandered around looking at pieces. I don't mean to sound snooty,
but it was obvious he was not the kind who were patrons of Sanders and Sanders.
It was equally obvious, as he walked around the gallery, he knew good art
and had excellent taste. Nonetheless, it was clear he lacked one thing that
all Sanders and Sanders patrons had--money, lots of money. I walked over
to where he was looking at a small Japanese porcelain bowl--exquisite in
every way. 'Beautiful, isn't it?'"
"'Absolutely beautiful. In fact, I
have seen little here I wouldn't consider beautiful. Well, that's not quite
true. I have seen nothing that isn't excellent, but not all to my taste and
I guess beauty truly is in the eye of the beholder.'"
"'Would you like that piece?' I had
asked him and he laughed."
"'I'm John Stephenson, a public school
art teacher. Does that answer your question? Yes, I would like it. Could
you sell it to me? No--since it would cost a couple month's salary--at least.'
I took an immediate liking to John. He was open, friendly, cheerful, and
had a grand sense of humor."
"'I'm Michael Sanders,' I said, extending
my hand. 'Do you have time for coffee? Tea?' I asked as he continued turning
the bowl over in his hands."
"'Sure. I'm here on spring break and
my friend is out looking into jobs. We would like to move here, but it looks
as though I'm pretty much stuck where I am and so I'm alone while he looks
around.' We went into a sitting room where we often relaxed with many of
our customers. John and I were talking about art, about my studying at Chicago
and all sorts of things. While we were having coffee, James came in and I
guess didn't see John in the high back chair so he walked in, came over and
gave me a kiss. When I said,'James, meet John Stephenson,' James actually
turned red. It was one of the few times I saw something get away with him.
'John, since all art dealers are supposed to be gay, James and I put on a
good act,' I said to see James' response."
"He was still a light pink, but was
not about to let me get away with that. 'The problem is, he keeps up the
act twenty-four hours a day. John Stephenson, I'm James Sanders and Michael
here is my partner for life. That is a beautiful bowl you have chosen. I
know you will enjoy it.'"
"'Maybe for a few more minutes, but
I have told Mr.Sanders...'"
"'Michael.'"
"'Michael--I am a public school art
teacher and this would cost a couple month's salary. But it is a wonderful,
beautiful piece.'"
"We sat and talked for a couple hours.
He felt safe, I guess, in telling us about his relationship with Bruce and
how they wanted to move to Charleston, but he couldn't find a teaching job
and that, even if he could, the salaries were really poor. All the time we
were talking, he was holding and stroking the Japanese bowl. When it was
time for him to go, James said, 'John, the bowl obviously belongs to you.
It is a gift to you with only one condition. Should you ever wish to part
with it, Sanders and Sanders gets first chance at bidding on it.' Only yesterday
did I realize what James meant by what he said next. When John said, 'I guess
I can consider it a kind of honeymoon gift,' James said, 'No, it is Michael's
and my gift to you in appreciation of the sacrifice you are making on behalf
of your students and of your appreciation of the piece. It is yours.' Yesterday
I thought of that. There was nothing Bruce bound up in the gift so it is
not a reminder of a failed relationship, but of a long friendship which is
still ongoing." Just as I finished, Greywolf and John drove up. Luke had
pulled the screen across and hidden the piece to be assembled.
"Greywolf, if you'll wait outside,
Luke, John and I need to try something before you come in," I said. Greywolf
nodded and the three of us went inside. With the three, positioning the glass
in its frame was going to be, not easy, but possible. "Do you want to finish
the assembly now or wait?" I asked Luke.
"Let's leave it for last," he said.
"There's still a bit of work I can do on it."
John, Greywolf and I set up the camera
and lights and started photographing the pieces. John's art was photography
and generally he knew far better than I how to show a piece to its best advantage.
However there were times, knowing the printing process as I do, I had suggestions
to make so the picture in the catalog would show best. With two people to
move lights and set up pieces, the process was going very rapidly. Just after
midmorning, Luke came from behind the screen and started helping as well.
About noon, all was finished except for the two pieces Luke was keeping secret.
"Thanks a mint, Greywolf," Luke said,
"that's it except for the two pieces I'm keeping secret. Mr. Stephenson and
Uncle Michael will help with those. Tell Matt I'll see him about 1:30 or
2:00 if he's free. And, again, thanks."
"Glad to help. See you for lunch?"
"No, I think I better let Mom and Dad
see me so they will recognize me the next time they see me," Luke laughed.
Luke had the major piece all assembled
except for mounting the glass sheet. It was very heavy but, by using a hoist
and with me and John to guide it, Luke was able to swing it into place. It
slipped once and I thought I would have a heart attack and Luke looked as
if he had. We all three sat down and tried to relax. When we had regained
some composure, the glass was hoisted again and Luke guided it into its mounts
and it slipped right in. He then attached hold-down brackets and the piece
was complete. He had created a beautiful piece of work and, just as I started
to tell him that, he flipped a switch. I had not noticed the piece was plugged
into the wall. Ordinarily, pieces which require power to move do not move
me, but this one did. As I looked at it, I felt a lump in my throat and a
tear ran down my cheek. It was magnificent! John was staring at the finished
piece, obviously awe-struck at what his student had accomplished.
"Luke, it is incredible," John said
and I agreed.
"Well, let's see the other one," John
said.
Luke had moved the screen back and
there was a rather large canvas on an easel covered with a white cloth. When
Luke, dramatically, unveiled the painting on the easel, both John and I gasped
in awe. Neither of us spoke for several minutes until Luke, who was standing
frozen, still grasping the cloth which had covered the painting, said, "Well?"
"Luke, I never expected to see something
this good from a student, ever. It literally took my breath away and I can
see why you wanted to keep it secret."
"Luke, I don't think I even need to
ask but, should that piece ever be for sale, Sanders and... No, Michael Andrews--this
one--gets first crack at it." Luke's face was quickly covered with a grin
from ear to ear. "John, I think this calls for a major celebration. How about
I take Luke and his favorite art teacher to Lexington for dinner and maybe
a movie or something?"
"I would be delighted, but I suspect
Luke would not be too happy with two old men. Maybe if we could find him
a date..."
I was watching Luke's face. I would
have placed money on his not being able to broaden his smile, but I would
have lost. "Luke, see if you can find a date. I'll make reservations for
dinner at 8:00 and we'll think about what to do after. John, do you know
any places good enough for a fine young artist and his teacher?"
"Yea, a couple. Luke, tell your date
as well, dress will be not as casual as school clothes, but not as formal
as ties."
"John, come in and we'll take care
of reservations. Luke, see you about 6:30?"
Luke said, "Yea. Laters," and went
running toward Greywolf's.
Matt
I must admit that I had a
pretty lazy Saturday morning after Luke left. For the first time in weeks,
I did my Saturday chores including mowing the grass. When I finished I took
a shower--this time by myself so it didn't take long--threw on fresh shorts
and shirt and went downstairs. Dad had lunch ready--Mom had a ton of papers
to grade and, since I did my chores and Dad got back from Luke's place before
she or I were finished, Dad did lunch. We sat down and started talking about
all that had happened the last week or so. I could hardly believe all that
had gone on. "And that doesn't count Yong Jin's baby getting a hickey the
size of a silver dollar," Dad said. I blushed.
"I first thought it might have been
a mere bug bite, but then I saw it was a common hickey, although I believe
poetically they are often called love bites," Mom said in her best classroom
voice. I was blushing like mad and Mom and Dad were laughing at me and the
more they laughed, the more I blushed and it went on and on.
I heard Luke yell, "Anybody home,"
as he came in the front door.
"Luke, come rescue me," I yelled in
response.
When Luke reached the kitchen, he took
one look at me and said, in pouty baby talk, "Is your mean old mommy and
mean old daddy making poor little Matt blush? Naughty mommy. Naughty daddy."
I was ready to strangle him! I got
up and made a dive for him, and he caught me and laughed as he pressed his
lips to mine. When he broke the kiss, he still held me as he said, "Mr. and
Mrs. Greywolf, I would like permission to date your baby boy tonight. We
need to do something datey. We never have."
"I don't know, Mr. Larsen," Mom said.
"He was out somewhere with someone and came back all hickeyed."
"Yes, we're not sure whether he will
be safe or not. Besides, you never know what can happen to a young innocent--but
hot to trot--young man," Dad said.
"Dad!!"
"Ok, so he's not innocent," Dad said.
Luke looked at me, kissed me and said
to Mom and Dad, "I'm glad he's blushing again. I was afraid he was becoming
so corrupt that nothing would make him blush."
"Ok, what's with this datey stuff?"
I asked.
"Mom, Dad Greywolf, I wanted Matt and
me to have a date like a normal couple would but, when I suggested it, he
pointed out that we had too much to do. I don't know about Matt, but I'm
ready for my exhibition. Of course, it will have to be set up, but that has
to wait until the week before it opens. I'll need to review for AP exams
and when the pictures are developed, I'll have to get the catalog ready for
Millie's printer, but now there's a kind of slack period and Uncle Michael
wanted to take me and my art teacher to Lexington for dinner at a fancy place
and maybe a movie or something afterward. Mr. Stephenson pointed out that
I probably wouldn't be happy with just two old men and suggested I might
want to see if I could find a date."
"He knows..."
"Yes, he does, Mom. I was a jerk when
I found out Luke had told him," I said right away.
"Drop it," Luke said, "Just drop it!
So if it's all right with his mom and dad, I'd like a date with Matthew Sarang
Hanun Pomul Greywolf tonight. I promise to have him home before his carriage
turns to a pumpkin."
"Just bring him back relatively unsoiled,"
Dad said in his "stern father" voice.
"Matt, not as casual as school, not
as formal as a tie. Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson will pick us up at 6:30-6:45.
Now I'm going home and eat lunch and see if my family still recognizes me.
See you about 6:15" and with that, Luke kissed me goodbye and went rushing
out the door.
Part Thirty
Luke
I left Matt's place and walked home
slowly, thinking about all that had happened since that day I had dived off
the falls, only half conscious because of the sleeping pills. So very much
had been packed into a little over two months and there was so much to be
crammed in the coming months. When I got home, Mom, Dad and Mary Kathryn
were about half-finished with lunch. Mom quickly prepared a place for me
and all three bombarded me with questions as I tried to eat. I finally was
able to tell them all my pieces for the exhibition were complete and the
photography done. "Mr. Stephenson is developing the negatives and making
the prints himself so they will be exactly right. I still have to complete
writing the catalog and getting Yong Jin to check it. Millie wants it as
soon as possible since it will be in full color, on special paper and custom
bound. I thought I might work on it tonight, but Uncle Michael is taking
Mr. Stephenson, Matt and me to Lexington for dinner tonight and a movie
or something afterward. That is ok, isn't it?"
"Not only is it ok, but I'm glad you
are doing it," Mom said. "I have been worried about you lately because I
know you are not getting enough rest or eating right."
"I agree with your mom," Dad said.
"But I do wish we saw more of you. I know you have been working late a lot,
but we seldom see you."
"I'm not going to be so busy the next
couple weeks. Of course, there is only a week before AP exams and they take
a good part of two weeks. When they are over, I'll have to set right to work
getting the exhibition set up. Uncle Michael is going to help with that and
any other willing hands will be welcome. I just don't have a lot of time
these days and when I do..." I started to say I spend it with Matt, but decided
not to.
"You spend it with Matt," Dad finished
for me.
"Yes, I do."
"Luke, I have really been giving a
lot of thought to your relationship with Matt."
"Uh oh," I thought, "I have barely
seen my family in a couple weeks and now I'm going to get the lecture."
"I still don't understand it. I know
the Church's position and that still doesn't make sense to me, but I do know
Matt Greywolf and Luke Larsen. I know that if they say they love each other,
they do. If it was just a fad or phase, there has been enough happen to made
a half-wit rethink such a choice, if it were a choice. I have come to the
point where I wish it wasn't the way it is and, as I said, I don't understand
it but, to tell the truth, I don't understand my relationship with your mother
either. I mean I can't explain it and would be a fool to try. I guess...
Hell, Luke, what I am trying to say is that I'd like to see you around more
and I know that if Matt were your mom, I'd be in his bed every night--well,
that's not what I mean..."
Dad was clearly struggling to say something
and was having a hard time. I wanted to say, "Spit it out, Dad," but just
waited.
"Damn it, Luke, if you love Matt Greywolf
and he loves you, you are both welcome in this house."
"I know that, Dad." It began to dawn
on me where Dad was headed, but I wanted to hear him say the words.
"Well, that's not what I mean. You
and Matt still not...?" Dad stammered to a stop and blushed as big as Matt
would have.
"Having sex?" I finally said after
it was obvious Dad wasn't going to get it out. Dad nodded. "I guess
I'd have to know what you mean by having sex. We are not having intercourse,
if that's what you mean. Other than that, do you want details?" I glanced
at Mary Kathryn who was about to pop laughing and when I looked at Mom, she
was certainly enjoying Dad's discomfort.
"No! No, no details. You told me what
I wanted to know. And you're holding to your eighteenth birthday promise?"
"With great difficulty. It is very
hard." I gave a sideways glance at Dad to see his reaction.
Dad burst out laughing and said, "I
certainly imagine it is! Both of them!"
"Dad, what do you think we are?"
"Two horny almost-eighteen-year-old
males. I have been there. Ok, Luke, what I have been trying to say is that
Matt is welcome in this house and so long as it is ok with you, he is welcome
to share your bed. Damn, that was hard to get out."
I grabbed Dad and hugged him tightly
and said, "Dad, sex aside--as much as a horny almost-eighteen-year-old can
put sex aside, thanks for accepting what I know is hard for you. I know that
you wish things were different, but thanks for accepting me and my love and
the man I love more than anything else in this world."
"Does the same rule apply to me and
Mich..."
"Only if you want him hanged, drawn
and quartered, young lady," Dad said and I knew he was only half-joking!
With the question of my sleeping with
Matt in my house out of the way, the four of us sat around the lunch table
for another hour talking about all that had gone on and what was ahead of
us. "I guess next week's big news will be the trial of Orie and his gang,"
Mary Kathryn said.
"I understand that the other three
are unlikely to go to trial for a while. They are in the state hospital for
ninety days observation and evaluation, and will probably be sent to a treatment
center rather than prison. Rumors around town are that the real bombshell
will hit when the facts come out about Rev. McBride," Mom said.
We talked a while longer, then I helped
Mary Kathryn clear the table and put the dishes in the dishwasher. That done,
I joined Dad and we did a few odd jobs around the farm--something I hadn't
done for awhile. As we worked, we talked and joked around, more than we had
ever done before he had found out I was gay. But the matter of my sleeping
with Matt and my relationship with Matt had been settled--for him and, I
thought, for me--the "books balanced and closed" and was, therefore, not
mentioned. I had always known Dad loved me, but now he made efforts to show
it and I appreciated it and let him know that. While the jobs we were doing
weren't hard work, the day was pretty warm and the jobs messy so, about 5:00,
Dad said, "Luke, if you are going to be presentable for a dinner date, you
had better knock off and take a shower. I'm sure you stink!"
I went to the house, showered, shaved
again--the whole nine yards--and then came the problem of what to wear. Two
months ago the answer would have been easy: the first shirt and pants I found,
but now... less casual than school, more casual than a tie. I looked in my
closet and found a green--Mom called it teal--silk shirt which did strange
things to my eyes--they looked a very different color blue--and a pair of
slacks the same color, but much darker. When I put them on and looked in
the mirror, I was pleased. I also loved my hair. I was surprised Dad hadn't
said something about its length--it was no longer fashionable to have long
hair and he was happy "long hair is finally out," but I liked it. It looked
almost like a 60s Afro except it was pale, pale blond. As I was buttoning
my shirt, my medallion fell out and I thought, "Tonight I don't have to hide
anything!" and left it out. It went well with the color of my shirt. I looked
in the mirror again and thought, "Damn, man, Matt has a hunk on his hands!
YES!"
When I got downstairs, Dad had come
in and Mom, Dad and Mary Kathryn all gave me a once over. Dad said,
"Son, you are a handsome young man. I am proud of you."
Mom gave me a kiss and said, "Luke,
you are just plain beautiful".
Mary Kathryn stuck a finger to my butt,
made a sizzling noise and said, "Damn, what a hot stud! My how the women
will weep."
I guess I had been hanging around Matt
too long. Old cool and collected Luke blushed big time! I gave all three
a kiss on the cheek and said, "Don't wait up for me."
"Remember, you and Matt are welcome
here," Dad said and Mom nodded agreement.
I kissed both again and said, "Thanks
from the bottom of my heart for me and Matt. Laters."
I walked down the road to Matt's and
found myself whistling "More." I was one happy camper!
Matt
After Luke left, Dad and I did work
around the house that had been neglected since we had both been busy. As
we worked, I told him the story of Mr. Stephenson and Uncle Michael. We also
talked about the upcoming trial of Orie and his crew, speculated about what
would happen to Jake and the two others who were still undergoing observation
and evaluation at the state mental hospital. "I suspect there is going to
be a real rotten mess revealed when Rev. McBride comes to trial," Dad observed.
"Wonder how Joyce will handle that?"
We also talked about the upcoming AP
exams. I told Dad I felt I was pretty well prepared, but knew it was going
to be a hard two weeks. "You do recall you are excused from school after
you finish a day's exam? I urge you to take full advantage of that. Just
relax and enjoy yourself or, at least, don't start trying to cram for the
next exam. That just defeats your purpose."
We had finished several small tasks
and tackled the big one--cleaning a stable. When we finished Dad said, "Matt,
it's five. I think you better get ready for your big date." I hugged Dad
and when I did he said, "And be sure to shower twice! You're sweaty as a
mule and smell worse!"
I had a leisurely shower, enjoying
the warm water on muscles which had not been used for some time until today.
I went to my room wishing Luke was there to brush and dry my hair, but I
had to manage. Then I had to decide what to wear. I started looking at shirts,
trying to find a turtleneck to cover the mark left by one Mr. Luke Larsen,
but wasn't satisfied with any. As I bent over, looking in a chest drawer,
my hair kept falling in my face and that gave me an inspiration! I opened
a small box which Mom had brought from Korea, in which I kept very special
things, and found what I was looking for. I put them on the bed, then got
dressed--off-white, actually light buckskin-colored, slacks and a very special
shirt I had worn very few times. When I looked in the mirror, I liked what
I saw and when I noticed my medallion--the shirt didn't button, but slipped
over my head and had a pretty low cut neckline--I pulled it outside. Tonight
I was not going to hide.
When Luke arrived, I met him downstairs.
He was absolutely gorgeous! I wanted to climb his bod right there in the
living room, but satisfied myself with just drinking in his beauty and kissing
him passionately. As I finished the kiss, Mom and Dad came in to greet Luke,
and both stopped and looked at me. "Thank you," Dad said.
"You are a beautiful Lakota Korean,
my man child," Mom said. "And Luke, he had to go all out to come close to
being as handsome--and beautiful--as you are."
"You certainly are a handsome young
man, Luke. And, I would add, just as handsome on the inside," Dad said.
Luke
When I arrived at Matt's, I was thunderstruck.
Matt was dressed in buckskin-colored slacks and was wearing a ribbon shirt.
His dad had bought it for him when they had gone to a pow wow last year.
Cherokee, the shirt was a pull-over with a low cut front opening which gave
an inviting glimpse of Matt's hard upper chest. The sleeves, collar and back
and front shoulders were decorated with bands of ribbon. Streamers of ribbon
hung from the tops of the sleeves and the front and back shoulder yokes.
In spite of Matt being dark, Greywolf had chosen a black shirt with blood
red ribbons. He told Matt red and black were the colors of a warrior and
said, "Matt, I expect you to wear it with honor and remember, whether you
are wearing it or not, you are to be a true warrior--one who fights against
injustice and for the right regardless where you are or what you are wearing."
Matt had a beadwork head band of red and black holding his hair in place.
The hickey I had given him was covered by a wide choker of white bone, red
and black beads on black leather thongs, with a wolf's head carved from bone
at the front. It, also, was a gift from his dad. The medicine man who had
prepared Greywolf for his vision quest had given it to him and Greywolf gave
it to Matt on his sixteenth birthday. Standing before me was a noble Lakota
warrior as I had imagined him to be--well, except for the Cherokee shirt.
"Do you think this is not as casual
as school..."
"There's certainly no question about
that, Dark Angel," I said, still in awe of my Matt. "Maybe less casual
than a tie, but that choker--I don't know. Damn you are beautiful and handsome
and powerful and awesome and I love you madly, Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul
Greywolf." Matt just gave me a wide grin, grabbed me and gave me a
full, open mouth, tongue-sucking kiss. Before things could get completely
out of hand, the doorbell rang.
Greywolf opened the door and Uncle
Michael and Mr. Stephenson came in. Greywolf said, "I don't know whether
you dare be seen with these two tonight or not," as they came into the living
room. When Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson saw Matt and me, both whistled.
Then Mr. Stephenson said, "Matt, I can see how you ins... might inspire
someone dressed as you are. Sorry you never come to school showing your--What,
Greywolf?--heritage."
"Lakota on my side. But he's wearing
a Cherokee shirt. I guess that's ok," Greywolf laughed. "And he'll
have to be Korean next time or Yong Jin will have both our heads!"
"You both are wearing exquisite medallions.
They look identical," Uncle Michael said.
"Thanks. They are slightly different
and have a story behind them," I said. "I'll tell you about them on the way
to Lexington."
We said goodbye to the Greywolfs and
left for Lexington. Uncle Michael drove a Lexus which was loaded. As soon
as we were on our way, I told the story of the medallions. "And you promised
to wait until you're eighteen before you--we used to call it--go all the
way?"
"It's really a promise to ourselves.
No-one else has asked us to promise. Greywolf just said he wished we would.
"Damn, Matt, in all the excitement of being attacked by a Lakota warrior,
I forgot a very important bit of news. Dad told me this afternoon that you
were welcome in our house..."
"Aside from one night, when was that
not true?"
"Let me finish. And in my bed." Matt
once again became an attacking Lakota warrior, kissing me like mad. "But,
well, it was hard for him to get it out. But he did say it."
"You mean it's ok for you two to sleep
together? What about this no sex promise?" Mr. Stephenson asked.
"Both are true, not that it's easy,
in fact it's very hard..."
"I bet!" he laughed.
We chatted a while longer then Uncle
Michael said, "Michael gave me a tape and said I should play it on the way
over to get you two in the mood for a great evening." He slipped a cassette
into his tape player and--you know--"More than the greatest love the world
has known..." poured from a fantastic sound system.
When we arrived in Lexington, Mr. Stephenson
directed Uncle Michael to THE hotel in town where the valet parking attendants
just about broke their necks trying to be the one to park the Lexus. Once
inside, Mr. Stephenson directed us to one of the several restaurants there.
When he gave his name, we were immediately shown to a great table. When Nelson,
our waiter, came for orders, Uncle Michael ordered two Bloody Marys and two
Virgin Marys. "Will bring you back for a serious drink in a little over three
years," he smiled. When Nelson came with the drinks he said, "I hope you
won't think I am being too forward, but aren't you two guys from Independence
High School in Concord?"
"Yes, we are. I'm Luke Larsen and this
warrior is Matthew Greywolf. Mr. Stephenson is my art teacher and this is
Michael Sanders, our uncle."
"I am pleased to you meet all of you.
I'm obviously Nelson, Nelson Barber. I'm a student at the community college
here. I thought I recognized you two guys from the TV broadcast of the service.
Matthew, I hope you don't mind, but you are going to be mobbed when you leave.
There's a girl's sorority having a banquet upstairs and the word is out that
a movie star is having dinner here and they are all atwitter."
"I guess it's just the price you have
to pay for being sexy, Matt," I laughed.
"I guess I need to take your order
if you are ready," Nelson said.
"I'll do the ordering," Uncle Michael
said and started giving the order to Nelson. He ordered a five-course dinner
and I hoped I would like it because most of what he said was in French.
"I'm sure some of the food will be new to you, but I believe people should
explore food the way they explore other things."
Much of the food was new, but all was
delicious. I'm sure I might not have eaten some of it had I known what it
was, but it was food and it was good! When Nelson came back with coffee and
dessert, Uncle Michael asked him for a suggestion for the rest of the evening.
He hesitated for a moment, then suggested a couple of movies. "Of course,
there are clubs, but I'm not sure two of you would enjoy what the other two
would enjoy... I mean, I'm sure the music Matthew and Luke would enjoy would
be noise to you, Mr. Stephenson and Mr. Sanders."
"Isn't there some place where these
two old men could be sure these two young men enjoy their first real date?"
Uncle Michael smiled. Matt, of course, blushed big time and I'll admit I
did a pretty good job blushing myself. When I looked at Nelson, I noticed
he was also blushing!
"What is this? A blushing contest?"
Uncle Michael laughed.
"Actually, I was going to suggest a
place, but wasn't sure I should. After the service was broadcast, several
of us at the college investigated the events which brought it about and decided
we didn't want anything like that to happen here so we organized a group
against intolerance--gay and straight, young and old--and started a place
for young couples--as young as 14 with permission or accompanied by an adult--to
20. Actually, that's the age group the club serves. It welcomes older people
who are interested in seeing that kids have a safe place to enjoy themselves
so long as they are accompanied by kids. No unescorted adults hanging around.
Police patrol the club and adults make sure there is no chicken hawking going
on. What has surprised me is the number of straight couples who show up.
It's a fun, safe place. In fact, I'm meeting my girl there after work. I
helped get it started because my gay brother was harassed in high school,
and so badly beaten by some classmates in his senior year that he had to
spend time in the hospital."
"Then you're not gay?" Matt asked.
"No, afraid not, but if I were, Luke
would have a run for his money!"
"Does this sound like some place you'd
like to go?" Uncle Michael asked.
"Yes. It would be great to be with
Matt without worrying about what people will think or do. But what
about you and Mr. Stephenson?"
"I'm sure we'll enjoy watching kids
have fun and we have a lot of catching up to do," Uncle Michael answered.
"Can you give us directions?" he asked Nelson. Nelson drew a map for Uncle
Michael, picked up the credit card slip Uncle Michael signed, thanked us
and walked away. I saw him look at the credit card slip and whistle. I guess
Uncle Michael had been very generous.
When we reached the lobby of the hotel,
Matt was attacked by screaming girls--it seemed like hundreds. All were trying
to shove something in his face for his autograph. Matt looked bewildered.
"Mr. Greywolf will sign autographs if you will get control of yourselves,
ladies," I said, turned to Matt and said, "Mr. Greywolf, you are willing
to sign some autographs aren't you?" Matt nodded, still somewhat bewildered.
"Ladies, if you will just form a queue--a line--so Mr. Greywolf can get to
as many of you as he can. Otherwise I'm afraid we'll have to go. And stop
the screaming. Mr. Greywolf finds it unladylike." I was having a blast. The
girls got relatively quiet and I took what they offered and Matt signed "Always,
Greywolf" on each. Soon he was having a blast as well. Mr. Stephenson
and Uncle Michael had just given up, found a seat to the side and were laughing
up a storm.
After Matt had given at least fifty
autographs, Uncle Michael walked over and said, " Mr. Greywolf, I have
just been informed the car is waiting."
"Thank you, Michael," Matt said very
seriously. "I am very sorry ladies, but I have a car waiting for me so I
have to run. It was good seeing all of you." The girls started rushing forward
and Mr. Stephenson, Uncle Michael and I formed a shield around Matt until
the hotel security finally was able to give us a clear path to the car. Once
we were inside the car, all four of us started laughing so hard we were crying.
With Mr. Stephenson navigating and
Uncle Michael driving, we had no difficulty finding the strip shopping center
which had, obviously, seen better days but which was now a place for youth.
A skating rink was at one end and a dance floor at the other. A snack bar,
bistro and game room occupied the space between the two. A single entrance
led to a hall running the length of the connected buildings. There was no
way in except through the single entrance where two security guards were
posted. While they waved me and Matt through, they stopped Mr. Stephenson
and Uncle Michael until Matt and I vouched for them. The guards were very
polite, but made it very clear that "unescorted adults" were not allowed.
When we got inside, Matt said, "Luke, I want to dance and dance and dance
with you. I want to make up for the prom." We walked to the dance floor and
Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson found seats at a table overlooking it and
Matt and I started dancing. The music was wild and we danced with abandon.
After a couple of wild dances, a slow dance came up and I took Matt in my
arms, held him close and looked into his wonderful dark eyes as we slow danced
together in a public place for the first time.
About 10:30 the jukebox was turned
off and a young guy took over as DJ. He opened by saying, "If you can dance
to it, I have it. If I don't, free burger, fries and drink for you and your
date!"
Matt got a huge smile on his face and
asked, "Which would you like better, the song or the burger?"
"I'll take the song." Matt walked over
to the DJ and said something to him. Then I saw him put a bill in the tip
jar. He came back, put his arms around me and kissed me--in public!!--and
no-one seemed to notice or care.
"For the Lakota warrior and his date--here's
'More!' and I'm asked to say, 'Luke, this is the way the king should have
danced'!" The song started and we danced, holding each other tight, lips
pressed together. I could feel Matt's hard body against mine, the muscles
in his back moving under my hands and his hands on my butt as we danced.
When the song ended, we went over to the table where Uncle Michael and Mr.
Stephenson were seated. "You are a beautiful couple," Mr. Stephenson said,
"and you dance well together."
Just as we started to sit down, I heard
someone say, "Well, if it isn't the teen idol, Greywolf!" I looked over and
saw Nelson walking in with a gorgeous young woman. They came over to us and
he introduced us to his girlfriend, Holly. He told her how Matt had been
mobbed and then how we had played it off in all seriousness. We were all
laughing. "Care to join us?" Uncle Michael asked. Nelson nodded and soon
all six were enjoying ourselves just talking and joking around.
Suddenly there was a squeal and a flock
of girls descended upon our table followed by a guy with a mike and a TV
cameraman. Matt actually looked terrified--I mean I can't blame him, he was
under attack by fifteen or twenty screaming teenaged girls. Uncle Michael,
Mr. Stephenson and I stood up, placing ourselves between Matt and the girls.
"Ladies, ladies," Uncle Michael shouted over the noise. "Mr. Greywolf is
here for a pleasant evening. You are being very unladylike and Mr. Greywolf
does not like aggressive women! Now please calm down."
One of the guards walked up and said,
"Young ladies, unless you can calm yourselves and stop annoying these people,
I will have to ask you to leave. And you, young man with the camera, are
to leave at once. We do not permit cameras of any kind here." The cameraman
turned on the camera's lights and the guard placed his hand over the lens
and said, "I TOLD you that was not permitted," as he took the cameraman by
the arm. "If you insist, I will arrest you. Believe me, I have that authority.
Now leave!" The TV people left and the guard said, "I'm sorry, Mr.
Greywolf. I apologize. I don't know how the TV people got in, but I will
call the chief and see that no pictures of you will be broadcast. That would
severely damage what we are trying to do here."
"Thank you very much. It would not
be good for either your place or my group were pictures broadcast. Now if
you could get the young ladies under control, I'll be happy to sign autographs,"
Matt said, sounding very serious. Nelson, Holly and the Concord bunch were
having a hard time not laughing. I got up and, again, started taking whatever
the girls handed me and passing them to Matt. He signed away and generally
managed to keep a straight face, but when I handed him a bra and then a pair
of panties, he just about lost it, turning aside to get control of a laugh.
When Matt finished, he turned to me
and said, "Last dance?" I felt a grin spread across my face. This was bound
to cause an uproar among Greywolf's fan club. When we walked out on the floor,
the DJ looked over, gave us a big wink and a wicked smile. As we reached
the middle of the floor, people who had been around all evening saw what
was coming and moved to the sides of the floor. "More" started and Matt wrapped
his arms around me and as we started dancing, as he raised his lips to mine,
he had to stop until he could control his laughter. When he had regained
control, he gave me an all out, no holds barred, open mouth, tongue-sucking
kiss. And held it as we danced. I cannot imagine a more erotic dance--hard
bodies pressed close together, lips locked, tongues awhirl and sloooow dancing.
It was hot! When "More" ended, I looked into Matt's eyes and said, "Matt,
that's the way it should have been at the prom. My arms were absolutely aching
to hold you close to me, to feel your hard body next to mine, to kiss you
while we danced. Matt, I wanted to be dancing with my king, not the prom
queen. I love you, man, and..."
The DJ started another slow song and
I looked at Matt. He smiled, pulled me to himself and said, "This is way
it should have been, but wasn't. But then was then and now is now. He kissed
me again as our bodies moved together. It was erotic as hell and Matt's hard
chest rubbing against mine was making me super hot. "Sarang Hanun Pomul,
I love you more than anything in this world," I whispered in his ear. His
chest was not the only hardness I felt pressed against mine! Matt looked
into my eyes again and smiled just as Holly cut in.
When I turned to walk off the floor,
Nelson grabbed me and we started dancing. He was dying laughing and when
he swung me around, I could see why. Holly was kissing Matt! "Now watch what
happens," he laughed. I was soon aware of what was up. Girls lined up and
were taking turns dancing with Matt. He was handling it well, except he had
a hard time not getting kissed on the mouth.
Finally, Nelson said, "You need to
rescue your boyfriend. Think he is up to one more dance?" I nodded
and walked over and cut in just as "More" started for the third time.
Matt wrapped himself around me and
again, kissed me, but this time it was an easy, soft, tender, loving Matt
kiss. When we broke our kiss, Matt looked over my shoulder and said, "This
is definitely the last dance, Yonghon Tongmu, it's after midnight. I'm afraid
I have to be at St. Mary's in the morning."
I looked into his eyes, smiled and
said, "And tonight you sleep in my bed, Sarang Hanun Pomul!" The song ended
and we walked off the floor. All the way home we all four kept laughing about
Matt being a teen idol. "I just hope that TV guy didn't get any tape. I would
never live down the 'teen idol' bit."
When we reached our place, Matt and
I got out. It was almost 2 in the morning as we climbed the stairs to my
room. We undressed, Matt carefully putting his head band and choker in the
drawer of my chest which was his. We brushed our teeth, took a piss and climbed
into bed. "Luke, the door is closed," Matt said.
"Well?"
"I believe we agreed the same rules
here as at my place."
" Guess you're right," I said, reluctantly.
"You know I'm right," Matt said, and
smiled at me, "but we didn't say how wide open." I opened the door a crack
and climbed back into bed. I wrapped my arms around Matt and he his around
me and we started kissing each other deeply, but something was wrong. It
just didn't feel right. I didn't feel right. Before I could say anything,
Matt said, "Luke, I know Jens said it was all right for me to sleep with
you. At least my head knows that, but I don't think it has told the rest
of me. I don't feel right. I feel like I'm doing something I shouldn't be
doing, something wrong. Luke," Matt stopped and I could feel hot tears falling
from his face, "Luke, I feel like what we are doing is dirty". By this time
he was crying in great sobs. I held Matt tightly and started rocking him
in my arms as he buried his head in the crook of my neck.
"Matt, I don't feel right either. I
guess we just assumed that Dad could say, 'It's now ok, boys,' and we could
be as much at ease here as in your bed, but it's not working that way.
You're right; my mind knows that Dad has said it's ok and means it, but my
emotions are stronger and I keep seeing him hit you. I know he has been forgiven
by both of us. I know he has changed, but my emotions haven't caught up with
my thoughts."
"Yea. So you do understand?"
"Perfectly, Sarang Hanun Pomul, we'll
just hold each other as we have for years and know that our emotions have
gotten the better of us tonight--but it was a wonderful, wonderful, wonderful
night even if we had gone to separate beds!" Matt kissed me gently and we
held each other, legs entwined, and were soon asleep.
"Ok, Mr. Teen Idol, get your butt out
of bed. We have two hundred screaming girls in the front yard wanting your
bod," Mary Kathryn announced at the top of her lungs as she pushed open the
door.
"What the hell? What's that all about,
sister mine?"
"You don't recall having a night on
the town in Lexington with the latest teen idol Greywolf? Boy, you
guys must have really gotten it on last night."
"Actually, we didn't. To be honest,
Mary Kathryn we did the same thing in this bed we have done for years--well,
except for a couple of very innocent kisses and we certainly got home early."
Matt said.
Mary Kathryn started laughing then
I guess she saw the look on our faces and stopped and said, "Yea, well it
was early--early in the morning. But tell me about this teen idol bit."
"We don't know what you are talking
about," I said.
"You know that Curtis jerk who does
the 'Teen Beat' thing on the Sunday morning news? Well, this morning he had
this great story which was uncovered by 'this reporter' about a visit to
Lexington by the latest teen idol Greywolf and his entourage. 'This idol
was seen at an expensive restaurant with a huge entourage and later, I have
learned, was seen dancing with a Lexington beauty queen, who it is rumored
will co-star in his next picture.' Mary Kathryn then continued in a Curtis
the Jerk self-important voice, 'This reporter was prevented from getting
tape of Greywolf, but is here to report that Lexington was probably successful
in its drive to have Greywolf's next smash movie made here.'" Then she asked,
"Just what went on last night?"
Matt and I were both laughing so hard
tears were running down our faces and something else was going to be running
if we didn't get out of bed in a hurry. Since Mary Kathryn made no move to
leave, we just rushed past her to the bathroom. "After we brush our teeth,
we'll come down and tell the whole story," I called from the bathroom.
When we got downstairs, Mom had breakfast
ready and we sat down and, before we could eat, had to tell the tale of last
night. Before we finished, Mom, Dad and Mary Kathryn were all laughing so
hard they were crying. "Now if you would be so kind," I said in my Greywolf
entourage voice, "Mr. Greywolf would like breakfast".
When we finished breakfast, Matt said,
"I guess I better get home before Mom and Dad start wondering about this
teen idol bit. Why don't you come with me, Luke, since I've got to get a
rush on or I'll be late for choir warmup."
"Is it that late?" I asked, then realized
what Matt was up to. "Man, I guess it is. Want to get your things and we'll
run?"
We went upstairs and Matt got what
he had worn last night--we had just tossed on shorts and T-shirts when we
got up--and we said goodbye to Mom and Dad and left.
Matt
Sure enough, when we reached my place,
Dad called from the kitchen, "Is that the newest teen idol I see coming in
our house, Yong Jin?" Luke and I sat down in the kitchen and told the story
over again. "You know every single student at Independence will know about
this tomorrow morning, don't you?" Dad laughed.
"Yes and I think I'll start taking
names of those who want to be in Mr. Greywolf's next smash hit," Luke laughed.
"People, it's not funny," I said.
"May as well find it funny," Mom said,
"there will be no escaping it".
"Well, right now we need to get a shower
and get dressed," I said.
"Getting a real early start aren't
you?" Mom asked.
"Kinda," I looked at Luke and said,
"Dad, I think maybe Luke and I need to talk with you".
"Let's go to the library," Dad said,
being very serious. I was afraid he might not be and I was really needing
to talk with him.
"Ok, Luke?" I looked at my love and
saw pain in his eyes as I knew there was in mine. He nodded.
When we got to the library, Luke and
I both spilled out what had happened last night when we started to make love--no,
NOT have sex, make love. When we had finished Dad asked, "What do you think
was going on?" Luke answered as he had last night about our emotions not
having gotten the word from our brain. "Well put, Luke. Don't think anyone
could explain it better. I'm sure there was some hesitation when you first
started expressing your love here..." We both nodded. "And here there
was little question you and your love were accepted and you were expected
to express it." Again we nodded. "Luke, I need not remind you that was not
true at your place. It has taken this long for the two of you to even feel
free to share Luke's bed, so there is a great deal of emotional baggage to
overcome."
"There is nothing wrong with you; there
is nothing to be ashamed or afraid of. As a matter of fact, I can identify
with your situation completely. After Yong Jin and I were married we were
never able to have sex at her Mom's. There was such a prejudice against Americans,
and especially American soldiers, that it was made very clear that I better
not touch Yong Jin before we were married. And after we were married, when
we were there, that was still very much present in my mind and I simply couldn't--well,
maybe you know, maybe you don't, but a limp noodle is not an effective tool,"
Dad said and blushed.
"Dad blushed! It's catching!"
"Well, Matt, I know you think you are
special, and you are, but you got here just like the rest of us mortals.
Sons, I'd worry very much about you thinking what you were doing was wrong
and especially dirty, it's not. In fact, I think you have maintained a level
of purity which, frankly, I would have never thought possible. But since
you are very clear on why you had those feelings, you can work on them together.
And maybe you'll never be able to do more in showing your love in bed at
Luke's place than you did last night, but you needn't worry about that. I'm
sure you'll find other places--you have found other places--as Yong Jin and
I did, obviously--since you're here, Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf!
You'll just have to take it..."
"I know, slow and easy," Luke and I
said together, then laughed. "Thanks, Dad," we both said. We then went
upstairs, had a great time in the shower, got dressed and left for St. Mary's--not
early. I said we had a great time in the shower!
After church, Sunday dinner was at
David's and Margaret's. Uncle Michael had invited Mr. Stephenson and
when Michael started to pull the teen idol bit, the two of them took over
and told the story. I'll admit, it was a howl hearing the two of them talk
about the screaming females and how Luke had pulled off "Mr. Greywolf's personal
manager" role. Michael said at one point, "Matt, you autographed a bra?"
"Yea, and a pair of panties and both
were still hot when I handed them to him," Luke laughed.
After dinner, Uncle Michael, Mr. Stephenson
and Luke were to meet with Millie and work on the exhibition catalog. Eugene,
Paula and I had planned to get together at Eugene's to make final decisions
about the program and program notes for the concert so Luke rode with me.
The three of us worked for about three
hours and finally Paula said, "That's it. Let's get it typed. Who's fastest?"
Eugene reluctantly took on the task since he knew he was by far the fastest
on the keyboard. As each page was printed, first Paula and then I gave it
a careful reading. Eugene made any corrections and it was ready for Millie.
"Think we should have Yong Jin check it before Millie sees it?" Paula asked.
"How about if we give copies to Millie
and Mom then Mom can give Millie a call with any corrections? I know Millie
wants to get it in the works. It's supposed to be super special."
"Sounds good. Have you seen the posters
all over town?" Eugene asked.
"Haven't noticed," I said.
"I haven't been in until you came for
me and we were so busy talking I guess I missed them," Paula said.
"Millie and I took them around yesterday
and plenty places displayed them immediately. People have already started
calling for tickets. Millie has an automatic phone thingie handling that.
Well, if we're through, I think I might head over to Larry's. By the way,
Matt, how are you going to handle this concert and do another smash movie,
teen idol?" Eugene laughed. Paula looked puzzled so I had to tell the story
again.
"By the way," I said when I had finished,
and Eugene and Paula were again in control, "the club they have for kids--actually
14- to 20-year-olds--is great. Maybe we can all go some Friday or Saturday
night when all this is over."
"Maybe we can go before it is over.
We're going to need a break, Matt," Paula said.
"That's more like it," Eugene agreed.
Luke and the rest were still in deep
discussion when I came down and Uncle Michael said, "Matt, I'll bring Luke
home when we finish. It may be a while." I walked over to Luke and, when
he looked up, kissed him and said, "How does it feel to be kissed by the
latest teen idol?" Mr. Stephenson and Uncle Michael started laughing
and Millie looked puzzled. "Laters," I said and left as I knew the story
would be told again, becoming more elaborate with each telling.
When I got home, I was very pleased
that Monday's school work was done because my late Saturday night caught
up with me and I undressed and piled into my bed and was asleep in no time.
Mom was right, everyone at school had
heard the "Teen Beat" junk or been told about it. About half the girls seemed
to believe it and I spent a lot of time signing autographs. But fame gets
old quickly and, by afternoon, it was forgotten and everyone was talking
about the upcoming trial. Ms. Jones had announced that Tuesday's social studies
classes were expected to watch the trial during class and other teachers
had permission to turn it on if they wished. When school was out, I drove
to St. Mary's because Luke was meeting with Millie, Mr. Stephenson and Uncle
Michael again so we rode together.
As soon as we were out of the parking
lot and unlikely to be seen, Luke leaned over and kissed me. "Matt, I think
it's time you got a different car before I kill myself trying to kiss you
in this damn Jeep."
"Hey, watch your mouth. This damn Jeep
has served us both well. Just that it's not made for kissing."
"Guess I'll have to think of something
new," Luke said, as he got an evil grin on his face and placed his hand on
my thigh, gradually rubbing it and moving his hand higher. He finally grabbed
what had been a limp tool, but was now a Lakota arrow.
"Luke, I'm driving!"
"So am I," Luke laughed, "I'm driving
the love of my life wild!"
"You are. Luke, I can't drive and..."
I knew if Luke didn't stop I was going to have a mess in my pants and a lot
of explaining to do. "Luke..."
Luke laughed, moved his hand away and
risked his own family jewels to lean over and kiss me. "Later, and
that's a promise, Babe."
When I got to Millie's, Luke said he
would be finished about five if I wanted to pick him up. "I'll think
about it. Ok, I have thought about it. I'll be there." He leaned into the
Jeep and gave me a really soft, gentle kiss. "I promise," I said and he smiled.
It was all I could do to go on to St. Mary's.
Paula and I thought the practice went
extremely well, but Eugene was not happy with the ensemble. After practice,
I suggested we meet in the parish library to discuss the problem. Eugene
had some complaints which, I knew, were legitimate, but would be worked out
long before the concert. "Eugene, I suspect it is not the practice that is
the problem," Paula said.
"Well, I wasn't happy with the practice,
that's for sure, because I know the group can and has done better, but you're
also right. I've got something on my mind and I know I let it color how I
looked at the practice. I'll do better tomorrow."
"Any way we can help?" I asked.
"No, not right now. Thanks anyway."
We both gave Eugene a hug and he left to take Paula home. I still had
almost half an hour before I was due at Millie's and I decided to go into
the church. I sat in the dim light coming through the stained glass windows,
my eyes focused on the altar cross which was reflecting the light from the
sanctuary candle. I didn't know why I went into the church. I seldom did
that, I mean just to sit. I wasn't praying, at least I didn't think I was.
I wasn't even thinking, I just sat. At least that's what I believed I was
doing. After I had sat quietly for several minutes, I felt very ashamed
and very sad. I started weeping hot tears. I still wasn't sure why. I sat
a while longer then wiped my eyes and drove to Millie's. The group had finished
their work and Luke was ready to go home. Uncle Michael asked Millie and
Mr. Stephenson to show him around town since he didn't have to take Luke
home.
As soon as we got in the Jeep Luke
said, "I started something after school that I bet you want me to finish,"
and gave me an evil leer. I just looked at him and smiled, weakly. When we
reached the gate to the falls, Luke hopped out and opened it.
At the falls, Luke spread the blanket
and we sat down. I had been silent the whole trip from town. Luke obviously
sensed something was wrong and had been silent as well. After we had been
sitting without speaking for several minutes, Luke looked at me with questions
in his eyes. All I could do was wrap my arms around him and start crying
my eyes out. Luke held me tightly and I know he was completely bewildered.
Well, so was I--well, actually I wasn't. When I was finally able to stop
crying, I lifted Luke's face to mine and kissed him ever so softly. I took
a deep breath and said, "Luke, Yonghon Tongmu, when Eugene and Paula left
St. Mary's today for some reason I went into the church and just sat. I wasn't
praying or even thinking, at least I wasn't conscious of doing either, but
something has been bothering me since last night and I didn't know what it
was."
Luke started to say something, but
I put my finger to his lips. "No, don't say anything until I finish. When
I left, I had some idea what was troubling me and as soon as I saw you it
became very clear. Luke, you know I love you with every fiber of my being.
You are my very life and I haven't been treating you right." Once again Luke
started to speak and again I put my finger to his lips. "Love of my life,
I have taken and taken from you without giving much thought to the price
you were paying for giving to me. You have had to be the strong one. Time
and again I was ready to just forget everything in order to make love to
you completely. But that's not all. I realized today that in a very real
way you have given up your family for me. Sure you have been working all
hours on your project, but every minute you have free, you have spent with
me. And I selfishly not only accepted it, but expected it. I have my family.
I spend time at home with them and you, well, you haven't because of me.
Luke, I have been very selfish of your love and your presence and your care.
I'm sorry Luke. I am very sorry."
When I finished, we were both silent
again. Luke finally said, "Matt, Sarang Hanun Pomul, I haven't given you
a moment I regret. I know my family misses me. Dad even said so. That's why
he decided we could share my bed. I haven't regretted it in the least. Yes,
I have had to call a halt sometimes, not because I wanted to or even because
I was afraid I would regret it. I did it because I knew you would hate yourself
and I was afraid you would hate me. We're put together differently Matt.
You are spontaneous, living fully in the present. I love that about you.
Sometimes I wish I was that way, but I am not. I tend to think too much at
times. I want to know the future. But have I sacrificed too much for you?
Never. Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf, I would cheerfully give my life
for you. Selfish? I don't think so. Foolish? At times I think you are, but
I love it. Your foolishness is also the reason you are playful and, if I
remember correctly, being playful was something we were going to work on."
"Last night was hard on both of us.
You said that what we would have done in my bed felt dirty to you. Well,
it didn't feel dirty to me, it felt... Matt, it felt as though I was a stranger
to myself and to you. I was frightened. I was frightened that you would see
it as somehow or other a rejection of you. Don't get me wrong, I can understand
what you are saying and why you feel that way. I could say you shouldn't,
but feelings don't come in shoulds and should nots. They just are. Last night
made it very clear to me that we are not independent of the rest of the world.
You know what I feel when your hair covers us? I feel that you have created
a world of our own and I love it, but it's temporary. We very much live in
a very large world in which my dad's feelings have a direct effect on how
we express our love. We very much live in a world where there are people
who would hurt us because we love each other. I guess I have been made more
conscious of that world than you have until, for whatever reason, you realized
it with a bang today. I hope it doesn't take away your playfulness and your
spontaneity, but..."
"But, Luke, help me to realize that
I don't own you and that others love you and have a right to be with you
and love you."
Again we were silent then Luke said,
"Another bump in the road behind us?" I answered with a tender kiss. "But
since we are here and no-one's expecting us..." Luke started undressing me,
making love to my body with his amazing lips. When I was undressed, I undressed
my love and, as I lay on his body, he undid my hair and we did have our private
world, even if it was temporary.
It took a dive from the top of the
falls and a longish swim to wash away the evidence of our having left another
bump in our road behind.